pinentry-tqt: updated based on upstream version 1.2.1.

Signed-off-by: Slávek Banko <slavek.banko@axis.cz>

10 files changed, 0 insertions, 11861 deletions

diff --git a/debian/pinentry-tqt/pinentry-tqt-1.1.0/doc/HACKING b/debian/pinentry-tqt/pinentry-tqt-1.1.0/doc/HACKING
deleted file mode 100644
index f48721ee..00000000
--- a/debian/pinentry-tqt/pinentry-tqt-1.1.0/doc/HACKING
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,38 +0,0 @@
-# HACKING                                                       -*- org -*-
-#+TITLE: Hacking notes for PINentry
-#+STARTUP: showall
-
-* No ChangeLog files
-
-  Do not write ChangeLog files for Pinentry.  We put change
-  information only in the GIT commit log, and generate a top-level
-  ChangeLog file from logs at "make dist" time.  As such, there are
-  strict requirements on the form of the commit log messages.
-
-
-* Commit log requirements
-
-  Your commit log should always start with a one-line summary, the
-  second line should be blank, and the remaining lines are usually
-  ChangeLog-style entries for all affected files.  However, it's fine
-  -- even recommended -- to write a few lines of prose describing the
-  change, when the summary and ChangeLog entries don't give enough of
-  the big picture.  Omit the leading TABs that you're used to seeing
-  in a "real" ChangeLog file, but keep the maximum line length at 72
-  or smaller, so that the generated ChangeLog lines, each with its
-  leading TAB, will not exceed 80 columns.
-
-  For more infomration please check the HACHING file from the GnuPG
-  project.
-
-* String translation
-
-  Pinentry does not not require any translation files because it
-  expects that all strings are provided localized by the caller.  This
-  is due to the design constraint to keep the tool simple and also to
-  make sure that translations match those of GnuPG.
-
-  The available translated strings can be found in GnuPG, file
-  agent/call-pinentry, function start_pinentry.  If a string is not
-  available the Pinentry code uses a default as a fallback.  However,
-  it is highly suggested to provide Pinentry with translated strings.
diff --git a/debian/pinentry-tqt/pinentry-tqt-1.1.0/doc/Makefile.am b/debian/pinentry-tqt/pinentry-tqt-1.1.0/doc/Makefile.am
deleted file mode 100644
index e02b74c9..00000000
--- a/debian/pinentry-tqt/pinentry-tqt-1.1.0/doc/Makefile.am
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,27 +0,0 @@
-# Copyright (C) 2002 g10 Code GmbH
-#
-# This file is part of PINENTRY.
-#
-# PINENTRY is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify
-# it under the terms of the GNU General Public License as published by
-# the Free Software Foundation; either version 2 of the License, or
-# (at your option) any later version.
-#
-# PINENTRY is distributed in the hope that it will be useful,
-# but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
-# MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.  See the
-# GNU General Public License for more details.
-#
-# You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License
-# along with this program; if not, write to the Free Software
-# Foundation, Inc., 59 Temple Place - Suite 330, Boston, MA 02111-1307, USA
-
-## Process this file with automake to produce Makefile.in
-
-EXTRA_DIST = HACKING
-
-info_TEXINFOS = pinentry.texi
-
-pinentry_TEXINFOS = gpl.texi
-
-DISTCLEANFILES = pinentry.tmp pinentry.ops
diff --git a/debian/pinentry-tqt/pinentry-tqt-1.1.0/doc/Makefile.in b/debian/pinentry-tqt/pinentry-tqt-1.1.0/doc/Makefile.in
deleted file mode 100644
index 678205f6..00000000
--- a/debian/pinentry-tqt/pinentry-tqt-1.1.0/doc/Makefile.in
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,806 +0,0 @@
-# Makefile.in generated by automake 1.14.1 from Makefile.am.
-# @configure_input@
-
-# Copyright (C) 1994-2013 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
-
-# This Makefile.in is free software; the Free Software Foundation
-# gives unlimited permission to copy and/or distribute it,
-# with or without modifications, as long as this notice is preserved.
-
-# This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful,
-# but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY, to the extent permitted by law; without
-# even the implied warranty of MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A
-# PARTICULAR PURPOSE.
-
-@SET_MAKE@
-
-# Copyright (C) 2002 g10 Code GmbH
-#
-# This file is part of PINENTRY.
-#
-# PINENTRY is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify
-# it under the terms of the GNU General Public License as published by
-# the Free Software Foundation; either version 2 of the License, or
-# (at your option) any later version.
-#
-# PINENTRY is distributed in the hope that it will be useful,
-# but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
-# MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.  See the
-# GNU General Public License for more details.
-#
-# You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License
-# along with this program; if not, write to the Free Software
-# Foundation, Inc., 59 Temple Place - Suite 330, Boston, MA 02111-1307, USA
-VPATH = @srcdir@
-am__is_gnu_make = test -n '$(MAKEFILE_LIST)' && test -n '$(MAKELEVEL)'
-am__make_running_with_option = \
-  case $${target_option-} in \
-      ?) ;; \
-      *) echo "am__make_running_with_option: internal error: invalid" \
-              "target option '$${target_option-}' specified" >&2; \
-         exit 1;; \
-  esac; \
-  has_opt=no; \
-  sane_makeflags=$$MAKEFLAGS; \
-  if $(am__is_gnu_make); then \
-    sane_makeflags=$$MFLAGS; \
-  else \
-    case $$MAKEFLAGS in \
-      *\\[\ \	]*) \
-        bs=\\; \
-        sane_makeflags=`printf '%s\n' "$$MAKEFLAGS" \
-          | sed "s/$$bs$$bs[$$bs $$bs	]*//g"`;; \
-    esac; \
-  fi; \
-  skip_next=no; \
-  strip_trailopt () \
-  { \
-    flg=`printf '%s\n' "$$flg" | sed "s/$$1.*$$//"`; \
-  }; \
-  for flg in $$sane_makeflags; do \
-    test $$skip_next = yes && { skip_next=no; continue; }; \
-    case $$flg in \
-      *=*|--*) continue;; \
-        -*I) strip_trailopt 'I'; skip_next=yes;; \
-      -*I?*) strip_trailopt 'I';; \
-        -*O) strip_trailopt 'O'; skip_next=yes;; \
-      -*O?*) strip_trailopt 'O';; \
-        -*l) strip_trailopt 'l'; skip_next=yes;; \
-      -*l?*) strip_trailopt 'l';; \
-      -[dEDm]) skip_next=yes;; \
-      -[JT]) skip_next=yes;; \
-    esac; \
-    case $$flg in \
-      *$$target_option*) has_opt=yes; break;; \
-    esac; \
-  done; \
-  test $$has_opt = yes
-am__make_dryrun = (target_option=n; $(am__make_running_with_option))
-am__make_keepgoing = (target_option=k; $(am__make_running_with_option))
-pkgdatadir = $(datadir)/@PACKAGE@
-pkgincludedir = $(includedir)/@PACKAGE@
-pkglibdir = $(libdir)/@PACKAGE@
-pkglibexecdir = $(libexecdir)/@PACKAGE@
-am__cd = CDPATH="$${ZSH_VERSION+.}$(PATH_SEPARATOR)" && cd
-install_sh_DATA = $(install_sh) -c -m 644
-install_sh_PROGRAM = $(install_sh) -c
-install_sh_SCRIPT = $(install_sh) -c
-INSTALL_HEADER = $(INSTALL_DATA)
-transform = $(program_transform_name)
-NORMAL_INSTALL = :
-PRE_INSTALL = :
-POST_INSTALL = :
-NORMAL_UNINSTALL = :
-PRE_UNINSTALL = :
-POST_UNINSTALL = :
-build_triplet = @build@
-host_triplet = @host@
-subdir = doc
-DIST_COMMON = $(srcdir)/Makefile.in $(srcdir)/Makefile.am \
-	$(pinentry_TEXINFOS) $(top_srcdir)/build-aux/mdate-sh \
-	$(srcdir)/version.texi $(srcdir)/stamp-vti \
-	$(top_srcdir)/build-aux/texinfo.tex mdate-sh texinfo.tex
-ACLOCAL_M4 = $(top_srcdir)/aclocal.m4
-am__aclocal_m4_deps = $(top_srcdir)/m4/curses.m4 \
-	$(top_srcdir)/m4/gpg-error.m4 $(top_srcdir)/m4/iconv.m4 \
-	$(top_srcdir)/m4/libassuan.m4 $(top_srcdir)/m4/pkg.m4 \
-	$(top_srcdir)/m4/qt.m4 $(top_srcdir)/acinclude.m4 \
-	$(top_srcdir)/configure.ac
-am__configure_deps = $(am__aclocal_m4_deps) $(CONFIGURE_DEPENDENCIES) \
-	$(ACLOCAL_M4)
-mkinstalldirs = $(install_sh) -d
-CONFIG_HEADER = $(top_builddir)/config.h
-CONFIG_CLEAN_FILES =
-CONFIG_CLEAN_VPATH_FILES =
-AM_V_P = $(am__v_P_@AM_V@)
-am__v_P_ = $(am__v_P_@AM_DEFAULT_V@)
-am__v_P_0 = false
-am__v_P_1 = :
-AM_V_GEN = $(am__v_GEN_@AM_V@)
-am__v_GEN_ = $(am__v_GEN_@AM_DEFAULT_V@)
-am__v_GEN_0 = @echo "  GEN     " $@;
-am__v_GEN_1 = 
-AM_V_at = $(am__v_at_@AM_V@)
-am__v_at_ = $(am__v_at_@AM_DEFAULT_V@)
-am__v_at_0 = @
-am__v_at_1 = 
-SOURCES =
-DIST_SOURCES =
-AM_V_DVIPS = $(am__v_DVIPS_@AM_V@)
-am__v_DVIPS_ = $(am__v_DVIPS_@AM_DEFAULT_V@)
-am__v_DVIPS_0 = @echo "  DVIPS   " $@;
-am__v_DVIPS_1 = 
-AM_V_MAKEINFO = $(am__v_MAKEINFO_@AM_V@)
-am__v_MAKEINFO_ = $(am__v_MAKEINFO_@AM_DEFAULT_V@)
-am__v_MAKEINFO_0 = @echo "  MAKEINFO" $@;
-am__v_MAKEINFO_1 = 
-AM_V_INFOHTML = $(am__v_INFOHTML_@AM_V@)
-am__v_INFOHTML_ = $(am__v_INFOHTML_@AM_DEFAULT_V@)
-am__v_INFOHTML_0 = @echo "  INFOHTML" $@;
-am__v_INFOHTML_1 = 
-AM_V_TEXI2DVI = $(am__v_TEXI2DVI_@AM_V@)
-am__v_TEXI2DVI_ = $(am__v_TEXI2DVI_@AM_DEFAULT_V@)
-am__v_TEXI2DVI_0 = @echo "  TEXI2DVI" $@;
-am__v_TEXI2DVI_1 = 
-AM_V_TEXI2PDF = $(am__v_TEXI2PDF_@AM_V@)
-am__v_TEXI2PDF_ = $(am__v_TEXI2PDF_@AM_DEFAULT_V@)
-am__v_TEXI2PDF_0 = @echo "  TEXI2PDF" $@;
-am__v_TEXI2PDF_1 = 
-AM_V_texinfo = $(am__v_texinfo_@AM_V@)
-am__v_texinfo_ = $(am__v_texinfo_@AM_DEFAULT_V@)
-am__v_texinfo_0 = -q
-am__v_texinfo_1 = 
-AM_V_texidevnull = $(am__v_texidevnull_@AM_V@)
-am__v_texidevnull_ = $(am__v_texidevnull_@AM_DEFAULT_V@)
-am__v_texidevnull_0 = > /dev/null
-am__v_texidevnull_1 = 
-INFO_DEPS = $(srcdir)/pinentry.info
-TEXINFO_TEX = $(top_srcdir)/build-aux/texinfo.tex
-am__TEXINFO_TEX_DIR = $(top_srcdir)/build-aux
-DVIS = pinentry.dvi
-PDFS = pinentry.pdf
-PSS = pinentry.ps
-HTMLS = pinentry.html
-TEXINFOS = pinentry.texi
-TEXI2DVI = texi2dvi
-TEXI2PDF = $(TEXI2DVI) --pdf --batch
-MAKEINFOHTML = $(MAKEINFO) --html
-AM_MAKEINFOHTMLFLAGS = $(AM_MAKEINFOFLAGS)
-DVIPS = dvips
-am__can_run_installinfo = \
-  case $$AM_UPDATE_INFO_DIR in \
-    n|no|NO) false;; \
-    *) (install-info --version) >/dev/null 2>&1;; \
-  esac
-am__installdirs = "$(DESTDIR)$(infodir)"
-am__vpath_adj_setup = srcdirstrip=`echo "$(srcdir)" | sed 's|.|.|g'`;
-am__vpath_adj = case $$p in \
-    $(srcdir)/*) f=`echo "$$p" | sed "s|^$$srcdirstrip/||"`;; \
-    *) f=$$p;; \
-  esac;
-am__strip_dir = f=`echo $$p | sed -e 's|^.*/||'`;
-am__install_max = 40
-am__nobase_strip_setup = \
-  srcdirstrip=`echo "$(srcdir)" | sed 's/[].[^$$\\*|]/\\\\&/g'`
-am__nobase_strip = \
-  for p in $$list; do echo "$$p"; done | sed -e "s|$$srcdirstrip/||"
-am__nobase_list = $(am__nobase_strip_setup); \
-  for p in $$list; do echo "$$p $$p"; done | \
-  sed "s| $$srcdirstrip/| |;"' / .*\//!s/ .*/ ./; s,\( .*\)/[^/]*$$,\1,' | \
-  $(AWK) 'BEGIN { files["."] = "" } { files[$$2] = files[$$2] " " $$1; \
-    if (++n[$$2] == $(am__install_max)) \
-      { print $$2, files[$$2]; n[$$2] = 0; files[$$2] = "" } } \
-    END { for (dir in files) print dir, files[dir] }'
-am__base_list = \
-  sed '$$!N;$$!N;$$!N;$$!N;$$!N;$$!N;$$!N;s/\n/ /g' | \
-  sed '$$!N;$$!N;$$!N;$$!N;s/\n/ /g'
-am__uninstall_files_from_dir = { \
-  test -z "$$files" \
-    || { test ! -d "$$dir" && test ! -f "$$dir" && test ! -r "$$dir"; } \
-    || { echo " ( cd '$$dir' && rm -f" $$files ")"; \
-         $(am__cd) "$$dir" && rm -f $$files; }; \
-  }
-am__tagged_files = $(HEADERS) $(SOURCES) $(TAGS_FILES) $(LISP)
-DISTFILES = $(DIST_COMMON) $(DIST_SOURCES) $(TEXINFOS) $(EXTRA_DIST)
-ACLOCAL = @ACLOCAL@
-AMTAR = @AMTAR@
-AM_DEFAULT_VERBOSITY = @AM_DEFAULT_VERBOSITY@
-AUTOCONF = @AUTOCONF@
-AUTOHEADER = @AUTOHEADER@
-AUTOMAKE = @AUTOMAKE@
-AWK = @AWK@
-CC = @CC@
-CCDEPMODE = @CCDEPMODE@
-CFLAGS = @CFLAGS@
-COMMON_CFLAGS = @COMMON_CFLAGS@
-COMMON_LIBS = @COMMON_LIBS@
-CPP = @CPP@
-CPPFLAGS = @CPPFLAGS@
-CXX = @CXX@
-CXXDEPMODE = @CXXDEPMODE@
-CXXFLAGS = @CXXFLAGS@
-CYGPATH_W = @CYGPATH_W@
-DEFS = @DEFS@
-DEPDIR = @DEPDIR@
-ECHO_C = @ECHO_C@
-ECHO_N = @ECHO_N@
-ECHO_T = @ECHO_T@
-EGREP = @EGREP@
-EXEEXT = @EXEEXT@
-FLTKCFLAGS = @FLTKCFLAGS@
-FLTKCXXFLAGS = @FLTKCXXFLAGS@
-FLTKLIBS = @FLTKLIBS@
-FLTK_CONFIG = @FLTK_CONFIG@
-GITLOG_TO_CHANGELOG = @GITLOG_TO_CHANGELOG@
-GNOME3_CFLAGS = @GNOME3_CFLAGS@
-GNOME3_LIBS = @GNOME3_LIBS@
-GPG_ERROR_CFLAGS = @GPG_ERROR_CFLAGS@
-GPG_ERROR_CONFIG = @GPG_ERROR_CONFIG@
-GPG_ERROR_LIBS = @GPG_ERROR_LIBS@
-GPG_ERROR_MT_CFLAGS = @GPG_ERROR_MT_CFLAGS@
-GPG_ERROR_MT_LIBS = @GPG_ERROR_MT_LIBS@
-GREP = @GREP@
-GTK2_CFLAGS = @GTK2_CFLAGS@
-GTK2_LIBS = @GTK2_LIBS@
-INSTALL = @INSTALL@
-INSTALL_DATA = @INSTALL_DATA@
-INSTALL_PROGRAM = @INSTALL_PROGRAM@
-INSTALL_SCRIPT = @INSTALL_SCRIPT@
-INSTALL_STRIP_PROGRAM = @INSTALL_STRIP_PROGRAM@
-LDFLAGS = @LDFLAGS@
-LIBASSUAN_CFLAGS = @LIBASSUAN_CFLAGS@
-LIBASSUAN_CONFIG = @LIBASSUAN_CONFIG@
-LIBASSUAN_LIBS = @LIBASSUAN_LIBS@
-LIBCAP = @LIBCAP@
-LIBCURSES = @LIBCURSES@
-LIBICONV = @LIBICONV@
-LIBNCURSES = @LIBNCURSES@
-LIBOBJS = @LIBOBJS@
-LIBS = @LIBS@
-LIBSECRET_CFLAGS = @LIBSECRET_CFLAGS@
-LIBSECRET_LIBS = @LIBSECRET_LIBS@
-LIBTERMCAP = @LIBTERMCAP@
-LN_S = @LN_S@
-LTLIBICONV = @LTLIBICONV@
-LTLIBOBJS = @LTLIBOBJS@
-MAINT = @MAINT@
-MAKEINFO = @MAKEINFO@
-MKDIR_P = @MKDIR_P@
-MOC = @MOC@
-MOC2 = @MOC2@
-NCURSES_CFLAGS = @NCURSES_CFLAGS@
-NCURSES_INCLUDE = @NCURSES_INCLUDE@
-NCURSES_LIBS = @NCURSES_LIBS@
-OBJEXT = @OBJEXT@
-PACKAGE = @PACKAGE@
-PACKAGE_BUGREPORT = @PACKAGE_BUGREPORT@
-PACKAGE_NAME = @PACKAGE_NAME@
-PACKAGE_STRING = @PACKAGE_STRING@
-PACKAGE_TARNAME = @PACKAGE_TARNAME@
-PACKAGE_URL = @PACKAGE_URL@
-PACKAGE_VERSION = @PACKAGE_VERSION@
-PATH_SEPARATOR = @PATH_SEPARATOR@
-PINENTRY_DEFAULT = @PINENTRY_DEFAULT@
-PINENTRY_QT_CFLAGS = @PINENTRY_QT_CFLAGS@
-PINENTRY_QT_LIBS = @PINENTRY_QT_LIBS@
-PINENTRY_QT_REQUIRE_CPP11_CFLAGS = @PINENTRY_QT_REQUIRE_CPP11_CFLAGS@
-PINENTRY_QT_REQUIRE_CPP11_LIBS = @PINENTRY_QT_REQUIRE_CPP11_LIBS@
-PINENTRY_TQT_CFLAGS = @PINENTRY_TQT_CFLAGS@
-PINENTRY_TQT_LIBS = @PINENTRY_TQT_LIBS@
-PKG_CONFIG = @PKG_CONFIG@
-QTCHOOSER = @QTCHOOSER@
-RANLIB = @RANLIB@
-SETCAP = @SETCAP@
-SET_MAKE = @SET_MAKE@
-SHELL = @SHELL@
-STRIP = @STRIP@
-TQT_MOC = @TQT_MOC@
-VERSION = @VERSION@
-WINDRES = @WINDRES@
-abs_builddir = @abs_builddir@
-abs_srcdir = @abs_srcdir@
-abs_top_builddir = @abs_top_builddir@
-abs_top_srcdir = @abs_top_srcdir@
-ac_ct_CC = @ac_ct_CC@
-ac_ct_CXX = @ac_ct_CXX@
-am__include = @am__include@
-am__leading_dot = @am__leading_dot@
-am__quote = @am__quote@
-am__tar = @am__tar@
-am__untar = @am__untar@
-bindir = @bindir@
-build = @build@
-build_alias = @build_alias@
-build_cpu = @build_cpu@
-build_os = @build_os@
-build_vendor = @build_vendor@
-builddir = @builddir@
-datadir = @datadir@
-datarootdir = @datarootdir@
-docdir = @docdir@
-dvidir = @dvidir@
-exec_prefix = @exec_prefix@
-host = @host@
-host_alias = @host_alias@
-host_cpu = @host_cpu@
-host_os = @host_os@
-host_vendor = @host_vendor@
-htmldir = @htmldir@
-includedir = @includedir@
-infodir = @infodir@
-install_sh = @install_sh@
-libdir = @libdir@
-libexecdir = @libexecdir@
-localedir = @localedir@
-localstatedir = @localstatedir@
-mandir = @mandir@
-mkdir_p = @mkdir_p@
-oldincludedir = @oldincludedir@
-pdfdir = @pdfdir@
-prefix = @prefix@
-program_transform_name = @program_transform_name@
-psdir = @psdir@
-sbindir = @sbindir@
-sharedstatedir = @sharedstatedir@
-srcdir = @srcdir@
-sysconfdir = @sysconfdir@
-target_alias = @target_alias@
-top_build_prefix = @top_build_prefix@
-top_builddir = @top_builddir@
-top_srcdir = @top_srcdir@
-EXTRA_DIST = HACKING
-info_TEXINFOS = pinentry.texi
-pinentry_TEXINFOS = gpl.texi
-DISTCLEANFILES = pinentry.tmp pinentry.ops
-all: all-am
-
-.SUFFIXES:
-.SUFFIXES: .dvi .html .info .pdf .ps .texi
-$(srcdir)/Makefile.in: @MAINTAINER_MODE_TRUE@ $(srcdir)/Makefile.am  $(am__configure_deps)
-	@for dep in $?; do \
-	  case '$(am__configure_deps)' in \
-	    *$$dep*) \
-	      ( cd $(top_builddir) && $(MAKE) $(AM_MAKEFLAGS) am--refresh ) \
-	        && { if test -f $@; then exit 0; else break; fi; }; \
-	      exit 1;; \
-	  esac; \
-	done; \
-	echo ' cd $(top_srcdir) && $(AUTOMAKE) --gnu doc/Makefile'; \
-	$(am__cd) $(top_srcdir) && \
-	  $(AUTOMAKE) --gnu doc/Makefile
-.PRECIOUS: Makefile
-Makefile: $(srcdir)/Makefile.in $(top_builddir)/config.status
-	@case '$?' in \
-	  *config.status*) \
-	    cd $(top_builddir) && $(MAKE) $(AM_MAKEFLAGS) am--refresh;; \
-	  *) \
-	    echo ' cd $(top_builddir) && $(SHELL) ./config.status $(subdir)/$@ $(am__depfiles_maybe)'; \
-	    cd $(top_builddir) && $(SHELL) ./config.status $(subdir)/$@ $(am__depfiles_maybe);; \
-	esac;
-
-$(top_builddir)/config.status: $(top_srcdir)/configure $(CONFIG_STATUS_DEPENDENCIES)
-	cd $(top_builddir) && $(MAKE) $(AM_MAKEFLAGS) am--refresh
-
-$(top_srcdir)/configure: @MAINTAINER_MODE_TRUE@ $(am__configure_deps)
-	cd $(top_builddir) && $(MAKE) $(AM_MAKEFLAGS) am--refresh
-$(ACLOCAL_M4): @MAINTAINER_MODE_TRUE@ $(am__aclocal_m4_deps)
-	cd $(top_builddir) && $(MAKE) $(AM_MAKEFLAGS) am--refresh
-$(am__aclocal_m4_deps):
-
-.texi.info:
-	$(AM_V_MAKEINFO)restore=: && backupdir="$(am__leading_dot)am$$$$" && \
-	am__cwd=`pwd` && $(am__cd) $(srcdir) && \
-	rm -rf $$backupdir && mkdir $$backupdir && \
-	if ($(MAKEINFO) --version) >/dev/null 2>&1; then \
-	  for f in $@ $@-[0-9] $@-[0-9][0-9] $(@:.info=).i[0-9] $(@:.info=).i[0-9][0-9]; do \
-	    if test -f $$f; then mv $$f $$backupdir; restore=mv; else :; fi; \
-	  done; \
-	else :; fi && \
-	cd "$$am__cwd"; \
-	if $(MAKEINFO) $(AM_MAKEINFOFLAGS) $(MAKEINFOFLAGS) -I $(srcdir) \
-	 -o $@ $<; \
-	then \
-	  rc=0; \
-	  $(am__cd) $(srcdir); \
-	else \
-	  rc=$$?; \
-	  $(am__cd) $(srcdir) && \
-	  $$restore $$backupdir/* `echo "./$@" | sed 's|[^/]*$$||'`; \
-	fi; \
-	rm -rf $$backupdir; exit $$rc
-
-.texi.dvi:
-	$(AM_V_TEXI2DVI)TEXINPUTS="$(am__TEXINFO_TEX_DIR)$(PATH_SEPARATOR)$$TEXINPUTS" \
-	MAKEINFO='$(MAKEINFO) $(AM_MAKEINFOFLAGS) $(MAKEINFOFLAGS) -I $(srcdir)' \
-	$(TEXI2DVI) $(AM_V_texinfo) --build-dir=$(@:.dvi=.t2d) -o $@ $(AM_V_texidevnull) \
-	$<
-
-.texi.pdf:
-	$(AM_V_TEXI2PDF)TEXINPUTS="$(am__TEXINFO_TEX_DIR)$(PATH_SEPARATOR)$$TEXINPUTS" \
-	MAKEINFO='$(MAKEINFO) $(AM_MAKEINFOFLAGS) $(MAKEINFOFLAGS) -I $(srcdir)' \
-	$(TEXI2PDF) $(AM_V_texinfo) --build-dir=$(@:.pdf=.t2p) -o $@ $(AM_V_texidevnull) \
-	$<
-
-.texi.html:
-	$(AM_V_MAKEINFO)rm -rf $(@:.html=.htp)
-	$(AM_V_at)if $(MAKEINFOHTML) $(AM_MAKEINFOHTMLFLAGS) $(MAKEINFOFLAGS) -I $(srcdir) \
-	 -o $(@:.html=.htp) $<; \
-	then \
-	  rm -rf $@ && mv $(@:.html=.htp) $@; \
-	else \
-	  rm -rf $(@:.html=.htp); exit 1; \
-	fi
-$(srcdir)/pinentry.info: pinentry.texi $(srcdir)/version.texi $(pinentry_TEXINFOS)
-pinentry.dvi: pinentry.texi $(srcdir)/version.texi $(pinentry_TEXINFOS)
-pinentry.pdf: pinentry.texi $(srcdir)/version.texi $(pinentry_TEXINFOS)
-pinentry.html: pinentry.texi $(srcdir)/version.texi $(pinentry_TEXINFOS)
-$(srcdir)/version.texi: @MAINTAINER_MODE_TRUE@ $(srcdir)/stamp-vti
-$(srcdir)/stamp-vti: pinentry.texi $(top_srcdir)/configure
-	@(dir=.; test -f ./pinentry.texi || dir=$(srcdir); \
-	set `$(SHELL) $(top_srcdir)/build-aux/mdate-sh $$dir/pinentry.texi`; \
-	echo "@set UPDATED $$1 $$2 $$3"; \
-	echo "@set UPDATED-MONTH $$2 $$3"; \
-	echo "@set EDITION $(VERSION)"; \
-	echo "@set VERSION $(VERSION)") > vti.tmp
-	@cmp -s vti.tmp $(srcdir)/version.texi \
-	  || (echo "Updating $(srcdir)/version.texi"; \
-	      cp vti.tmp $(srcdir)/version.texi)
-	-@rm -f vti.tmp
-	@cp $(srcdir)/version.texi $@
-
-mostlyclean-vti:
-	-rm -f vti.tmp
-
-maintainer-clean-vti:
-@MAINTAINER_MODE_TRUE@	-rm -f $(srcdir)/stamp-vti $(srcdir)/version.texi
-.dvi.ps:
-	$(AM_V_DVIPS)TEXINPUTS="$(am__TEXINFO_TEX_DIR)$(PATH_SEPARATOR)$$TEXINPUTS" \
-	$(DVIPS) $(AM_V_texinfo) -o $@ $<
-
-uninstall-dvi-am:
-	@$(NORMAL_UNINSTALL)
-	@list='$(DVIS)'; test -n "$(dvidir)" || list=; \
-	for p in $$list; do \
-	  $(am__strip_dir) \
-	  echo " rm -f '$(DESTDIR)$(dvidir)/$$f'"; \
-	  rm -f "$(DESTDIR)$(dvidir)/$$f"; \
-	done
-
-uninstall-html-am:
-	@$(NORMAL_UNINSTALL)
-	@list='$(HTMLS)'; test -n "$(htmldir)" || list=; \
-	for p in $$list; do \
-	  $(am__strip_dir) \
-	  echo " rm -rf '$(DESTDIR)$(htmldir)/$$f'"; \
-	  rm -rf "$(DESTDIR)$(htmldir)/$$f"; \
-	done
-
-uninstall-info-am:
-	@$(PRE_UNINSTALL)
-	@if test -d '$(DESTDIR)$(infodir)' && $(am__can_run_installinfo); then \
-	  list='$(INFO_DEPS)'; \
-	  for file in $$list; do \
-	    relfile=`echo "$$file" | sed 's|^.*/||'`; \
-	    echo " install-info --info-dir='$(DESTDIR)$(infodir)' --remove '$(DESTDIR)$(infodir)/$$relfile'"; \
-	    if install-info --info-dir="$(DESTDIR)$(infodir)" --remove "$(DESTDIR)$(infodir)/$$relfile"; \
-	    then :; else test ! -f "$(DESTDIR)$(infodir)/$$relfile" || exit 1; fi; \
-	  done; \
-	else :; fi
-	@$(NORMAL_UNINSTALL)
-	@list='$(INFO_DEPS)'; \
-	for file in $$list; do \
-	  relfile=`echo "$$file" | sed 's|^.*/||'`; \
-	  relfile_i=`echo "$$relfile" | sed 's|\.info$$||;s|$$|.i|'`; \
-	  (if test -d "$(DESTDIR)$(infodir)" && cd "$(DESTDIR)$(infodir)"; then \
-	     echo " cd '$(DESTDIR)$(infodir)' && rm -f $$relfile $$relfile-[0-9] $$relfile-[0-9][0-9] $$relfile_i[0-9] $$relfile_i[0-9][0-9]"; \
-	     rm -f $$relfile $$relfile-[0-9] $$relfile-[0-9][0-9] $$relfile_i[0-9] $$relfile_i[0-9][0-9]; \
-	   else :; fi); \
-	done
-
-uninstall-pdf-am:
-	@$(NORMAL_UNINSTALL)
-	@list='$(PDFS)'; test -n "$(pdfdir)" || list=; \
-	for p in $$list; do \
-	  $(am__strip_dir) \
-	  echo " rm -f '$(DESTDIR)$(pdfdir)/$$f'"; \
-	  rm -f "$(DESTDIR)$(pdfdir)/$$f"; \
-	done
-
-uninstall-ps-am:
-	@$(NORMAL_UNINSTALL)
-	@list='$(PSS)'; test -n "$(psdir)" || list=; \
-	for p in $$list; do \
-	  $(am__strip_dir) \
-	  echo " rm -f '$(DESTDIR)$(psdir)/$$f'"; \
-	  rm -f "$(DESTDIR)$(psdir)/$$f"; \
-	done
-
-dist-info: $(INFO_DEPS)
-	@srcdirstrip=`echo "$(srcdir)" | sed 's|.|.|g'`; \
-	list='$(INFO_DEPS)'; \
-	for base in $$list; do \
-	  case $$base in \
-	    $(srcdir)/*) base=`echo "$$base" | sed "s|^$$srcdirstrip/||"`;; \
-	  esac; \
-	  if test -f $$base; then d=.; else d=$(srcdir); fi; \
-	  base_i=`echo "$$base" | sed 's|\.info$$||;s|$$|.i|'`; \
-	  for file in $$d/$$base $$d/$$base-[0-9] $$d/$$base-[0-9][0-9] $$d/$$base_i[0-9] $$d/$$base_i[0-9][0-9]; do \
-	    if test -f $$file; then \
-	      relfile=`expr "$$file" : "$$d/\(.*\)"`; \
-	      test -f "$(distdir)/$$relfile" || \
-		cp -p $$file "$(distdir)/$$relfile"; \
-	    else :; fi; \
-	  done; \
-	done
-
-mostlyclean-aminfo:
-	-rm -rf pinentry.t2d pinentry.t2p
-
-clean-aminfo:
-	-test -z "pinentry.dvi pinentry.pdf pinentry.ps pinentry.html" \
-	|| rm -rf pinentry.dvi pinentry.pdf pinentry.ps pinentry.html
-
-maintainer-clean-aminfo:
-	@list='$(INFO_DEPS)'; for i in $$list; do \
-	  i_i=`echo "$$i" | sed 's|\.info$$||;s|$$|.i|'`; \
-	  echo " rm -f $$i $$i-[0-9] $$i-[0-9][0-9] $$i_i[0-9] $$i_i[0-9][0-9]"; \
-	  rm -f $$i $$i-[0-9] $$i-[0-9][0-9] $$i_i[0-9] $$i_i[0-9][0-9]; \
-	done
-tags TAGS:
-
-ctags CTAGS:
-
-cscope cscopelist:
-
-
-distdir: $(DISTFILES)
-	@srcdirstrip=`echo "$(srcdir)" | sed 's/[].[^$$\\*]/\\\\&/g'`; \
-	topsrcdirstrip=`echo "$(top_srcdir)" | sed 's/[].[^$$\\*]/\\\\&/g'`; \
-	list='$(DISTFILES)'; \
-	  dist_files=`for file in $$list; do echo $$file; done | \
-	  sed -e "s|^$$srcdirstrip/||;t" \
-	      -e "s|^$$topsrcdirstrip/|$(top_builddir)/|;t"`; \
-	case $$dist_files in \
-	  */*) $(MKDIR_P) `echo "$$dist_files" | \
-			   sed '/\//!d;s|^|$(distdir)/|;s,/[^/]*$$,,' | \
-			   sort -u` ;; \
-	esac; \
-	for file in $$dist_files; do \
-	  if test -f $$file || test -d $$file; then d=.; else d=$(srcdir); fi; \
-	  if test -d $$d/$$file; then \
-	    dir=`echo "/$$file" | sed -e 's,/[^/]*$$,,'`; \
-	    if test -d "$(distdir)/$$file"; then \
-	      find "$(distdir)/$$file" -type d ! -perm -700 -exec chmod u+rwx {} \;; \
-	    fi; \
-	    if test -d $(srcdir)/$$file && test $$d != $(srcdir); then \
-	      cp -fpR $(srcdir)/$$file "$(distdir)$$dir" || exit 1; \
-	      find "$(distdir)/$$file" -type d ! -perm -700 -exec chmod u+rwx {} \;; \
-	    fi; \
-	    cp -fpR $$d/$$file "$(distdir)$$dir" || exit 1; \
-	  else \
-	    test -f "$(distdir)/$$file" \
-	    || cp -p $$d/$$file "$(distdir)/$$file" \
-	    || exit 1; \
-	  fi; \
-	done
-	$(MAKE) $(AM_MAKEFLAGS) \
-	  top_distdir="$(top_distdir)" distdir="$(distdir)" \
-	  dist-info
-check-am: all-am
-check: check-am
-all-am: Makefile $(INFO_DEPS)
-installdirs:
-	for dir in "$(DESTDIR)$(infodir)"; do \
-	  test -z "$$dir" || $(MKDIR_P) "$$dir"; \
-	done
-install: install-am
-install-exec: install-exec-am
-install-data: install-data-am
-uninstall: uninstall-am
-
-install-am: all-am
-	@$(MAKE) $(AM_MAKEFLAGS) install-exec-am install-data-am
-
-installcheck: installcheck-am
-install-strip:
-	if test -z '$(STRIP)'; then \
-	  $(MAKE) $(AM_MAKEFLAGS) INSTALL_PROGRAM="$(INSTALL_STRIP_PROGRAM)" \
-	    install_sh_PROGRAM="$(INSTALL_STRIP_PROGRAM)" INSTALL_STRIP_FLAG=-s \
-	      install; \
-	else \
-	  $(MAKE) $(AM_MAKEFLAGS) INSTALL_PROGRAM="$(INSTALL_STRIP_PROGRAM)" \
-	    install_sh_PROGRAM="$(INSTALL_STRIP_PROGRAM)" INSTALL_STRIP_FLAG=-s \
-	    "INSTALL_PROGRAM_ENV=STRIPPROG='$(STRIP)'" install; \
-	fi
-mostlyclean-generic:
-
-clean-generic:
-
-distclean-generic:
-	-test -z "$(CONFIG_CLEAN_FILES)" || rm -f $(CONFIG_CLEAN_FILES)
-	-test . = "$(srcdir)" || test -z "$(CONFIG_CLEAN_VPATH_FILES)" || rm -f $(CONFIG_CLEAN_VPATH_FILES)
-	-test -z "$(DISTCLEANFILES)" || rm -f $(DISTCLEANFILES)
-
-maintainer-clean-generic:
-	@echo "This command is intended for maintainers to use"
-	@echo "it deletes files that may require special tools to rebuild."
-clean: clean-am
-
-clean-am: clean-aminfo clean-generic mostlyclean-am
-
-distclean: distclean-am
-	-rm -f Makefile
-distclean-am: clean-am distclean-generic
-
-dvi: dvi-am
-
-dvi-am: $(DVIS)
-
-html: html-am
-
-html-am: $(HTMLS)
-
-info: info-am
-
-info-am: $(INFO_DEPS)
-
-install-data-am: install-info-am
-
-install-dvi: install-dvi-am
-
-install-dvi-am: $(DVIS)
-	@$(NORMAL_INSTALL)
-	@list='$(DVIS)'; test -n "$(dvidir)" || list=; \
-	if test -n "$$list"; then \
-	  echo " $(MKDIR_P) '$(DESTDIR)$(dvidir)'"; \
-	  $(MKDIR_P) "$(DESTDIR)$(dvidir)" || exit 1; \
-	fi; \
-	for p in $$list; do \
-	  if test -f "$$p"; then d=; else d="$(srcdir)/"; fi; \
-	  echo "$$d$$p"; \
-	done | $(am__base_list) | \
-	while read files; do \
-	  echo " $(INSTALL_DATA) $$files '$(DESTDIR)$(dvidir)'"; \
-	  $(INSTALL_DATA) $$files "$(DESTDIR)$(dvidir)" || exit $$?; \
-	done
-install-exec-am:
-
-install-html: install-html-am
-
-install-html-am: $(HTMLS)
-	@$(NORMAL_INSTALL)
-	@list='$(HTMLS)'; list2=; test -n "$(htmldir)" || list=; \
-	if test -n "$$list"; then \
-	  echo " $(MKDIR_P) '$(DESTDIR)$(htmldir)'"; \
-	  $(MKDIR_P) "$(DESTDIR)$(htmldir)" || exit 1; \
-	fi; \
-	for p in $$list; do \
-	  if test -f "$$p" || test -d "$$p"; then d=; else d="$(srcdir)/"; fi; \
-	  $(am__strip_dir) \
-	  d2=$$d$$p; \
-	  if test -d "$$d2"; then \
-	    echo " $(MKDIR_P) '$(DESTDIR)$(htmldir)/$$f'"; \
-	    $(MKDIR_P) "$(DESTDIR)$(htmldir)/$$f" || exit 1; \
-	    echo " $(INSTALL_DATA) '$$d2'/* '$(DESTDIR)$(htmldir)/$$f'"; \
-	    $(INSTALL_DATA) "$$d2"/* "$(DESTDIR)$(htmldir)/$$f" || exit $$?; \
-	  else \
-	    list2="$$list2 $$d2"; \
-	  fi; \
-	done; \
-	test -z "$$list2" || { echo "$$list2" | $(am__base_list) | \
-	while read files; do \
-	  echo " $(INSTALL_DATA) $$files '$(DESTDIR)$(htmldir)'"; \
-	  $(INSTALL_DATA) $$files "$(DESTDIR)$(htmldir)" || exit $$?; \
-	done; }
-install-info: install-info-am
-
-install-info-am: $(INFO_DEPS)
-	@$(NORMAL_INSTALL)
-	@srcdirstrip=`echo "$(srcdir)" | sed 's|.|.|g'`; \
-	list='$(INFO_DEPS)'; test -n "$(infodir)" || list=; \
-	if test -n "$$list"; then \
-	  echo " $(MKDIR_P) '$(DESTDIR)$(infodir)'"; \
-	  $(MKDIR_P) "$(DESTDIR)$(infodir)" || exit 1; \
-	fi; \
-	for file in $$list; do \
-	  case $$file in \
-	    $(srcdir)/*) file=`echo "$$file" | sed "s|^$$srcdirstrip/||"`;; \
-	  esac; \
-	  if test -f $$file; then d=.; else d=$(srcdir); fi; \
-	  file_i=`echo "$$file" | sed 's|\.info$$||;s|$$|.i|'`; \
-	  for ifile in $$d/$$file $$d/$$file-[0-9] $$d/$$file-[0-9][0-9] \
-	               $$d/$$file_i[0-9] $$d/$$file_i[0-9][0-9] ; do \
-	    if test -f $$ifile; then \
-	      echo "$$ifile"; \
-	    else : ; fi; \
-	  done; \
-	done | $(am__base_list) | \
-	while read files; do \
-	  echo " $(INSTALL_DATA) $$files '$(DESTDIR)$(infodir)'"; \
-	  $(INSTALL_DATA) $$files "$(DESTDIR)$(infodir)" || exit $$?; done
-	@$(POST_INSTALL)
-	@if $(am__can_run_installinfo); then \
-	  list='$(INFO_DEPS)'; test -n "$(infodir)" || list=; \
-	  for file in $$list; do \
-	    relfile=`echo "$$file" | sed 's|^.*/||'`; \
-	    echo " install-info --info-dir='$(DESTDIR)$(infodir)' '$(DESTDIR)$(infodir)/$$relfile'";\
-	    install-info --info-dir="$(DESTDIR)$(infodir)" "$(DESTDIR)$(infodir)/$$relfile" || :;\
-	  done; \
-	else : ; fi
-install-man:
-
-install-pdf: install-pdf-am
-
-install-pdf-am: $(PDFS)
-	@$(NORMAL_INSTALL)
-	@list='$(PDFS)'; test -n "$(pdfdir)" || list=; \
-	if test -n "$$list"; then \
-	  echo " $(MKDIR_P) '$(DESTDIR)$(pdfdir)'"; \
-	  $(MKDIR_P) "$(DESTDIR)$(pdfdir)" || exit 1; \
-	fi; \
-	for p in $$list; do \
-	  if test -f "$$p"; then d=; else d="$(srcdir)/"; fi; \
-	  echo "$$d$$p"; \
-	done | $(am__base_list) | \
-	while read files; do \
-	  echo " $(INSTALL_DATA) $$files '$(DESTDIR)$(pdfdir)'"; \
-	  $(INSTALL_DATA) $$files "$(DESTDIR)$(pdfdir)" || exit $$?; done
-install-ps: install-ps-am
-
-install-ps-am: $(PSS)
-	@$(NORMAL_INSTALL)
-	@list='$(PSS)'; test -n "$(psdir)" || list=; \
-	if test -n "$$list"; then \
-	  echo " $(MKDIR_P) '$(DESTDIR)$(psdir)'"; \
-	  $(MKDIR_P) "$(DESTDIR)$(psdir)" || exit 1; \
-	fi; \
-	for p in $$list; do \
-	  if test -f "$$p"; then d=; else d="$(srcdir)/"; fi; \
-	  echo "$$d$$p"; \
-	done | $(am__base_list) | \
-	while read files; do \
-	  echo " $(INSTALL_DATA) $$files '$(DESTDIR)$(psdir)'"; \
-	  $(INSTALL_DATA) $$files "$(DESTDIR)$(psdir)" || exit $$?; done
-installcheck-am:
-
-maintainer-clean: maintainer-clean-am
-	-rm -f Makefile
-maintainer-clean-am: distclean-am maintainer-clean-aminfo \
-	maintainer-clean-generic maintainer-clean-vti
-
-mostlyclean: mostlyclean-am
-
-mostlyclean-am: mostlyclean-aminfo mostlyclean-generic mostlyclean-vti
-
-pdf: pdf-am
-
-pdf-am: $(PDFS)
-
-ps: ps-am
-
-ps-am: $(PSS)
-
-uninstall-am: uninstall-dvi-am uninstall-html-am uninstall-info-am \
-	uninstall-pdf-am uninstall-ps-am
-
-.MAKE: install-am install-strip
-
-.PHONY: all all-am check check-am clean clean-aminfo clean-generic \
-	cscopelist-am ctags-am dist-info distclean distclean-generic \
-	distdir dvi dvi-am html html-am info info-am install \
-	install-am install-data install-data-am install-dvi \
-	install-dvi-am install-exec install-exec-am install-html \
-	install-html-am install-info install-info-am install-man \
-	install-pdf install-pdf-am install-ps install-ps-am \
-	install-strip installcheck installcheck-am installdirs \
-	maintainer-clean maintainer-clean-aminfo \
-	maintainer-clean-generic maintainer-clean-vti mostlyclean \
-	mostlyclean-aminfo mostlyclean-generic mostlyclean-vti pdf \
-	pdf-am ps ps-am tags-am uninstall uninstall-am \
-	uninstall-dvi-am uninstall-html-am uninstall-info-am \
-	uninstall-pdf-am uninstall-ps-am
-
-
-# Tell versions [3.59,3.63) of GNU make to not export all variables.
-# Otherwise a system limit (for SysV at least) may be exceeded.
-.NOEXPORT:
diff --git a/debian/pinentry-tqt/pinentry-tqt-1.1.0/doc/gpl.texi b/debian/pinentry-tqt/pinentry-tqt-1.1.0/doc/gpl.texi
deleted file mode 100644
index 6eb301e2..00000000
--- a/debian/pinentry-tqt/pinentry-tqt-1.1.0/doc/gpl.texi
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,392 +0,0 @@
-@node Copying
-@unnumbered GNU General Public License
-
-@cindex GPL, GNU General Public License
-@center Version 2, June 1991
-
-@display
-Copyright @copyright{} 1989, 1991 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
-59 Temple Place -- Suite 330, Boston, MA 02111-1307, USA
-
-Everyone is permitted to copy and distribute verbatim copies
-of this license document, but changing it is not allowed.
-@end display
-
-@heading Preamble
-
-  The licenses for most software are designed to take away your
-freedom to share and change it.  By contrast, the GNU General Public
-License is intended to guarantee your freedom to share and change free
-software---to make sure the software is free for all its users.  This
-General Public License applies to most of the Free Software
-Foundation's software and to any other program whose authors commit to
-using it.  (Some other Free Software Foundation software is covered by
-the GNU Library General Public License instead.)  You can apply it to
-your programs, too.
-
-  When we speak of free software, we are referring to freedom, not
-price.  Our General Public Licenses are designed to make sure that you
-have the freedom to distribute copies of free software (and charge for
-this service if you wish), that you receive source code or can get it
-if you want it, that you can change the software or use pieces of it
-in new free programs; and that you know you can do these things.
-
-  To protect your rights, we need to make restrictions that forbid
-anyone to deny you these rights or to ask you to surrender the rights.
-These restrictions translate to certain responsibilities for you if you
-distribute copies of the software, or if you modify it.
-
-  For example, if you distribute copies of such a program, whether
-gratis or for a fee, you must give the recipients all the rights that
-you have.  You must make sure that they, too, receive or can get the
-source code.  And you must show them these terms so they know their
-rights.
-
-  We protect your rights with two steps: (1) copyright the software, and
-(2) offer you this license which gives you legal permission to copy,
-distribute and/or modify the software.
-
-  Also, for each author's protection and ours, we want to make certain
-that everyone understands that there is no warranty for this free
-software.  If the software is modified by someone else and passed on, we
-want its recipients to know that what they have is not the original, so
-that any problems introduced by others will not reflect on the original
-authors' reputations.
-
-  Finally, any free program is threatened constantly by software
-patents.  We wish to avoid the danger that redistributors of a free
-program will individually obtain patent licenses, in effect making the
-program proprietary.  To prevent this, we have made it clear that any
-patent must be licensed for everyone's free use or not licensed at all.
-
-  The precise terms and conditions for copying, distribution and
-modification follow.
-
-@iftex
-@heading TERMS AND CONDITIONS FOR COPYING, DISTRIBUTION AND MODIFICATION
-@end iftex
-@ifinfo
-@center TERMS AND CONDITIONS FOR COPYING, DISTRIBUTION AND MODIFICATION
-@end ifinfo
-
-@enumerate
-@item
-This License applies to any program or other work which contains
-a notice placed by the copyright holder saying it may be distributed
-under the terms of this General Public License.  The ``Program'', below,
-refers to any such program or work, and a ``work based on the Program''
-means either the Program or any derivative work under copyright law:
-that is to say, a work containing the Program or a portion of it,
-either verbatim or with modifications and/or translated into another
-language.  (Hereinafter, translation is included without limitation in
-the term ``modification''.)  Each licensee is addressed as ``you''.
-
-Activities other than copying, distribution and modification are not
-covered by this License; they are outside its scope.  The act of
-running the Program is not restricted, and the output from the Program
-is covered only if its contents constitute a work based on the
-Program (independent of having been made by running the Program).
-Whether that is true depends on what the Program does.
-
-@item
-You may copy and distribute verbatim copies of the Program's
-source code as you receive it, in any medium, provided that you
-conspicuously and appropriately publish on each copy an appropriate
-copyright notice and disclaimer of warranty; keep intact all the
-notices that refer to this License and to the absence of any warranty;
-and give any other recipients of the Program a copy of this License
-along with the Program.
-
-You may charge a fee for the physical act of transferring a copy, and
-you may at your option offer warranty protection in exchange for a fee.
-
-@item
-You may modify your copy or copies of the Program or any portion
-of it, thus forming a work based on the Program, and copy and
-distribute such modifications or work under the terms of Section 1
-above, provided that you also meet all of these conditions:
-
-@enumerate a
-@item
-You must cause the modified files to carry prominent notices
-stating that you changed the files and the date of any change.
-
-@item
-You must cause any work that you distribute or publish, that in
-whole or in part contains or is derived from the Program or any
-part thereof, to be licensed as a whole at no charge to all third
-parties under the terms of this License.
-
-@item
-If the modified program normally reads commands interactively
-when run, you must cause it, when started running for such
-interactive use in the most ordinary way, to print or display an
-announcement including an appropriate copyright notice and a
-notice that there is no warranty (or else, saying that you provide
-a warranty) and that users may redistribute the program under
-these conditions, and telling the user how to view a copy of this
-License.  (Exception: if the Program itself is interactive but
-does not normally print such an announcement, your work based on
-the Program is not required to print an announcement.)
-@end enumerate
-
-These requirements apply to the modified work as a whole.  If
-identifiable sections of that work are not derived from the Program,
-and can be reasonably considered independent and separate works in
-themselves, then this License, and its terms, do not apply to those
-sections when you distribute them as separate works.  But when you
-distribute the same sections as part of a whole which is a work based
-on the Program, the distribution of the whole must be on the terms of
-this License, whose permissions for other licensees extend to the
-entire whole, and thus to each and every part regardless of who wrote it.
-
-Thus, it is not the intent of this section to claim rights or contest
-your rights to work written entirely by you; rather, the intent is to
-exercise the right to control the distribution of derivative or
-collective works based on the Program.
-
-In addition, mere aggregation of another work not based on the Program
-with the Program (or with a work based on the Program) on a volume of
-a storage or distribution medium does not bring the other work under
-the scope of this License.
-
-@item
-You may copy and distribute the Program (or a work based on it,
-under Section 2) in object code or executable form under the terms of
-Sections 1 and 2 above provided that you also do one of the following:
-
-@enumerate a
-@item
-Accompany it with the complete corresponding machine-readable
-source code, which must be distributed under the terms of Sections
-1 and 2 above on a medium customarily used for software interchange; or,
-
-@item
-Accompany it with a written offer, valid for at least three
-years, to give any third party, for a charge no more than your
-cost of physically performing source distribution, a complete
-machine-readable copy of the corresponding source code, to be
-distributed under the terms of Sections 1 and 2 above on a medium
-customarily used for software interchange; or,
-
-@item
-Accompany it with the information you received as to the offer
-to distribute corresponding source code.  (This alternative is
-allowed only for noncommercial distribution and only if you
-received the program in object code or executable form with such
-an offer, in accord with Subsection b above.)
-@end enumerate
-
-The source code for a work means the preferred form of the work for
-making modifications to it.  For an executable work, complete source
-code means all the source code for all modules it contains, plus any
-associated interface definition files, plus the scripts used to
-control compilation and installation of the executable.  However, as a
-special exception, the source code distributed need not include
-anything that is normally distributed (in either source or binary
-form) with the major components (compiler, kernel, and so on) of the
-operating system on which the executable runs, unless that component
-itself accompanies the executable.
-
-If distribution of executable or object code is made by offering
-access to copy from a designated place, then offering equivalent
-access to copy the source code from the same place counts as
-distribution of the source code, even though third parties are not
-compelled to copy the source along with the object code.
-
-@item
-You may not copy, modify, sublicense, or distribute the Program
-except as expressly provided under this License.  Any attempt
-otherwise to copy, modify, sublicense or distribute the Program is
-void, and will automatically terminate your rights under this License.
-However, parties who have received copies, or rights, from you under
-this License will not have their licenses terminated so long as such
-parties remain in full compliance.
-
-@item
-You are not required to accept this License, since you have not
-signed it.  However, nothing else grants you permission to modify or
-distribute the Program or its derivative works.  These actions are
-prohibited by law if you do not accept this License.  Therefore, by
-modifying or distributing the Program (or any work based on the
-Program), you indicate your acceptance of this License to do so, and
-all its terms and conditions for copying, distributing or modifying
-the Program or works based on it.
-
-@item
-Each time you redistribute the Program (or any work based on the
-Program), the recipient automatically receives a license from the
-original licensor to copy, distribute or modify the Program subject to
-these terms and conditions.  You may not impose any further
-restrictions on the recipients' exercise of the rights granted herein.
-You are not responsible for enforcing compliance by third parties to
-this License.
-
-@item
-If, as a consequence of a court judgment or allegation of patent
-infringement or for any other reason (not limited to patent issues),
-conditions are imposed on you (whether by court order, agreement or
-otherwise) that contradict the conditions of this License, they do not
-excuse you from the conditions of this License.  If you cannot
-distribute so as to satisfy simultaneously your obligations under this
-License and any other pertinent obligations, then as a consequence you
-may not distribute the Program at all.  For example, if a patent
-license would not permit royalty-free redistribution of the Program by
-all those who receive copies directly or indirectly through you, then
-the only way you could satisfy both it and this License would be to
-refrain entirely from distribution of the Program.
-
-If any portion of this section is held invalid or unenforceable under
-any particular circumstance, the balance of the section is intended to
-apply and the section as a whole is intended to apply in other
-circumstances.
-
-It is not the purpose of this section to induce you to infringe any
-patents or other property right claims or to contest validity of any
-such claims; this section has the sole purpose of protecting the
-integrity of the free software distribution system, which is
-implemented by public license practices.  Many people have made
-generous contributions to the wide range of software distributed
-through that system in reliance on consistent application of that
-system; it is up to the author/donor to decide if he or she is willing
-to distribute software through any other system and a licensee cannot
-impose that choice.
-
-This section is intended to make thoroughly clear what is believed to
-be a consequence of the rest of this License.
-
-@item
-If the distribution and/or use of the Program is restricted in
-certain countries either by patents or by copyrighted interfaces, the
-original copyright holder who places the Program under this License
-may add an explicit geographical distribution limitation excluding
-those countries, so that distribution is permitted only in or among
-countries not thus excluded.  In such case, this License incorporates
-the limitation as if written in the body of this License.
-
-@item
-The Free Software Foundation may publish revised and/or new versions
-of the General Public License from time to time.  Such new versions will
-be similar in spirit to the present version, but may differ in detail to
-address new problems or concerns.
-
-Each version is given a distinguishing version number.  If the Program
-specifies a version number of this License which applies to it and ``any
-later version'', you have the option of following the terms and conditions
-either of that version or of any later version published by the Free
-Software Foundation.  If the Program does not specify a version number of
-this License, you may choose any version ever published by the Free Software
-Foundation.
-
-@item
-If you wish to incorporate parts of the Program into other free
-programs whose distribution conditions are different, write to the author
-to ask for permission.  For software which is copyrighted by the Free
-Software Foundation, write to the Free Software Foundation; we sometimes
-make exceptions for this.  Our decision will be guided by the two goals
-of preserving the free status of all derivatives of our free software and
-of promoting the sharing and reuse of software generally.
-
-@center NO WARRANTY
-
-@item
-BECAUSE THE PROGRAM IS LICENSED FREE OF CHARGE, THERE IS NO WARRANTY
-FOR THE PROGRAM, TO THE EXTENT PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW.  EXCEPT WHEN
-OTHERWISE STATED IN WRITING THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND/OR OTHER PARTIES
-PROVIDE THE PROGRAM ``AS IS'' WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EITHER EXPRESSED
-OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF
-MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.  THE ENTIRE RISK AS
-TO THE QUALITY AND PERFORMANCE OF THE PROGRAM IS WITH YOU.  SHOULD THE
-PROGRAM PROVE DEFECTIVE, YOU ASSUME THE COST OF ALL NECESSARY SERVICING,
-REPAIR OR CORRECTION.
-
-@item
-IN NO EVENT UNLESS REQUIRED BY APPLICABLE LAW OR AGREED TO IN WRITING
-WILL ANY COPYRIGHT HOLDER, OR ANY OTHER PARTY WHO MAY MODIFY AND/OR
-REDISTRIBUTE THE PROGRAM AS PERMITTED ABOVE, BE LIABLE TO YOU FOR DAMAGES,
-INCLUDING ANY GENERAL, SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES ARISING
-OUT OF THE USE OR INABILITY TO USE THE PROGRAM (INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED
-TO LOSS OF DATA OR DATA BEING RENDERED INACCURATE OR LOSSES SUSTAINED BY
-YOU OR THIRD PARTIES OR A FAILURE OF THE PROGRAM TO OPERATE WITH ANY OTHER
-PROGRAMS), EVEN IF SUCH HOLDER OR OTHER PARTY HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE
-POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES.
-@end enumerate
-
-@iftex
-@heading END OF TERMS AND CONDITIONS
-@end iftex
-@ifinfo
-@center END OF TERMS AND CONDITIONS
-@end ifinfo
-
-@page
-@heading How to Apply These Terms to Your New Programs
-
-  If you develop a new program, and you want it to be of the greatest
-possible use to the public, the best way to achieve this is to make it
-free software which everyone can redistribute and change under these terms.
-
-  To do so, attach the following notices to the program.  It is safest
-to attach them to the start of each source file to most effectively
-convey the exclusion of warranty; and each file should have at least
-the ``copyright'' line and a pointer to where the full notice is found.
-
-@smallexample
-@var{one line to give the program's name and an idea of what it does.}
-Copyright (C) 19@var{yy}  @var{name of author}
-
-This program is free software; you can redistribute it and/or
-modify it under the terms of the GNU General Public License
-as published by the Free Software Foundation; either version 2
-of the License, or (at your option) any later version.
-
-This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful,
-but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
-MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.  See the
-GNU General Public License for more details.
-
-You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License along
-with this program; if not, write to the Free Software Foundation, Inc.,
-59 Temple Place, Suite 330, Boston, MA 02111-1307, USA.
-@end smallexample
-
-Also add information on how to contact you by electronic and paper mail.
-
-If the program is interactive, make it output a short notice like this
-when it starts in an interactive mode:
-
-@smallexample
-Gnomovision version 69, Copyright (C) 19@var{yy} @var{name of author}
-Gnomovision comes with ABSOLUTELY NO WARRANTY; for details
-type `show w'.  This is free software, and you are welcome
-to redistribute it under certain conditions; type `show c'
-for details.
-@end smallexample
-
-The hypothetical commands @samp{show w} and @samp{show c} should show
-the appropriate parts of the General Public License.  Of course, the
-commands you use may be called something other than @samp{show w} and
-@samp{show c}; they could even be mouse-clicks or menu items---whatever
-suits your program.
-
-You should also get your employer (if you work as a programmer) or your
-school, if any, to sign a ``copyright disclaimer'' for the program, if
-necessary.  Here is a sample; alter the names:
-
-@smallexample
-@group
-Yoyodyne, Inc., hereby disclaims all copyright
-interest in the program `Gnomovision'
-(which makes passes at compilers) written
-by James Hacker.
-
-@var{signature of Ty Coon}, 1 April 1989
-Ty Coon, President of Vice
-@end group
-@end smallexample
-
-This General Public License does not permit incorporating your program into
-proprietary programs.  If your program is a subroutine library, you may
-consider it more useful to permit linking proprietary applications with the
-library.  If this is what you want to do, use the GNU Library General
-Public License instead of this License.
diff --git a/debian/pinentry-tqt/pinentry-tqt-1.1.0/doc/mdate-sh b/debian/pinentry-tqt/pinentry-tqt-1.1.0/doc/mdate-sh
deleted file mode 100755
index 83d27009..00000000
--- a/debian/pinentry-tqt/pinentry-tqt-1.1.0/doc/mdate-sh
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,205 +0,0 @@
-#!/bin/sh
-# Get modification time of a file or directory and pretty-print it.
-
-scriptversion=2007-03-30.02
-
-# Copyright (C) 1995, 1996, 1997, 2003, 2004, 2005, 2007 Free Software
-# Foundation, Inc.
-# written by Ulrich Drepper <drepper@gnu.ai.mit.edu>, June 1995
-#
-# This program is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify
-# it under the terms of the GNU General Public License as published by
-# the Free Software Foundation; either version 2, or (at your option)
-# any later version.
-#
-# This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful,
-# but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
-# MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.  See the
-# GNU General Public License for more details.
-#
-# You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License
-# along with this program; if not, write to the Free Software Foundation,
-# Inc., 51 Franklin Street, Fifth Floor, Boston, MA 02110-1301, USA.
-
-# As a special exception to the GNU General Public License, if you
-# distribute this file as part of a program that contains a
-# configuration script generated by Autoconf, you may include it under
-# the same distribution terms that you use for the rest of that program.
-
-# This file is maintained in Automake, please report
-# bugs to <bug-automake@gnu.org> or send patches to
-# <automake-patches@gnu.org>.
-
-case $1 in
-  '')
-     echo "$0: No file.  Try \`$0 --help' for more information." 1>&2
-     exit 1;
-     ;;
-  -h | --h*)
-    cat <<\EOF
-Usage: mdate-sh [--help] [--version] FILE
-
-Pretty-print the modification time of FILE.
-
-Report bugs to <bug-automake@gnu.org>.
-EOF
-    exit $?
-    ;;
-  -v | --v*)
-    echo "mdate-sh $scriptversion"
-    exit $?
-    ;;
-esac
-
-# Prevent date giving response in another language.
-LANG=C
-export LANG
-LC_ALL=C
-export LC_ALL
-LC_TIME=C
-export LC_TIME
-
-# GNU ls changes its time format in response to the TIME_STYLE
-# variable.  Since we cannot assume `unset' works, revert this
-# variable to its documented default.
-if test "${TIME_STYLE+set}" = set; then
-  TIME_STYLE=posix-long-iso
-  export TIME_STYLE
-fi
-
-save_arg1=$1
-
-# Find out how to get the extended ls output of a file or directory.
-if ls -L /dev/null 1>/dev/null 2>&1; then
-  ls_command='ls -L -l -d'
-else
-  ls_command='ls -l -d'
-fi
-# Avoid user/group names that might have spaces, when possible.
-if ls -n /dev/null 1>/dev/null 2>&1; then
-  ls_command="$ls_command -n"
-fi
-
-# A `ls -l' line looks as follows on OS/2.
-#  drwxrwx---        0 Aug 11  2001 foo
-# This differs from Unix, which adds ownership information.
-#  drwxrwx---   2 root  root      4096 Aug 11  2001 foo
-#
-# To find the date, we split the line on spaces and iterate on words
-# until we find a month.  This cannot work with files whose owner is a
-# user named `Jan', or `Feb', etc.  However, it's unlikely that `/'
-# will be owned by a user whose name is a month.  So we first look at
-# the extended ls output of the root directory to decide how many
-# words should be skipped to get the date.
-
-# On HPUX /bin/sh, "set" interprets "-rw-r--r--" as options, so the "x" below.
-set x`$ls_command /`
-
-# Find which argument is the month.
-month=
-command=
-until test $month
-do
-  shift
-  # Add another shift to the command.
-  command="$command shift;"
-  case $1 in
-    Jan) month=January; nummonth=1;;
-    Feb) month=February; nummonth=2;;
-    Mar) month=March; nummonth=3;;
-    Apr) month=April; nummonth=4;;
-    May) month=May; nummonth=5;;
-    Jun) month=June; nummonth=6;;
-    Jul) month=July; nummonth=7;;
-    Aug) month=August; nummonth=8;;
-    Sep) month=September; nummonth=9;;
-    Oct) month=October; nummonth=10;;
-    Nov) month=November; nummonth=11;;
-    Dec) month=December; nummonth=12;;
-  esac
-done
-
-# Get the extended ls output of the file or directory.
-set dummy x`eval "$ls_command \"\$save_arg1\""`
-
-# Remove all preceding arguments
-eval $command
-
-# Because of the dummy argument above, month is in $2.
-#
-# On a POSIX system, we should have
-#
-# $# = 5
-# $1 = file size
-# $2 = month
-# $3 = day
-# $4 = year or time
-# $5 = filename
-#
-# On Darwin 7.7.0 and 7.6.0, we have
-#
-# $# = 4
-# $1 = day
-# $2 = month
-# $3 = year or time
-# $4 = filename
-
-# Get the month.
-case $2 in
-  Jan) month=January; nummonth=1;;
-  Feb) month=February; nummonth=2;;
-  Mar) month=March; nummonth=3;;
-  Apr) month=April; nummonth=4;;
-  May) month=May; nummonth=5;;
-  Jun) month=June; nummonth=6;;
-  Jul) month=July; nummonth=7;;
-  Aug) month=August; nummonth=8;;
-  Sep) month=September; nummonth=9;;
-  Oct) month=October; nummonth=10;;
-  Nov) month=November; nummonth=11;;
-  Dec) month=December; nummonth=12;;
-esac
-
-case $3 in
-  ???*) day=$1;;
-  *) day=$3; shift;;
-esac
-
-# Here we have to deal with the problem that the ls output gives either
-# the time of day or the year.
-case $3 in
-  *:*) set `date`; eval year=\$$#
-       case $2 in
-	 Jan) nummonthtod=1;;
-	 Feb) nummonthtod=2;;
-	 Mar) nummonthtod=3;;
-	 Apr) nummonthtod=4;;
-	 May) nummonthtod=5;;
-	 Jun) nummonthtod=6;;
-	 Jul) nummonthtod=7;;
-	 Aug) nummonthtod=8;;
-	 Sep) nummonthtod=9;;
-	 Oct) nummonthtod=10;;
-	 Nov) nummonthtod=11;;
-	 Dec) nummonthtod=12;;
-       esac
-       # For the first six month of the year the time notation can also
-       # be used for files modified in the last year.
-       if (expr $nummonth \> $nummonthtod) > /dev/null;
-       then
-	 year=`expr $year - 1`
-       fi;;
-  *) year=$3;;
-esac
-
-# The result.
-echo $day $month $year
-
-# Local Variables:
-# mode: shell-script
-# sh-indentation: 2
-# eval: (add-hook 'write-file-hooks 'time-stamp)
-# time-stamp-start: "scriptversion="
-# time-stamp-format: "%:y-%02m-%02d.%02H"
-# time-stamp-end: "$"
-# End:
diff --git a/debian/pinentry-tqt/pinentry-tqt-1.1.0/doc/pinentry.info b/debian/pinentry-tqt/pinentry-tqt-1.1.0/doc/pinentry.info
deleted file mode 100644
index 03622b89..00000000
--- a/debian/pinentry-tqt/pinentry-tqt-1.1.0/doc/pinentry.info
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,992 +0,0 @@
-This is pinentry.info, produced by makeinfo version 6.3 from
-pinentry.texi.
-
-INFO-DIR-SECTION GNU Utilities
-START-INFO-DIR-ENTRY
-* pinentry: (pinentry).    Securely ask for a passphrase or PIN.
-END-INFO-DIR-ENTRY
-
-This file documents the use and the internals of the PINENTRY.
-
-   This is edition 1.1.0, last updated 3 December 2017, of 'The
-'PINEntry' Manual', for version 1.1.0.
-
-   Published by g10 Code GmbH
-Hüttenstr.  61
-40699 Erkrath, Germany
-
-   Copyright (C) 2002, 2005, 2015 g10 Code GmbH
-
-   Permission is granted to copy, distribute and/or modify this document
-under the terms of the GNU General Public License as published by the
-Free Software Foundation; either version 2 of the License, or (at your
-option) any later version.  The text of the license can be found in the
-section entitled "Copying".
-
-
-File: pinentry.info,  Node: Top,  Next: Using pinentry,  Up: (dir)
-
-Introduction
-************
-
-This manual documents how to use the PINENTRY and its protocol.
-
-   The PINENTRY is a small GUI application used to enter PINs or
-passphrases.  It is usually invoked by GPG-AGENT (*note Invoking the
-gpg-agent: (gnupg)Invoking GPG-AGENT, for details).
-
-   PINENTRY comes in several flavors to fit the look and feel of the
-used GUI toolkit: A GTK+ based one named 'pinentry-gtk'; a QT based one
-named 'pinentry-qt'; and, two non-graphical ones 'pinentry-curses',
-which uses curses, and 'pinentry-tty', which doesn't require anything
-more than a simple terminal.  Not all of them are necessarily available
-on your installation.  If curses is supported on your system, the
-GUI-based flavors fall back to curses when the 'DISPLAY' variable is not
-set.
-
-* Menu:
-
-* Using pinentry::      How to use the beast.
-* Front ends::          Description and comparison of the front ends
-
-Developer information
-
-* Protocol::            The Assuan protocol description.
-* Implementation Details:: For those extending or writing a new pinentry.
-
-Miscellaneous
-
-* Copying::             GNU General Public License says
-                        how you can copy and share PIN-Entry
-                        as well as this manual.
-
-Indices
-
-* Option Index::        Index to command line options.
-* Index::	        Index of concepts and symbol names.
-
-
-File: pinentry.info,  Node: Using pinentry,  Next: Front ends,  Prev: Top,  Up: Top
-
-1 How to use the PINENTRY
-*************************
-
-You may run PINENTRY directly from the command line and pass the
-commands according to the Assuan protocol via stdin/stdout.
-
-   Here is a list of options supported by all flavors of pinentry:
-
-'--version'
-     Print the program version and licensing information.
-
-'--help'
-     Print a usage message summarizing the most useful command line
-     options.
-
-'--debug'
-'-d'
-     Turn on some debugging.  Mostly useful for the maintainers.  Note
-     that this may reveal sensitive information like the entered
-     passphrase.
-
-'--no-global-grab'
-'-g'
-     Grab the keyboard only when the window is focused.  Use this option
-     if you are debugging software using the PINENTRY; otherwise you may
-     not be able to to access your X session anymore (unless you have
-     other means to connect to the machine to kill the PINENTRY).
-
-'--parent-wid N'
-     Use window ID N as the parent window for positioning the window.
-     Note, that this is not fully supported by all flavors of PINENTRY.
-
-'--timeout SECONDS'
-     Give up waiting for input from the user after the specified number
-     of seconds and return an error.  The error returned is the same as
-     if the Cancel button was selected.  To disable the timeout and wait
-     indefinitely, set this to 0, which is the default.
-
-'--display STRING'
-'--ttyname STRING'
-'--ttytype STRING'
-'--lc-ctype STRING'
-'--lc-messages STRING'
-     These options are used to pass localization information to
-     PINENTRY.  They are required because PINENTRY is usually called by
-     some background process which does not have any information about
-     the locale and terminal to use.  It is also possible to pass these
-     options using Assuan protocol options.
-
-
-File: pinentry.info,  Node: Front ends,  Next: Protocol,  Prev: Using pinentry,  Up: Top
-
-2 Front Ends
-************
-
-There are several different flavors of PINENTRY.  Concretely, there are
-Gtk+2, Qt 4, Gnome 3, Emacs, curses and tty variants.  These different
-implementations provide higher levels of integration with a specific
-environment.  For instance, the Gnome 3 PINENTRY uses Gnome 3 widgets to
-display the prompts.  For Gnome 3 users, this higher level of
-integration provides a more consistent aesthetic.  However, this comes
-at a cost.  Because this PINENTRY uses so many components, there is a
-larger chance of a failure.  In particular, there is a larger chance
-that the passphrase is saved in memory and that memory is exposed to an
-attacker (consider the OpenSSL Heartbeat vulnerability).
-
-   To understand how many components touch the passphrase, consider
-again the Gnome 3 implementation.  When a user presses a button on the
-keyboard, the key is passed from the kernel to the X server to the
-toolkit (Gtk+) and to the actual text entry widget.  Along the way, the
-key is saved in memory and processed.  In fact, the key presses are
-probably read using standard C library functions, which buffer the
-input.  None of this code is careful to make sure the contents of the
-memory are not leaked by keeping the data in unpagable memory and wiping
-it when the buffer is freed.  However, even if they did, there is still
-the problem that when a computer hibernates, the system writes unpagable
-memory to disk anyway.  Further, many installations are virtualized
-(e.g., running on Xen) and have little control over their actual
-environment.
-
-   The curses variant uses a significant smaller software stack and the
-tty variant uses an even smaller one.  However, if they are run in an
-X terminal, then a similar number of components are handling the
-passphrase as in the Gnome 3 case!  Thus, to be most secure, you need to
-direct GPG Agent to use a fixed virtual console.  Since you need to
-remain logged in for GPG Agent to use that console, you should run there
-and have 'screen' or 'tmux' lock the tty.
-
-   The Emacs pinentry implementation interacts with a running Emacs
-session and directs the Emacs instance to display the passphrase prompt.
-Since this doesn't work very well if there is no Emacs running, the
-generic PINENTRY backend checks if a PINENTRY-enabled Emacs should be
-used.  Specifically, it looks to see if the 'INSIDE_EMACS' variable is
-set and then attempts to establish a connection to the specified
-address.  If this is the case, then instead of, e.g., 'pinentry-gtk2'
-displaying a Gtk+2 pinentry, it interacts with the Emacs session.  This
-functionality can be explicitly disabled by passing
-'--disable-inside-emacs' to 'configure' when building PINENTRY.
-
-   Having Emacs get the passphrase is convenient, however, it is a
-significant security risk.  Emacs is a huge program, which doesn't
-provide any process isolation to speak of.  As such, having it handle
-the passphrase adds a huge chunk of code to the user's trusted computing
-base.  Because of this concern, Emacs doesn't enable this by default,
-unless the 'allow-emacs-pinentry' option is explicitly set in his or her
-'.gnupg/gpg-agent.conf' file.
-
-   Similar to the inside-emacs check, the PINENTRY frontends check
-whether the 'DISPLAY' variable is set and a working X server is
-available.  If this is not the case, then they fallback to the curses
-front end.  This can also be disabled by passing
-'--disable-fallback-curses' to 'configure' at build time.
-
-
-File: pinentry.info,  Node: Protocol,  Next: Implementation Details,  Prev: Front ends,  Up: Top
-
-3 PINENTRY's Assuan Protocol
-****************************
-
-The PINENTRY should never service more than one connection at once.  It
-is reasonable to exec the PINENTRY prior to a request.
-
-   The PINENTRY does not need to stay in memory because the GPG-AGENT
-has the ability to cache passphrases.  The usual way to run the PINENTRY
-is by setting up a pipe (not a socket) and then fork/exec the PINENTRY.
-The communication is then done by means of the protocol described here
-until the client is satisfied with the result.
-
-   Although it is called a PINENTRY, it allows entering reasonably long
-strings (strings that are up to 2048 characters long are supported by
-every pinentry).  The client using the PINENTRY has to check for
-correctness.
-
-   Note that all strings are expected to be encoded as UTF-8; PINENTRY
-takes care of converting it to the locally used codeset.  To include
-linefeeds or other special characters, you may percent-escape them
-(e.g., a line feed is encoded as '%0A', the percent sign itself is
-encoded as '%25', etc.).
-
-   The following is a list of supported commands:
-
-'Set the timeout before returning an error'
-            C: SETTIMEOUT 30
-            S: OK
-
-'Set the descriptive text to display'
-            C: SETDESC Enter PIN for Richard Nixon <nobody@trickydicky.gov>
-            S: OK
-
-'Set the prompt to show'
-     When asking for a PIN, set the text just before the widget for
-     passphrase entry.
-            C: SETPROMPT PIN:
-            S: OK
-
-     You should use an underscore in the text only if you know that a
-     modern version of pinentry is used.  Modern versions underline the
-     next character after the underscore and use the first such
-     underlined character as a keyboard accelerator.  Use a double
-     underscore to escape an underscore.
-
-'Set the window title'
-     This command may be used to change the default window title.  When
-     using this feature you should take care that the window is still
-     identifiable as the pinentry.
-            C: SETTITLE Tape Recorder Room
-            S: OK
-
-'Set the button texts'
-     There are three texts which should be used to override the English
-     defaults:
-
-     To set the text for the button signaling confirmation (in UTF-8).
-     See SETPROMPT on how to use an keyboard accelerator.
-            C: SETOK Yes
-            S: OK
-
-     To set the text for the button signaling cancellation or
-     disagreement (in UTF-8).  See SETPROMPT on how to use an keyboard
-     accelerator.
-            C: SETCANCEL No
-            S: OK
-
-     In case three buttons are required, use the following command to
-     set the text (UTF-8) for the non-affirmative response button.  The
-     affirmative button text is still set using SETOK and the CANCEL
-     button text with SETCANCEL. See SETPROMPT on how to use an keyboard
-     accelerator.
-            C: SETNOTOK Do not do this
-            S: OK
-
-'Set the Error text'
-     This is used by the client to display an error message.  In
-     contrast to the other commands, the error message is automatically
-     reset with a GETPIN or CONFIRM, and is only displayed when asking
-     for a PIN.
-            C: SETERROR Invalid PIN entered - please try again
-            S: OK
-
-'Enable a passphrase quality indicator'
-     Adds a quality indicator to the GETPIN window.  This indicator is
-     updated as the passphrase is typed.  The clients needs to implement
-     an inquiry named "QUALITY" which gets passed the current passphrase
-     (percent-plus escaped) and should send back a string with a single
-     numerical value between -100 and 100.  Negative values will be
-     displayed in red.
-            C: SETQUALITYBAR
-            S: OK
-
-     If a custom label for the quality bar is required, just add that
-     label as an argument as a percent-escaped string.  You will need
-     this feature to translate the label because PINENTRY has no
-     internal gettext except for stock strings from the toolkit library.
-
-     If you want to show a tooltip for the quality bar, you may use
-            C: SETQUALITYBAR_TT string
-            S: OK
-
-     With STRING being a percent escaped string shown as the tooltip.
-
-'Ask for a PIN'
-     The meat of this tool is to ask for a passphrase of PIN, it is done
-     with this command:
-            C: GETPIN
-            S: D no more tapes
-            S: OK
-     Note that the passphrase is transmitted in clear using standard
-     data responses.  Expect it to be in UTF-8.
-
-'Ask for confirmation'
-     To ask for a confirmation (yes or no), you can use this command:
-            C: CONFIRM
-            S: OK
-     The client should use SETDESC to set an appropriate text before
-     issuing this command, and may use SETPROMPT to set the button
-     texts.  The value returned is either OK for YES or the error code
-     'ASSUAN_Not_Confirmed'.
-
-'Show a message'
-     To show a message, you can use this command:
-            C: MESSAGE
-            S: OK
-     alternatively you may add an option to confirm:
-            C: CONFIRM --one-button
-            S: OK
-     The client should use SETDESC to set an appropriate text before
-     issuing this command, and may use SETOK to set the text for the
-     dismiss button.  The value returned is OK or an error message.
-
-'Set the output device'
-     When using X, the PINENTRY program must be invoked with an
-     appropriate 'DISPLAY' environment variable or the '--display'
-     option.
-
-     When using a text terminal:
-            C: OPTION ttyname=/dev/tty3
-            S: OK
-            C: OPTION ttytype=vt100
-            S: OK
-            C: OPTION lc-ctype=de_DE.UTF-8
-            S: OK
-     The client should use the 'ttyname' option to set the output TTY
-     file name, the 'ttytype' option to the 'TERM' variable appropriate
-     for this tty and 'lc-ctype' to the locale which defines the
-     character set to use for this terminal.
-
-'Set the default strings'
-     To avoid having translations in Pinentry proper, the caller may set
-     certain translated strings which are used by PINENTRY as default
-     strings.
-
-            C: OPTION default-ok=_Korrekt
-            S: OK
-            C: OPTION default-cancel=Abbruch
-            S: OK
-            C: OPTION default-prompt=PIN eingeben:
-            S: OK
-     The strings are subject to accelerator marking, see SETPROMPT for
-     details.
-
-'Passphrase caching'
-
-     Some environments, such as GNOME, cache passwords and passphrases.
-     The PINENTRY should only use an external cache if the
-     'allow-external-password-cache' option was set and a stable key
-     identifier (using SETKEYINFO) was provided.  In this case, if the
-     passphrase was read from the cache, the PINENTRY should send the
-     'PASSWORD_FROM_CACHE' status message before returning the
-     passphrase.  This indicates to GPG Agent that it should not
-     increment the passphrase retry counter.
-
-            C: OPTION allow-external-password-cache
-            S: OK
-            C: SETKEYINFO key-grip
-            S: OK
-            C: getpin
-            S: S PASSWORD_FROM_CACHE
-            S: D 1234
-            C: OK
-
-     Note: if 'allow-external-password-cache' is not specified, an
-     external password cache must not be used: this can lead to subtle
-     bugs.  In particular, if this option is not specified, then GPG
-     Agent does not recognize the 'PASSWORD_FROM_CACHE' status message
-     and will count trying a cached password against the password retry
-     count.  If the password retry count is 1, then the user will never
-     have the opportunity to correct the cached password.
-
-     Note: it is strongly recommended that a pinentry supporting this
-     feature provide the user an option to enable it manually.  That is,
-     saving a passphrase in an external password manager should be
-     opt-in.
-
-     The key identifier provided SETKEYINFO must be considered opaque
-     and may change in the future.  It currently has the form
-     'X/HEXSTRING' where 'X' is either 'n', 's', or 'u'.  In the former
-     two cases, the HEXSTRING corresponds to the key grip.  The key grip
-     is not the OpenPGP Key ID, but it can be mapped to the key using
-     the following:
-
-            # gpg2 --with-keygrip --list-secret-keys
-
-     and searching the output for the key grip.  The same command-line
-     options can also be used with gpgsm.
-
-
-File: pinentry.info,  Node: Implementation Details,  Next: Copying,  Prev: Protocol,  Up: Top
-
-4 Implementation Details
-************************
-
-The pinentry source code can be divided into three categories.  There is
-a backend module, which lives in 'pinentry/', there are utility
-functions, e.g., in 'secmem/', and there are various frontends.
-
-   All of the low-level logic lives in the backend.  This frees the
-frontends from having to implement, e.g., the Assuan protocol.  When the
-backend receives an option, it updates the state in a 'pinentry_t'
-struct.  The frontend is called when the client either calls 'GETPIN',
-'CONFIRM' or 'MESSAGE'.  In these cases, the backend invokes the
-'pinentry_cmd_handler', which is passed the 'pinentry_t' struct.
-
-   When the callback is invoked, the frontend should create a window
-based on the state in the 'pinentry_t' struct.  For instance, the title
-to use for the dialog's window (if any) is stored in the 'title' field.
-If the is 'NULL', the frontend should choose a reasonable default value.
-(Default is not always provided, because different tool kits and
-environments have different reasonable defaults.)
-
-   The widget needs to support a number of different interactions with
-the user.  Each of them is described below.
-
-'Passphrase Confirmation'
-
-     When creating a new key, the passphrase should be entered twice.
-     The client (typically GPG Agent) indicates this to the PINENTRY by
-     invoking 'SETREPEAT'.  In this case, the backend sets the
-     'repeat_passphrase' field to a copy of the passed string.  The
-     value of this field should be used to label a second text input.
-
-     It is the frontend's responsibility to check that the passwords
-     match.  If they don't match, the frontend should display an error
-     message and continue to prompt the user.
-
-     If the passwords do match, then, when the user presses the okay
-     button, the 'repeat_okay' field should be set to '1' (this causes
-     the backend to emit the 'S PIN_REPEATED' status message).
-
-'Message Box'
-
-     Sometimes GPG Agent needs to display a message.  In this case, the
-     'pin' variable is 'NULL'.
-
-     At the Assuan level, this mode is selected by using either the
-     'MESSAGE' or the 'CONFIRM' command instead of the 'GETPIN' command.
-     The 'MESSAGE' command never shows the cancel or an other button.
-     The same holds for 'CONFIRM' if it was passed the "-one-button"
-     argument.  If 'CONFIRM' was not passed this argument, the dialog
-     for 'CONFIRM' should show both the 'ok' and the 'cancel' buttons
-     and optionally the 'notok' button.  The frontend can determine
-     whether the dialog is a one-button dialog by inspecting the
-     'one_button' variable.
-
-'Passphrase Entry'
-
-     If neither of the above cases holds, then GPG Agent is simply
-     requesting the passphrase.  In this case, the 'ok' and 'cancel'
-     buttons should be displayed.
-
-   The layout of the three variants is quite similar.  Here are the
-relevant elements that describe the layout:
-
-'title'
-     The window's title.
-
-'description'
-     The reason for the dialog.  When requesting a passphrase, this
-     describes the key.  When showing a message box, this is the message
-     to show.
-
-'error'
-     If GPG Agent determines that the passphrase was incorrect, it will
-     call 'GETPIN' again (up to a configurable number of times) to again
-     prompt the user.  In this case, this variable contains a
-     description of the error message.  This text should typically be
-     highlighted in someway.
-
-'prompt, default-prompt'
-     The string to associate with the passphrase entry box.
-
-     There is a subtle difference between 'prompt' and 'default-prompt'.
-     'default-prompt' means that a stylized prompt (e.g., an icon
-     suggesting a prompt) may be used.  'prompt' means that the entry's
-     meaning is not consistent with such a style and, as such, no icon
-     should be used.
-
-     If both variables are set, the 'prompt' variant takes precedence.
-
-'repeat_passphrase'
-     The string to associate with the second passphrase entry box.  The
-     second passphrase entry box should only be shown if this is not
-     'NULL'.
-
-'ok, default-ok'
-     The string to show in the 'ok' button.
-
-     If there are any '_' characters, the following character should be
-     used as an accelerator.  (A double underscore means a plain
-     underscore should be shown.)  If the frontend does not support
-     accelerators, then the underscores should be removed manually.
-
-     There is a subtle difference between 'ok' and 'default-ok'.
-     'default-ok' means that a stylized OK button should be used.  For
-     instance, it could include a check mark.  'ok' means that the
-     button's meaning is not consistent with such an icon and, as such,
-     no icon should be used.  Thus, if the 'ok' button should have the
-     text "No password required" then 'ok' should be used because a
-     check mark icon doesn't make sense.
-
-     If this variable is 'NULL', the frontend should choose a reasonable
-     default.
-
-     If both variables are set, the 'ok' variant takes precedence.
-
-'cancel, default-cancel'
-     Like the 'ok' and 'default-ok' buttons except these strings are
-     used for the cancel button.
-
-     This button should not be shown if 'one_button' is set.
-
-     'default-notok' Like the 'default-ok' button except this string is
-     used for the other button.
-
-     This button should only be displayed when showing a message box.
-     If these variables are 'NULL' or 'one_button' is set, this button
-     should not be displayed.
-
-'quality_bar'
-     If this is set, a widget should be used to show the password's
-     quality.  The value of this field is a label for the widget.
-
-     Note: to update the password quality, whenever the password
-     changes, call the 'pinentry_inq_quality' function and then update
-     the password quality widget correspondingly.
-
-'quality_bar_tt'
-     A tooltip for the quality bar.
-
-'default_pwmngr'
-     If 'may_cache_password' and 'keyinfo' are set and the user
-     consents, then the PINENTRY may cache the password with an external
-     manager.  Note: getting the user's consent is essential, because
-     password managers often provide a different level of security.  If
-     the above condition is true and 'tried_password_cache' is false,
-     then a check box with the specified string should be displayed.
-     The check box must default to off.
-
-'default-cf-visi'
-     The string to show with a question if you want to confirm that the
-     user wants to change the visibility of the password.
-
-'default-tt-visi'
-     Tooltip for an action that would reveal the entered password.
-
-'default-tt-hide'
-     Tooltip for an action that would hide the password revealed by the
-     action labeld with 'default-tt-visi'
-
-   When the handler is done, it should store the passphrase in 'pin', if
-appropriate.  This variable is allocated in secure memory.  Use
-'pinentry_setbufferlen' to size the buffer.
-
-   The actual return code is dependent on whether the dialog is in
-message mode or in passphrase mode.
-
-   If the dialog is in message mode and the user pressed ok, return 1.
-Otherwise, return 0.  If an error occurred, indicate this by setting it
-in 'specific_err' or setting 'locale_err' to '1' (for locale specific
-errors).  If the dialog was canceled, then the handler should set the
-'canceled' variable to '1'.  If the not ok button was pressed, don't do
-anything else.
-
-   If the dialog is in passphrase mode return '1' if the user entered a
-password and pressed ok.  If an error occurred, return '-1' and set
-'specific_err' or 'locale_err', as above.  If the user canceled the
-dialog box, return '-1'.
-
-   If the window was closed, then the handler should set the
-'close_button' variable and otherwise act as if the cancel button was
-pressed.
-
-
-File: pinentry.info,  Node: Copying,  Next: Option Index,  Prev: Implementation Details,  Up: Top
-
-GNU General Public License
-**************************
-
-                         Version 2, June 1991
-
-     Copyright (C) 1989, 1991 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
-     59 Temple Place - Suite 330, Boston, MA 02111-1307, USA
-
-     Everyone is permitted to copy and distribute verbatim copies
-     of this license document, but changing it is not allowed.
-
-Preamble
-========
-
-The licenses for most software are designed to take away your freedom to
-share and change it.  By contrast, the GNU General Public License is
-intended to guarantee your freedom to share and change free software--to
-make sure the software is free for all its users.  This General Public
-License applies to most of the Free Software Foundation's software and
-to any other program whose authors commit to using it.  (Some other Free
-Software Foundation software is covered by the GNU Library General
-Public License instead.)  You can apply it to your programs, too.
-
-   When we speak of free software, we are referring to freedom, not
-price.  Our General Public Licenses are designed to make sure that you
-have the freedom to distribute copies of free software (and charge for
-this service if you wish), that you receive source code or can get it if
-you want it, that you can change the software or use pieces of it in new
-free programs; and that you know you can do these things.
-
-   To protect your rights, we need to make restrictions that forbid
-anyone to deny you these rights or to ask you to surrender the rights.
-These restrictions translate to certain responsibilities for you if you
-distribute copies of the software, or if you modify it.
-
-   For example, if you distribute copies of such a program, whether
-gratis or for a fee, you must give the recipients all the rights that
-you have.  You must make sure that they, too, receive or can get the
-source code.  And you must show them these terms so they know their
-rights.
-
-   We protect your rights with two steps: (1) copyright the software,
-and (2) offer you this license which gives you legal permission to copy,
-distribute and/or modify the software.
-
-   Also, for each author's protection and ours, we want to make certain
-that everyone understands that there is no warranty for this free
-software.  If the software is modified by someone else and passed on, we
-want its recipients to know that what they have is not the original, so
-that any problems introduced by others will not reflect on the original
-authors' reputations.
-
-   Finally, any free program is threatened constantly by software
-patents.  We wish to avoid the danger that redistributors of a free
-program will individually obtain patent licenses, in effect making the
-program proprietary.  To prevent this, we have made it clear that any
-patent must be licensed for everyone's free use or not licensed at all.
-
-   The precise terms and conditions for copying, distribution and
-modification follow.
-
-    TERMS AND CONDITIONS FOR COPYING, DISTRIBUTION AND MODIFICATION
-
-  1. This License applies to any program or other work which contains a
-     notice placed by the copyright holder saying it may be distributed
-     under the terms of this General Public License.  The "Program",
-     below, refers to any such program or work, and a "work based on the
-     Program" means either the Program or any derivative work under
-     copyright law: that is to say, a work containing the Program or a
-     portion of it, either verbatim or with modifications and/or
-     translated into another language.  (Hereinafter, translation is
-     included without limitation in the term "modification".)  Each
-     licensee is addressed as "you".
-
-     Activities other than copying, distribution and modification are
-     not covered by this License; they are outside its scope.  The act
-     of running the Program is not restricted, and the output from the
-     Program is covered only if its contents constitute a work based on
-     the Program (independent of having been made by running the
-     Program).  Whether that is true depends on what the Program does.
-
-  2. You may copy and distribute verbatim copies of the Program's source
-     code as you receive it, in any medium, provided that you
-     conspicuously and appropriately publish on each copy an appropriate
-     copyright notice and disclaimer of warranty; keep intact all the
-     notices that refer to this License and to the absence of any
-     warranty; and give any other recipients of the Program a copy of
-     this License along with the Program.
-
-     You may charge a fee for the physical act of transferring a copy,
-     and you may at your option offer warranty protection in exchange
-     for a fee.
-
-  3. You may modify your copy or copies of the Program or any portion of
-     it, thus forming a work based on the Program, and copy and
-     distribute such modifications or work under the terms of Section 1
-     above, provided that you also meet all of these conditions:
-
-       a. You must cause the modified files to carry prominent notices
-          stating that you changed the files and the date of any change.
-
-       b. You must cause any work that you distribute or publish, that
-          in whole or in part contains or is derived from the Program or
-          any part thereof, to be licensed as a whole at no charge to
-          all third parties under the terms of this License.
-
-       c. If the modified program normally reads commands interactively
-          when run, you must cause it, when started running for such
-          interactive use in the most ordinary way, to print or display
-          an announcement including an appropriate copyright notice and
-          a notice that there is no warranty (or else, saying that you
-          provide a warranty) and that users may redistribute the
-          program under these conditions, and telling the user how to
-          view a copy of this License.  (Exception: if the Program
-          itself is interactive but does not normally print such an
-          announcement, your work based on the Program is not required
-          to print an announcement.)
-
-     These requirements apply to the modified work as a whole.  If
-     identifiable sections of that work are not derived from the
-     Program, and can be reasonably considered independent and separate
-     works in themselves, then this License, and its terms, do not apply
-     to those sections when you distribute them as separate works.  But
-     when you distribute the same sections as part of a whole which is a
-     work based on the Program, the distribution of the whole must be on
-     the terms of this License, whose permissions for other licensees
-     extend to the entire whole, and thus to each and every part
-     regardless of who wrote it.
-
-     Thus, it is not the intent of this section to claim rights or
-     contest your rights to work written entirely by you; rather, the
-     intent is to exercise the right to control the distribution of
-     derivative or collective works based on the Program.
-
-     In addition, mere aggregation of another work not based on the
-     Program with the Program (or with a work based on the Program) on a
-     volume of a storage or distribution medium does not bring the other
-     work under the scope of this License.
-
-  4. You may copy and distribute the Program (or a work based on it,
-     under Section 2) in object code or executable form under the terms
-     of Sections 1 and 2 above provided that you also do one of the
-     following:
-
-       a. Accompany it with the complete corresponding machine-readable
-          source code, which must be distributed under the terms of
-          Sections 1 and 2 above on a medium customarily used for
-          software interchange; or,
-
-       b. Accompany it with a written offer, valid for at least three
-          years, to give any third party, for a charge no more than your
-          cost of physically performing source distribution, a complete
-          machine-readable copy of the corresponding source code, to be
-          distributed under the terms of Sections 1 and 2 above on a
-          medium customarily used for software interchange; or,
-
-       c. Accompany it with the information you received as to the offer
-          to distribute corresponding source code.  (This alternative is
-          allowed only for noncommercial distribution and only if you
-          received the program in object code or executable form with
-          such an offer, in accord with Subsection b above.)
-
-     The source code for a work means the preferred form of the work for
-     making modifications to it.  For an executable work, complete
-     source code means all the source code for all modules it contains,
-     plus any associated interface definition files, plus the scripts
-     used to control compilation and installation of the executable.
-     However, as a special exception, the source code distributed need
-     not include anything that is normally distributed (in either source
-     or binary form) with the major components (compiler, kernel, and so
-     on) of the operating system on which the executable runs, unless
-     that component itself accompanies the executable.
-
-     If distribution of executable or object code is made by offering
-     access to copy from a designated place, then offering equivalent
-     access to copy the source code from the same place counts as
-     distribution of the source code, even though third parties are not
-     compelled to copy the source along with the object code.
-
-  5. You may not copy, modify, sublicense, or distribute the Program
-     except as expressly provided under this License.  Any attempt
-     otherwise to copy, modify, sublicense or distribute the Program is
-     void, and will automatically terminate your rights under this
-     License.  However, parties who have received copies, or rights,
-     from you under this License will not have their licenses terminated
-     so long as such parties remain in full compliance.
-
-  6. You are not required to accept this License, since you have not
-     signed it.  However, nothing else grants you permission to modify
-     or distribute the Program or its derivative works.  These actions
-     are prohibited by law if you do not accept this License.
-     Therefore, by modifying or distributing the Program (or any work
-     based on the Program), you indicate your acceptance of this License
-     to do so, and all its terms and conditions for copying,
-     distributing or modifying the Program or works based on it.
-
-  7. Each time you redistribute the Program (or any work based on the
-     Program), the recipient automatically receives a license from the
-     original licensor to copy, distribute or modify the Program subject
-     to these terms and conditions.  You may not impose any further
-     restrictions on the recipients' exercise of the rights granted
-     herein.  You are not responsible for enforcing compliance by third
-     parties to this License.
-
-  8. If, as a consequence of a court judgment or allegation of patent
-     infringement or for any other reason (not limited to patent
-     issues), conditions are imposed on you (whether by court order,
-     agreement or otherwise) that contradict the conditions of this
-     License, they do not excuse you from the conditions of this
-     License.  If you cannot distribute so as to satisfy simultaneously
-     your obligations under this License and any other pertinent
-     obligations, then as a consequence you may not distribute the
-     Program at all.  For example, if a patent license would not permit
-     royalty-free redistribution of the Program by all those who receive
-     copies directly or indirectly through you, then the only way you
-     could satisfy both it and this License would be to refrain entirely
-     from distribution of the Program.
-
-     If any portion of this section is held invalid or unenforceable
-     under any particular circumstance, the balance of the section is
-     intended to apply and the section as a whole is intended to apply
-     in other circumstances.
-
-     It is not the purpose of this section to induce you to infringe any
-     patents or other property right claims or to contest validity of
-     any such claims; this section has the sole purpose of protecting
-     the integrity of the free software distribution system, which is
-     implemented by public license practices.  Many people have made
-     generous contributions to the wide range of software distributed
-     through that system in reliance on consistent application of that
-     system; it is up to the author/donor to decide if he or she is
-     willing to distribute software through any other system and a
-     licensee cannot impose that choice.
-
-     This section is intended to make thoroughly clear what is believed
-     to be a consequence of the rest of this License.
-
-  9. If the distribution and/or use of the Program is restricted in
-     certain countries either by patents or by copyrighted interfaces,
-     the original copyright holder who places the Program under this
-     License may add an explicit geographical distribution limitation
-     excluding those countries, so that distribution is permitted only
-     in or among countries not thus excluded.  In such case, this
-     License incorporates the limitation as if written in the body of
-     this License.
-
-  10. The Free Software Foundation may publish revised and/or new
-     versions of the General Public License from time to time.  Such new
-     versions will be similar in spirit to the present version, but may
-     differ in detail to address new problems or concerns.
-
-     Each version is given a distinguishing version number.  If the
-     Program specifies a version number of this License which applies to
-     it and "any later version", you have the option of following the
-     terms and conditions either of that version or of any later version
-     published by the Free Software Foundation.  If the Program does not
-     specify a version number of this License, you may choose any
-     version ever published by the Free Software Foundation.
-
-  11. If you wish to incorporate parts of the Program into other free
-     programs whose distribution conditions are different, write to the
-     author to ask for permission.  For software which is copyrighted by
-     the Free Software Foundation, write to the Free Software
-     Foundation; we sometimes make exceptions for this.  Our decision
-     will be guided by the two goals of preserving the free status of
-     all derivatives of our free software and of promoting the sharing
-     and reuse of software generally.
-
-                              NO WARRANTY
-
-  12. BECAUSE THE PROGRAM IS LICENSED FREE OF CHARGE, THERE IS NO
-     WARRANTY FOR THE PROGRAM, TO THE EXTENT PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE
-     LAW. EXCEPT WHEN OTHERWISE STATED IN WRITING THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS
-     AND/OR OTHER PARTIES PROVIDE THE PROGRAM "AS IS" WITHOUT WARRANTY
-     OF ANY KIND, EITHER EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT NOT
-     LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS
-     FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. THE ENTIRE RISK AS TO THE QUALITY AND
-     PERFORMANCE OF THE PROGRAM IS WITH YOU. SHOULD THE PROGRAM PROVE
-     DEFECTIVE, YOU ASSUME THE COST OF ALL NECESSARY SERVICING, REPAIR
-     OR CORRECTION.
-
-  13. IN NO EVENT UNLESS REQUIRED BY APPLICABLE LAW OR AGREED TO IN
-     WRITING WILL ANY COPYRIGHT HOLDER, OR ANY OTHER PARTY WHO MAY
-     MODIFY AND/OR REDISTRIBUTE THE PROGRAM AS PERMITTED ABOVE, BE
-     LIABLE TO YOU FOR DAMAGES, INCLUDING ANY GENERAL, SPECIAL,
-     INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES ARISING OUT OF THE USE OR
-     INABILITY TO USE THE PROGRAM (INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO LOSS OF
-     DATA OR DATA BEING RENDERED INACCURATE OR LOSSES SUSTAINED BY YOU
-     OR THIRD PARTIES OR A FAILURE OF THE PROGRAM TO OPERATE WITH ANY
-     OTHER PROGRAMS), EVEN IF SUCH HOLDER OR OTHER PARTY HAS BEEN
-     ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES.
-
-                      END OF TERMS AND CONDITIONS
-
-How to Apply These Terms to Your New Programs
-=============================================
-
-If you develop a new program, and you want it to be of the greatest
-possible use to the public, the best way to achieve this is to make it
-free software which everyone can redistribute and change under these
-terms.
-
-   To do so, attach the following notices to the program.  It is safest
-to attach them to the start of each source file to most effectively
-convey the exclusion of warranty; and each file should have at least the
-"copyright" line and a pointer to where the full notice is found.
-
-     ONE LINE TO GIVE THE PROGRAM'S NAME AND AN IDEA OF WHAT IT DOES.
-     Copyright (C) 19YY  NAME OF AUTHOR
-
-     This program is free software; you can redistribute it and/or
-     modify it under the terms of the GNU General Public License
-     as published by the Free Software Foundation; either version 2
-     of the License, or (at your option) any later version.
-
-     This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful,
-     but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
-     MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.  See the
-     GNU General Public License for more details.
-
-     You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License along
-     with this program; if not, write to the Free Software Foundation, Inc.,
-     59 Temple Place, Suite 330, Boston, MA 02111-1307, USA.
-
-   Also add information on how to contact you by electronic and paper
-mail.
-
-   If the program is interactive, make it output a short notice like
-this when it starts in an interactive mode:
-
-     Gnomovision version 69, Copyright (C) 19YY NAME OF AUTHOR
-     Gnomovision comes with ABSOLUTELY NO WARRANTY; for details
-     type `show w'.  This is free software, and you are welcome
-     to redistribute it under certain conditions; type `show c'
-     for details.
-
-   The hypothetical commands 'show w' and 'show c' should show the
-appropriate parts of the General Public License.  Of course, the
-commands you use may be called something other than 'show w' and 'show
-c'; they could even be mouse-clicks or menu items--whatever suits your
-program.
-
-   You should also get your employer (if you work as a programmer) or
-your school, if any, to sign a "copyright disclaimer" for the program,
-if necessary.  Here is a sample; alter the names:
-
-     Yoyodyne, Inc., hereby disclaims all copyright
-     interest in the program `Gnomovision'
-     (which makes passes at compilers) written
-     by James Hacker.
-
-     SIGNATURE OF TY COON, 1 April 1989
-     Ty Coon, President of Vice
-
-   This General Public License does not permit incorporating your
-program into proprietary programs.  If your program is a subroutine
-library, you may consider it more useful to permit linking proprietary
-applications with the library.  If this is what you want to do, use the
-GNU Library General Public License instead of this License.
-
-
-File: pinentry.info,  Node: Option Index,  Next: Index,  Prev: Copying,  Up: Top
-
-Option Index
-************
-
-
-* Menu:
-
-* d:                                     Using pinentry.       (line 20)
-* debug:                                 Using pinentry.       (line 20)
-* display:                               Using pinentry.       (line 46)
-* g:                                     Using pinentry.       (line 26)
-* help:                                  Using pinentry.       (line 15)
-* lc-ctype:                              Using pinentry.       (line 46)
-* lc-messa:                              Using pinentry.       (line 46)
-* no-global-grab:                        Using pinentry.       (line 26)
-* parent-wid:                            Using pinentry.       (line 32)
-* timeout:                               Using pinentry.       (line 36)
-* ttyname:                               Using pinentry.       (line 46)
-* ttytype:                               Using pinentry.       (line 46)
-* version:                               Using pinentry.       (line 12)
-
-
-File: pinentry.info,  Node: Index,  Prev: Option Index,  Up: Top
-
-Index
-*****
-
-
-* Menu:
-
-* GPL, GNU General Public License:       Copying.               (line 6)
-* introduction:                          Top.                   (line 6)
-
-
-
-Tag Table:
-Node: Top816
-Node: Using pinentry2241
-Node: Front ends4092
-Node: Protocol7644
-Node: Implementation Details16103
-Node: Copying23985
-Node: Option Index43164
-Node: Index44246
-
-End Tag Table
diff --git a/debian/pinentry-tqt/pinentry-tqt-1.1.0/doc/pinentry.texi b/debian/pinentry-tqt/pinentry-tqt-1.1.0/doc/pinentry.texi
deleted file mode 100644
index 44e2eb1f..00000000
--- a/debian/pinentry-tqt/pinentry-tqt-1.1.0/doc/pinentry.texi
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,755 +0,0 @@
-\input texinfo                      @c -*-texinfo-*-
-@c %**start of header
-@setfilename pinentry.info
-
-@include version.texi
-
-@macro copyrightnotice
-Copyright @copyright{} 2002, 2005, 2015 g10 Code GmbH
-@end macro
-@macro permissionnotice
-Permission is granted to copy, distribute and/or modify this document
-under the terms of the GNU General Public License as published by the
-Free Software Foundation; either version 2 of the License, or (at your
-option) any later version. The text of the license can be found in the
-section entitled ``Copying''.
-@end macro
-
-@macro pinentry
-@sc{pinentry}
-@end macro
-
-@settitle Using the PIN-Entry
-
-@c Create a separate index for command line options.
-@defcodeindex op
-@c Merge the standard indexes into a single one.
-@syncodeindex fn cp
-@syncodeindex vr cp
-@syncodeindex ky cp
-@syncodeindex pg cp
-@syncodeindex tp cp
-
-@c printing stuff taken from gcc.
-@macro gnupgtabopt{body}
-@code{\body\}
-@end macro
-@macro gnupgoptlist{body}
-@smallexample
-\body\
-@end smallexample
-@end macro
-@c Makeinfo handles the above macro OK, TeX needs manual line breaks;
-@c they get lost at some point in handling the macro.  But if @macro is
-@c used here rather than @alias, it produces double line breaks.
-@iftex
-@alias gol = *
-@end iftex
-@ifnottex
-@macro gol
-@end macro
-@end ifnottex
-
-
-@c %**end of header
-
-@ifnottex
-@dircategory GNU Utilities
-@direntry
-* pinentry: (pinentry).    Securely ask for a passphrase or PIN.
-@end direntry
-This file documents the use and the internals of the @pinentry{}.
-
-This is edition @value{EDITION}, last updated @value{UPDATED}, of
-@cite{The `PINEntry' Manual}, for version @value{VERSION}.
-@sp 1
-Published by g10 Code GmbH@*
-Hüttenstr. 61@*
-40699 Erkrath, Germany
-@sp 1
-@copyrightnotice{}
-@sp 1
-@permissionnotice{}
-@end ifnottex
-
-@setchapternewpage odd
-
-@titlepage
-@title Using the PIN-Entry
-@subtitle Version @value{VERSION}
-@subtitle @value{UPDATED}
-@author Werner Koch @code{(wk@@gnupg.org)}
-
-@page
-@vskip 0pt plus 1filll
-@copyrightnotice{}
-@sp 2
-@permissionnotice{}
-@end titlepage
-@summarycontents
-@contents
-@page
-
-
-@node Top
-@top Introduction
-@cindex introduction
-
-This manual documents how to use the @pinentry{} and its protocol.
-
-The @pinentry{} is a small GUI application used to enter PINs or
-passphrases. It is usually invoked by @sc{gpg-agent}
-(@pxref{Invoking GPG-AGENT, ,Invoking the gpg-agent, gnupg,
-    The `GNU Privacy Guard' Manual}, for details).       
-
-@pinentry{} comes in several flavors to fit the look and feel of the
-used GUI toolkit: A @sc{GTK+} based one named @code{pinentry-gtk}; a
-@sc{Qt} based one named @code{pinentry-qt}; and, two non-graphical
-ones @code{pinentry-curses}, which uses curses, and
-@code{pinentry-tty}, which doesn't require anything more than a simple
-terminal.  Not all of them are necessarily available on your
-installation.  If curses is supported on your system, the GUI-based
-flavors fall back to curses when the @code{DISPLAY} variable is not
-set.
-
-
-@menu
-* Using pinentry::      How to use the beast.
-* Front ends::          Description and comparison of the front ends
-
-Developer information
-
-* Protocol::            The Assuan protocol description.
-* Implementation Details:: For those extending or writing a new pinentry.
-
-Miscellaneous
-
-* Copying::             GNU General Public License says
-                        how you can copy and share PIN-Entry
-                        as well as this manual.
-
-Indices
-
-* Option Index::        Index to command line options.
-* Index::	        Index of concepts and symbol names.
-@end menu
-
-@node Using pinentry
-@chapter How to use the @pinentry{}
-
-@c man begin DESCRIPTION
-
-You may run @pinentry{} directly from the command line and pass the
-commands according to the Assuan protocol via stdin/stdout.
-
-
-@c man end
-
-@c man begin OPTIONS
-
-Here is a list of options supported by all flavors of pinentry:
-
-@table @gnupgtabopt
-@item --version
-@opindex version
-Print the program version and licensing information. 
-
-@item --help
-@opindex help
-Print a usage message summarizing the most useful command line options.
-
-@item --debug
-@itemx -d
-@opindex debug
-@opindex d
-Turn on some debugging.  Mostly useful for the maintainers.  Note that
-this may reveal sensitive information like the entered passphrase.
-
-@c @item --enhanced
-@c @itemx -e
-@c @opindex enhanced
-@c @opindex e
-@c Ask for timeouts and insurance, too.  Note that this is currently not
-@c fully supported.
-
-@item --no-global-grab
-@itemx -g
-@opindex no-global-grab
-@opindex g
-Grab the keyboard only when the window is focused.  Use this option if
-you are debugging software using the @pinentry{}; otherwise you may
-not be able to to access your X session anymore (unless you have other
-means to connect to the machine to kill the @pinentry{}).
-
-@item --parent-wid @var{n}
-@opindex parent-wid
-Use window ID @var{n} as the parent window for positioning the window.
-Note, that this is not fully supported by all flavors of @pinentry{}.
-
-@item --timeout @var{seconds}
-@opindex timeout
-Give up waiting for input from the user after the specified number of
-seconds and return an error. The error returned is the same as if the
-Cancel button was selected. To disable the timeout and wait
-indefinitely, set this to 0, which is the default.
-
-@item --display @var{string}
-@itemx --ttyname @var{string}
-@itemx --ttytype @var{string}
-@itemx --lc-ctype @var{string}
-@itemx --lc-messages @var{string}
-@opindex display 
-@opindex ttyname 
-@opindex ttytype 
-@opindex lc-ctype 
-@opindex lc-messa
-These options are used to pass localization information to
-@pinentry{}.  They are required because @pinentry{} is usually called
-by some background process which does not have any information about
-the locale and terminal to use.  It is also possible to pass these
-options using Assuan protocol options.
-@end table
-
-@node Front ends
-@chapter Front Ends
-
-There are several different flavors of @pinentry{}.  Concretely, there
-are Gtk+2, Qt@tie{}4, Gnome@tie{}3, Emacs, curses and tty variants.
-These different implementations provide higher levels of integration
-with a specific environment.  For instance, the Gnome@tie{}3
-@pinentry{} uses Gnome@tie{}3 widgets to display the prompts.  For
-Gnome@tie{}3 users, this higher level of integration provides a more
-consistent aesthetic.  However, this comes at a cost.  Because this
-@pinentry{} uses so many components, there is a larger chance of a
-failure.  In particular, there is a larger chance that the passphrase
-is saved in memory and that memory is exposed to an attacker (consider
-the OpenSSL Heartbeat vulnerability).
-
-To understand how many components touch the passphrase, consider again
-the Gnome@tie{}3 implementation.  When a user presses a button on the
-keyboard, the key is passed from the kernel to the X@tie{}server to
-the toolkit (Gtk+) and to the actual text entry widget.  Along the
-way, the key is saved in memory and processed.  In fact, the key
-presses are probably read using standard C library functions, which
-buffer the input.  None of this code is careful to make sure the
-contents of the memory are not leaked by keeping the data in unpagable
-memory and wiping it when the buffer is freed.  However, even if they
-did, there is still the problem that when a computer hibernates, the
-system writes unpagable memory to disk anyway.  Further, many
-installations are virtualized (e.g., running on Xen) and have little
-control over their actual environment.
-
-The curses variant uses a significant smaller software stack and the
-tty variant uses an even smaller one.  However, if they are run in an
-X@tie{}terminal, then a similar number of components are handling the
-passphrase as in the Gnome@tie{}3 case!  Thus, to be most secure, you
-need to direct GPG@tie{}Agent to use a fixed virtual console.  Since
-you need to remain logged in for GPG@tie{}Agent to use that console,
-you should run there and have @code{screen} or @code{tmux} lock the
-tty.
-
-The Emacs pinentry implementation interacts with a running Emacs
-session and directs the Emacs instance to display the passphrase
-prompt.  Since this doesn't work very well if there is no Emacs
-running, the generic @pinentry{} backend checks if a
-@pinentry{}-enabled Emacs should be used.  Specifically, it looks to
-see if the @code{INSIDE_EMACS} variable is set and then attempts to
-establish a connection to the specified address.  If this is the case,
-then instead of, e.g., @code{pinentry-gtk2} displaying a Gtk+2
-pinentry, it interacts with the Emacs session.  This functionality can
-be explicitly disabled by passing @code{--disable-inside-emacs} to
-@code{configure} when building @pinentry{}.
-
-Having Emacs get the passphrase is convenient, however, it is a
-significant security risk.  Emacs is a huge program, which doesn't
-provide any process isolation to speak of.  As such, having it handle
-the passphrase adds a huge chunk of code to the user's trusted computing
-base.  Because of this concern, Emacs doesn't enable this by default,
-unless the @code{allow-emacs-pinentry} option is explicitly set in his
-or her @code{.gnupg/gpg-agent.conf} file.
-
-Similar to the inside-emacs check, the @pinentry{} frontends check
-whether the @code{DISPLAY} variable is set and a working X server is
-available.  If this is not the case, then they fallback to the curses
-front end.  This can also be disabled by passing
-@code{--disable-fallback-curses} to @code{configure} at build time.
-
-@c 
-@c  Assuan Protocol
-@c
-@node Protocol
-@chapter @pinentry{}'s Assuan Protocol
-
-The @pinentry{} should never service more than one connection at once.
-It is reasonable to exec the @pinentry{} prior to a request.
-
-The @pinentry{} does not need to stay in memory because the
-@sc{gpg-agent} has the ability to cache passphrases.  The usual way to
-run the @pinentry{} is by setting up a pipe (not a socket) and then
-fork/exec the @pinentry{}.  The communication is then done by means of
-the protocol described here until the client is satisfied with the
-result.
-
-Although it is called a @pinentry{}, it allows entering reasonably
-long strings (strings that are up to 2048 characters long are
-supported by every pinentry).  The client using the @pinentry{} has to
-check for correctness.
-
-Note that all strings are expected to be encoded as UTF-8; @pinentry{}
-takes care of converting it to the locally used codeset.  To include
-linefeeds or other special characters, you may percent-escape them
-(e.g., a line feed is encoded as @code{%0A}, the percent sign itself
-is encoded as @code{%25}, etc.).
-
-The following is a list of supported commands:
-
-@table @gnupgtabopt
-
-@item Set the timeout before returning an error
-@example
-  C: SETTIMEOUT 30
-  S: OK
-@end example
-
-@item Set the descriptive text to display
-@example
-  C: SETDESC Enter PIN for Richard Nixon <nobody@@trickydicky.gov>
-  S: OK
-@end example
-
-@item Set the prompt to show
-When asking for a PIN, set the text just before the widget for
-passphrase entry.
-@example
-  C: SETPROMPT PIN:
-  S: OK
-@end example
-
-You should use an underscore in the text only if you know that a
-modern version of pinentry is used.  Modern versions underline the
-next character after the underscore and use the first such underlined
-character as a keyboard accelerator.  Use a double underscore to
-escape an underscore.
-
-@item Set the window title
-This command may be used to change the default window title.  When
-using this feature you should take care that the window is still
-identifiable as the pinentry.
-@example
-  C: SETTITLE Tape Recorder Room
-  S: OK
-@end example
-
-@item Set the button texts
-There are three texts which should be used to override the English
-defaults:
-
-To set the text for the button signaling confirmation (in UTF-8).
-See SETPROMPT on how to use an keyboard accelerator.
-@example
-  C: SETOK Yes
-  S: OK
-@end example
-
-
-To set the text for the button signaling cancellation or disagreement
-(in UTF-8).  See SETPROMPT on how to use an keyboard accelerator.
-@example
-  C: SETCANCEL No
-  S: OK
-@end example
-
-
-In case three buttons are required, use the following command to set
-the text (UTF-8) for the non-affirmative response button.  The
-affirmative button text is still set using SETOK and the CANCEL button
-text with SETCANCEL.  See SETPROMPT on how to use an keyboard
-accelerator.
-@example
-  C: SETNOTOK Do not do this
-  S: OK
-@end example
-
-
-
-@item Set the Error text
-This is used by the client to display an error message.  In contrast
-to the other commands, the error message is automatically reset with
-a GETPIN or CONFIRM, and is only displayed when asking for a PIN.
-@example
-  C: SETERROR Invalid PIN entered - please try again
-  S: OK
-@end example
-
-@item Enable a passphrase quality indicator
-Adds a quality indicator to the GETPIN window.  This indicator is
-updated as the passphrase is typed.  The clients needs to implement an
-inquiry named "QUALITY" which gets passed the current passphrase
-(percent-plus escaped) and should send back a string with a single
-numerical value between -100 and 100.  Negative values will be
-displayed in red.
-@example
-  C: SETQUALITYBAR
-  S: OK
-@end example
-
-If a custom label for the quality bar is required, just add that label
-as an argument as a percent-escaped string.  You will need this
-feature to translate the label because @pinentry{} has no internal
-gettext except for stock strings from the toolkit library.
-
-If you want to show a tooltip for the quality bar, you may use
-@example
-  C: SETQUALITYBAR_TT string
-  S: OK
-@end example
-
-@noindent
-With STRING being a percent escaped string shown as the tooltip.
-
-
-@item Ask for a PIN
-The meat of this tool is to ask for a passphrase of PIN, it is done with
-this command:
-@example
-  C: GETPIN
-  S: D no more tapes
-  S: OK
-@end example
-Note that the passphrase is transmitted in clear using standard data
-responses.  Expect it to be in UTF-8.
-
-@item Ask for confirmation
-To ask for a confirmation (yes or no), you can use this command:
-@example
-  C: CONFIRM
-  S: OK
-@end example
-The client should use SETDESC to set an appropriate text before
-issuing this command, and may use SETPROMPT to set the button texts.
-The value returned is either OK for YES or the error code
-@code{ASSUAN_Not_Confirmed}.
-
-@item Show a message
-To show a message, you can use this command:
-@example
-  C: MESSAGE
-  S: OK
-@end example
-alternatively you may add an option to confirm:
-@example
-  C: CONFIRM --one-button
-  S: OK
-@end example
-The client should use SETDESC to set an appropriate text before issuing
-this command, and may use SETOK to set the text for the dismiss button.
-The value returned is OK or an error message.
-
-@item Set the output device
-When using X, the @pinentry{} program must be invoked with an
-appropriate @code{DISPLAY} environment variable or the
-@code{--display} option.
-
-When using a text terminal:
-@example
-  C: OPTION ttyname=/dev/tty3
-  S: OK
-  C: OPTION ttytype=vt100
-  S: OK
-  C: OPTION lc-ctype=de_DE.UTF-8
-  S: OK
-@end example
-The client should use the @code{ttyname} option to set the output TTY
-file name, the @code{ttytype} option to the @code{TERM} variable
-appropriate for this tty and @code{lc-ctype} to the locale which
-defines the character set to use for this terminal.
-
-@item Set the default strings
-To avoid having translations in Pinentry proper, the caller may set
-certain translated strings which are used by @pinentry{} as default
-strings.
-
-@example
-  C: OPTION default-ok=_Korrekt
-  S: OK
-  C: OPTION default-cancel=Abbruch
-  S: OK
-  C: OPTION default-prompt=PIN eingeben:
-  S: OK
-@end example
-The strings are subject to accelerator marking, see SETPROMPT for
-details.
-
-@item Passphrase caching
-
-Some environments, such as GNOME, cache passwords and passphrases.
-The @pinentry{} should only use an external cache if the
-@code{allow-external-password-cache} option was set and a stable key
-identifier (using SETKEYINFO) was provided.  In this case, if the
-passphrase was read from the cache, the @pinentry{} should send the
-@code{PASSWORD_FROM_CACHE} status message before returning the
-passphrase.  This indicates to GPG Agent that it should not increment
-the passphrase retry counter.
-
-@example
-  C: OPTION allow-external-password-cache
-  S: OK
-  C: SETKEYINFO key-grip
-  S: OK
-  C: getpin
-  S: S PASSWORD_FROM_CACHE
-  S: D 1234
-  C: OK
-@end example
-
-Note: if @code{allow-external-password-cache} is not specified, an
-external password cache must not be used: this can lead to subtle
-bugs.  In particular, if this option is not specified, then GPG Agent
-does not recognize the @code{PASSWORD_FROM_CACHE} status message and
-will count trying a cached password against the password retry count.
-If the password retry count is 1, then the user will never have the
-opportunity to correct the cached password.
-
-Note: it is strongly recommended that a pinentry supporting this
-feature provide the user an option to enable it manually.  That is,
-saving a passphrase in an external password manager should be opt-in.
-
-The key identifier provided SETKEYINFO must be considered opaque and
-may change in the future.  It currently has the form
-@code{X/HEXSTRING} where @code{X} is either @code{n}, @code{s}, or
-@code{u}.  In the former two cases, the HEXSTRING corresponds to the
-key grip.  The key grip is not the OpenPGP Key ID, but it can be
-mapped to the key using the following:
-
-@example
-  # gpg2 --with-keygrip --list-secret-keys
-@end example
-
-@noindent
-and searching the output for the key grip.  The same command-line
-options can also be used with gpgsm.
-
-@end table
-
-@node Implementation Details
-@chapter Implementation Details
-
-The pinentry source code can be divided into three categories.  There
-is a backend module, which lives in @code{pinentry/}, there are
-utility functions, e.g., in @code{secmem/}, and there are various
-frontends.
-
-All of the low-level logic lives in the backend.  This frees the
-frontends from having to implement, e.g., the Assuan protocol.  When
-the backend receives an option, it updates the state in a
-@code{pinentry_t} struct.  The frontend is called when the client
-either calls @code{GETPIN}, @code{CONFIRM} or @code{MESSAGE}.  In
-these cases, the backend invokes the @code{pinentry_cmd_handler},
-which is passed the @code{pinentry_t} struct.
-
-When the callback is invoked, the frontend should create a window
-based on the state in the @code{pinentry_t} struct.  For instance, the
-title to use for the dialog's window (if any) is stored in the
-@code{title} field.  If the is @code{NULL}, the frontend should choose
-a reasonable default value.  (Default is not always provided, because
-different tool kits and environments have different reasonable
-defaults.)
-
-The widget needs to support a number of different interactions with
-the user.  Each of them is described below.
-
-@table @gnupgtabopt
-@item Passphrase Confirmation
-
-When creating a new key, the passphrase should be entered twice.  The
-client (typically GPG Agent) indicates this to the @pinentry{} by
-invoking @code{SETREPEAT}.  In this case, the backend sets the
-@code{repeat_passphrase} field to a copy of the passed string.  The
-value of this field should be used to label a second text input.
-
-It is the frontend's responsibility to check that the passwords match.
-If they don't match, the frontend should display an error message and
-continue to prompt the user.
-
-If the passwords do match, then, when the user presses the okay
-button, the @code{repeat_okay} field should be set to @code{1} (this
-causes the backend to emit the @code{S PIN_REPEATED} status message).
-
-@item Message Box
-
-Sometimes GPG Agent needs to display a message.  In this case, the
-@code{pin} variable is @code{NULL}.
-
-At the Assuan level, this mode is selected by using either the
-@code{MESSAGE} or the @code{CONFIRM} command instead of the
-@code{GETPIN} command.  The @code{MESSAGE} command never shows the
-cancel or an other button.  The same holds for @code{CONFIRM} if it
-was passed the ``--one-button'' argument.  If @code{CONFIRM} was not
-passed this argument, the dialog for @code{CONFIRM} should show both
-the @code{ok} and the @code{cancel} buttons and optionally the
-@code{notok} button.  The frontend can determine whether the dialog is
-a one-button dialog by inspecting the @code{one_button} variable.
-
-@item Passphrase Entry
-
-If neither of the above cases holds, then GPG Agent is simply
-requesting the passphrase.  In this case, the @code{ok} and
-@code{cancel} buttons should be displayed.
-
-@end table
-
-The layout of the three variants is quite similar.  Here are the
-relevant elements that describe the layout:
-
-@table @gnupgtabopt
-@item @code{title}
-The window's title.
-
-@item @code{description}
-The reason for the dialog.  When requesting a passphrase, this
-describes the key.  When showing a message box, this is the message to
-show.
-
-@item @code{error}
-If GPG Agent determines that the passphrase was incorrect, it will
-call @code{GETPIN} again (up to a configurable number of times) to
-again prompt the user.  In this case, this variable contains a
-description of the error message.  This text should typically be
-highlighted in someway.
-
-@item @code{prompt}, @code{default-prompt}
-The string to associate with the passphrase entry box.
-
-There is a subtle difference between @code{prompt} and
-@code{default-prompt}.  @code{default-prompt} means that a stylized
-prompt (e.g., an icon suggesting a prompt) may be used.  @code{prompt}
-means that the entry's meaning is not consistent with such a style
-and, as such, no icon should be used.
-
-If both variables are set, the @code{prompt} variant takes precedence.
-
-@item @code{repeat_passphrase}
-The string to associate with the second passphrase entry box.  The
-second passphrase entry box should only be shown if this is not
-@code{NULL}.
-
-@item @code{ok}, @code{default-ok}
-The string to show in the @code{ok} button.
-
-If there are any @code{_} characters, the following character should
-be used as an accelerator.  (A double underscore means a plain
-underscore should be shown.)  If the frontend does not support
-accelerators, then the underscores should be removed manually.
-
-There is a subtle difference between @code{ok} and @code{default-ok}.
-@code{default-ok} means that a stylized OK button should be used.  For
-instance, it could include a check mark.  @code{ok} means that the
-button's meaning is not consistent with such an icon and, as such, no
-icon should be used.  Thus, if the @code{ok} button should have the
-text ``No password required'' then @code{ok} should be used because a
-check mark icon doesn't make sense.
-
-If this variable is @code{NULL}, the frontend should choose a
-reasonable default.
-
-If both variables are set, the @code{ok} variant takes precedence.
-
-@item @code{cancel}, @code{default-cancel}
-Like the @code{ok} and @code{default-ok} buttons except these strings
-are used for the cancel button.
-
-This button should not be shown if @code{one_button} is set.
-
-@code{default-notok}
-Like the @code{default-ok} button except this string is used for the
-other button.
-
-This button should only be displayed when showing a message box.  If
-these variables are @code{NULL} or @code{one_button} is set, this
-button should not be displayed.
-
-@item @code{quality_bar}
-If this is set, a widget should be used to show the password's
-quality.  The value of this field is a label for the widget.
-
-Note: to update the password quality, whenever the password changes,
-call the @code{pinentry_inq_quality} function and then update the
-password quality widget correspondingly.
-
-@item @code{quality_bar_tt}
-A tooltip for the quality bar.
-
-@item @code{default_pwmngr}
-If @code{may_cache_password} and @code{keyinfo} are set and the user
-consents, then the @pinentry{} may cache the password with an external
-manager.  Note: getting the user's consent is essential, because
-password managers often provide a different level of security.  If the
-above condition is true and @code{tried_password_cache} is false, then
-a check box with the specified string should be displayed.  The check
-box must default to off.
-
-@item @code{default-cf-visi}
-The string to show with a question if you want to confirm that
-the user wants to change the visibility of the password.
-
-@item @code{default-tt-visi}
-Tooltip for an action that would reveal the entered password.
-
-@item @code{default-tt-hide}
-Tooltip for an action that would hide the password revealed
-by the action labeld with @code{default-tt-visi}
-
-@end table
-
-When the handler is done, it should store the passphrase in
-@code{pin}, if appropriate.  This variable is allocated in secure
-memory.  Use @code{pinentry_setbufferlen} to size the buffer.
-
-The actual return code is dependent on whether the dialog is in
-message mode or in passphrase mode.
-
-If the dialog is in message mode and the user pressed ok, return 1.
-Otherwise, return 0.  If an error occurred, indicate this by setting it
-in @code{specific_err} or setting @code{locale_err} to @code{1} (for
-locale specific errors).  If the dialog was canceled, then the handler
-should set the @code{canceled} variable to @code{1}.  If the not ok
-button was pressed, don't do anything else.
-
-If the dialog is in passphrase mode return @code{1} if the user
-entered a password and pressed ok.  If an error occurred, return
-@code{-1} and set @code{specific_err} or @code{locale_err}, as above.
-If the user canceled the dialog box, return @code{-1}.
-
-If the window was closed, then the handler should set the
-@code{close_button} variable and otherwise act as if the cancel button
-was pressed.
-
-
-
-@c ---------------------------------------------------------------------
-@c Legal Blurbs
-@c ---------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-@include gpl.texi
-
-@c ---------------------------------------------------------------------
-@c Indexes
-@c ---------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-@node Option Index
-@unnumbered Option Index
-
-@printindex op
-
-@node Index
-@unnumbered Index
-
-@printindex cp
-
-@c ---------------------------------------------------------------------
-@c Epilogue
-@c ---------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-@bye
-
-
diff --git a/debian/pinentry-tqt/pinentry-tqt-1.1.0/doc/stamp-vti b/debian/pinentry-tqt/pinentry-tqt-1.1.0/doc/stamp-vti
deleted file mode 100644
index 8ed26ce8..00000000
--- a/debian/pinentry-tqt/pinentry-tqt-1.1.0/doc/stamp-vti
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,4 +0,0 @@
-@set UPDATED 3 December 2017
-@set UPDATED-MONTH December 2017
-@set EDITION 1.1.0
-@set VERSION 1.1.0
diff --git a/debian/pinentry-tqt/pinentry-tqt-1.1.0/doc/texinfo.tex b/debian/pinentry-tqt/pinentry-tqt-1.1.0/doc/texinfo.tex
deleted file mode 100644
index 3f81058b..00000000
--- a/debian/pinentry-tqt/pinentry-tqt-1.1.0/doc/texinfo.tex
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,8638 +0,0 @@
-% texinfo.tex -- TeX macros to handle Texinfo files.
-%
-% Load plain if necessary, i.e., if running under initex.
-\expandafter\ifx\csname fmtname\endcsname\relax\input plain\fi
-%
-\def\texinfoversion{2016-11-05.00}
-%
-% Copyright (C) 1985, 1986, 1988, 1990, 1991, 1992, 1993, 1994, 1995,
-% 1996, 1997, 1998, 1999, 2000, 2001, 2002, 2003, 2004, 2005, 2006,
-% 2007 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
-%
-% This texinfo.tex file is free software; you can redistribute it and/or
-% modify it under the terms of the GNU General Public License as
-% published by the Free Software Foundation; either version 3, or (at
-% your option) any later version.
-%
-% This texinfo.tex file is distributed in the hope that it will be
-% useful, but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty
-% of MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.  See the GNU
-% General Public License for more details.
-%
-% You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License
-% along with this texinfo.tex file; see the file COPYING.  If not, 
-% see <https://www.gnu.org/licenses/>.
-%
-% As a special exception, when this file is read by TeX when processing
-% a Texinfo source document, you may use the result without
-% restriction.  (This has been our intent since Texinfo was invented.)
-%
-% Please try the latest version of texinfo.tex before submitting bug
-% reports; you can get the latest version from:
-%   https://www.gnu.org/software/texinfo/ (the Texinfo home page), or
-%   ftp://tug.org/tex/texinfo.tex
-%     (and all CTAN mirrors, see https://www.ctan.org).
-% The texinfo.tex in any given distribution could well be out
-% of date, so if that's what you're using, please check.
-%
-% Send bug reports to bug-texinfo@gnu.org.  Please include including a
-% complete document in each bug report with which we can reproduce the
-% problem.  Patches are, of course, greatly appreciated.
-%
-% To process a Texinfo manual with TeX, it's most reliable to use the
-% texi2dvi shell script that comes with the distribution.  For a simple
-% manual foo.texi, however, you can get away with this:
-%   tex foo.texi
-%   texindex foo.??
-%   tex foo.texi
-%   tex foo.texi
-%   dvips foo.dvi -o  # or whatever; this makes foo.ps.
-% The extra TeX runs get the cross-reference information correct.
-% Sometimes one run after texindex suffices, and sometimes you need more
-% than two; texi2dvi does it as many times as necessary.
-%
-% It is possible to adapt texinfo.tex for other languages, to some
-% extent.  You can get the existing language-specific files from the
-% full Texinfo distribution.
-%
-% The GNU Texinfo home page is https://www.gnu.org/software/texinfo.
-
-
-\message{Loading texinfo [version \texinfoversion]:}
-
-% If in a .fmt file, print the version number
-% and turn on active characters that we couldn't do earlier because
-% they might have appeared in the input file name.
-\everyjob{\message{[Texinfo version \texinfoversion]}%
-  \catcode`+=\active \catcode`\_=\active}
-
-
-\chardef\other=12
-
-% We never want plain's \outer definition of \+ in Texinfo.
-% For @tex, we can use \tabalign.
-\let\+ = \relax
-
-% Save some plain tex macros whose names we will redefine.
-\let\ptexb=\b
-\let\ptexbullet=\bullet
-\let\ptexc=\c
-\let\ptexcomma=\,
-\let\ptexdot=\.
-\let\ptexdots=\dots
-\let\ptexend=\end
-\let\ptexequiv=\equiv
-\let\ptexexclam=\!
-\let\ptexfootnote=\footnote
-\let\ptexgtr=>
-\let\ptexhat=^
-\let\ptexi=\i
-\let\ptexindent=\indent
-\let\ptexinsert=\insert
-\let\ptexlbrace=\{
-\let\ptexless=<
-\let\ptexnewwrite\newwrite
-\let\ptexnoindent=\noindent
-\let\ptexplus=+
-\let\ptexrbrace=\}
-\let\ptexslash=\/
-\let\ptexstar=\*
-\let\ptext=\t
-
-% If this character appears in an error message or help string, it
-% starts a new line in the output.
-\newlinechar = `^^J
-
-% Use TeX 3.0's \inputlineno to get the line number, for better error
-% messages, but if we're using an old version of TeX, don't do anything.
-%
-\ifx\inputlineno\thisisundefined
-  \let\linenumber = \empty % Pre-3.0.
-\else
-  \def\linenumber{l.\the\inputlineno:\space}
-\fi
-
-% Set up fixed words for English if not already set.
-\ifx\putwordAppendix\undefined  \gdef\putwordAppendix{Appendix}\fi
-\ifx\putwordChapter\undefined   \gdef\putwordChapter{Chapter}\fi
-\ifx\putwordfile\undefined      \gdef\putwordfile{file}\fi
-\ifx\putwordin\undefined        \gdef\putwordin{in}\fi
-\ifx\putwordIndexIsEmpty\undefined     \gdef\putwordIndexIsEmpty{(Index is empty)}\fi
-\ifx\putwordIndexNonexistent\undefined \gdef\putwordIndexNonexistent{(Index is nonexistent)}\fi
-\ifx\putwordInfo\undefined      \gdef\putwordInfo{Info}\fi
-\ifx\putwordInstanceVariableof\undefined \gdef\putwordInstanceVariableof{Instance Variable of}\fi
-\ifx\putwordMethodon\undefined  \gdef\putwordMethodon{Method on}\fi
-\ifx\putwordNoTitle\undefined   \gdef\putwordNoTitle{No Title}\fi
-\ifx\putwordof\undefined        \gdef\putwordof{of}\fi
-\ifx\putwordon\undefined        \gdef\putwordon{on}\fi
-\ifx\putwordpage\undefined      \gdef\putwordpage{page}\fi
-\ifx\putwordsection\undefined   \gdef\putwordsection{section}\fi
-\ifx\putwordSection\undefined   \gdef\putwordSection{Section}\fi
-\ifx\putwordsee\undefined       \gdef\putwordsee{see}\fi
-\ifx\putwordSee\undefined       \gdef\putwordSee{See}\fi
-\ifx\putwordShortTOC\undefined  \gdef\putwordShortTOC{Short Contents}\fi
-\ifx\putwordTOC\undefined       \gdef\putwordTOC{Table of Contents}\fi
-%
-\ifx\putwordMJan\undefined \gdef\putwordMJan{January}\fi
-\ifx\putwordMFeb\undefined \gdef\putwordMFeb{February}\fi
-\ifx\putwordMMar\undefined \gdef\putwordMMar{March}\fi
-\ifx\putwordMApr\undefined \gdef\putwordMApr{April}\fi
-\ifx\putwordMMay\undefined \gdef\putwordMMay{May}\fi
-\ifx\putwordMJun\undefined \gdef\putwordMJun{June}\fi
-\ifx\putwordMJul\undefined \gdef\putwordMJul{July}\fi
-\ifx\putwordMAug\undefined \gdef\putwordMAug{August}\fi
-\ifx\putwordMSep\undefined \gdef\putwordMSep{September}\fi
-\ifx\putwordMOct\undefined \gdef\putwordMOct{October}\fi
-\ifx\putwordMNov\undefined \gdef\putwordMNov{November}\fi
-\ifx\putwordMDec\undefined \gdef\putwordMDec{December}\fi
-%
-\ifx\putwordDefmac\undefined    \gdef\putwordDefmac{Macro}\fi
-\ifx\putwordDefspec\undefined   \gdef\putwordDefspec{Special Form}\fi
-\ifx\putwordDefvar\undefined    \gdef\putwordDefvar{Variable}\fi
-\ifx\putwordDefopt\undefined    \gdef\putwordDefopt{User Option}\fi
-\ifx\putwordDeffunc\undefined   \gdef\putwordDeffunc{Function}\fi
-
-% Since the category of space is not known, we have to be careful.
-\chardef\spacecat = 10
-\def\spaceisspace{\catcode`\ =\spacecat}
-
-% sometimes characters are active, so we need control sequences.
-\chardef\colonChar = `\:
-\chardef\commaChar = `\,
-\chardef\dashChar  = `\-
-\chardef\dotChar   = `\.
-\chardef\exclamChar= `\!
-\chardef\lquoteChar= `\`
-\chardef\questChar = `\?
-\chardef\rquoteChar= `\'
-\chardef\semiChar  = `\;
-\chardef\underChar = `\_
-
-% Ignore a token.
-%
-\def\gobble#1{}
-
-% The following is used inside several \edef's.
-\def\makecsname#1{\expandafter\noexpand\csname#1\endcsname}
-
-% Hyphenation fixes.
-\hyphenation{
-  Flor-i-da Ghost-script Ghost-view Mac-OS Post-Script
-  ap-pen-dix bit-map bit-maps
-  data-base data-bases eshell fall-ing half-way long-est man-u-script
-  man-u-scripts mini-buf-fer mini-buf-fers over-view par-a-digm
-  par-a-digms rath-er rec-tan-gu-lar ro-bot-ics se-vere-ly set-up spa-ces
-  spell-ing spell-ings
-  stand-alone strong-est time-stamp time-stamps which-ever white-space
-  wide-spread wrap-around
-}
-
-% Margin to add to right of even pages, to left of odd pages.
-\newdimen\bindingoffset
-\newdimen\normaloffset
-\newdimen\pagewidth \newdimen\pageheight
-
-% For a final copy, take out the rectangles
-% that mark overfull boxes (in case you have decided
-% that the text looks ok even though it passes the margin).
-%
-\def\finalout{\overfullrule=0pt}
-
-% @| inserts a changebar to the left of the current line.  It should
-% surround any changed text.  This approach does *not* work if the
-% change spans more than two lines of output.  To handle that, we would
-% have adopt a much more difficult approach (putting marks into the main
-% vertical list for the beginning and end of each change).
-%
-\def\|{%
-  % \vadjust can only be used in horizontal mode.
-  \leavevmode
-  %
-  % Append this vertical mode material after the current line in the output.
-  \vadjust{%
-    % We want to insert a rule with the height and depth of the current
-    % leading; that is exactly what \strutbox is supposed to record.
-    \vskip-\baselineskip
-    %
-    % \vadjust-items are inserted at the left edge of the type.  So
-    % the \llap here moves out into the left-hand margin.
-    \llap{%
-      %
-      % For a thicker or thinner bar, change the `1pt'.
-      \vrule height\baselineskip width1pt
-      %
-      % This is the space between the bar and the text.
-      \hskip 12pt
-    }%
-  }%
-}
-
-% Sometimes it is convenient to have everything in the transcript file
-% and nothing on the terminal.  We don't just call \tracingall here,
-% since that produces some useless output on the terminal.  We also make
-% some effort to order the tracing commands to reduce output in the log
-% file; cf. trace.sty in LaTeX.
-%
-\def\gloggingall{\begingroup \globaldefs = 1 \loggingall \endgroup}%
-\def\loggingall{%
-  \tracingstats2
-  \tracingpages1
-  \tracinglostchars2  % 2 gives us more in etex
-  \tracingparagraphs1
-  \tracingoutput1
-  \tracingmacros2
-  \tracingrestores1
-  \showboxbreadth\maxdimen \showboxdepth\maxdimen
-  \ifx\eTeXversion\undefined\else % etex gives us more logging
-    \tracingscantokens1
-    \tracingifs1
-    \tracinggroups1
-    \tracingnesting2
-    \tracingassigns1
-  \fi
-  \tracingcommands3  % 3 gives us more in etex
-  \errorcontextlines16
-}%
-
-% add check for \lastpenalty to plain's definitions.  If the last thing
-% we did was a \nobreak, we don't want to insert more space.
-%
-\def\smallbreak{\ifnum\lastpenalty<10000\par\ifdim\lastskip<\smallskipamount
-  \removelastskip\penalty-50\smallskip\fi\fi}
-\def\medbreak{\ifnum\lastpenalty<10000\par\ifdim\lastskip<\medskipamount
-  \removelastskip\penalty-100\medskip\fi\fi}
-\def\bigbreak{\ifnum\lastpenalty<10000\par\ifdim\lastskip<\bigskipamount
-  \removelastskip\penalty-200\bigskip\fi\fi}
-
-% For @cropmarks command.
-% Do @cropmarks to get crop marks.
-%
-\newif\ifcropmarks
-\let\cropmarks = \cropmarkstrue
-%
-% Dimensions to add cropmarks at corners.
-% Added by P. A. MacKay, 12 Nov. 1986
-%
-\newdimen\outerhsize \newdimen\outervsize % set by the paper size routines
-\newdimen\cornerlong  \cornerlong=1pc
-\newdimen\cornerthick \cornerthick=.3pt
-\newdimen\topandbottommargin \topandbottommargin=.75in
-
-% Main output routine.
-\chardef\PAGE = 255
-\output = {\onepageout{\pagecontents\PAGE}}
-
-\newbox\headlinebox
-\newbox\footlinebox
-
-% \onepageout takes a vbox as an argument.  Note that \pagecontents
-% does insertions, but you have to call it yourself.
-\def\onepageout#1{%
-  \ifcropmarks \hoffset=0pt \else \hoffset=\normaloffset \fi
-  %
-  \ifodd\pageno  \advance\hoffset by \bindingoffset
-  \else \advance\hoffset by -\bindingoffset\fi
-  %
-  % Do this outside of the \shipout so @code etc. will be expanded in
-  % the headline as they should be, not taken literally (outputting ''code).
-  \setbox\headlinebox = \vbox{\let\hsize=\pagewidth \makeheadline}%
-  \setbox\footlinebox = \vbox{\let\hsize=\pagewidth \makefootline}%
-  %
-  {%
-    % Have to do this stuff outside the \shipout because we want it to
-    % take effect in \write's, yet the group defined by the \vbox ends
-    % before the \shipout runs.
-    %
-    \indexdummies         % don't expand commands in the output.
-    \normalturnoffactive  % \ in index entries must not stay \, e.g., if
-               % the page break happens to be in the middle of an example.
-               % We don't want .vr (or whatever) entries like this:
-               % \entry{{\tt \indexbackslash }acronym}{32}{\code {\acronym}}
-               % "\acronym" won't work when it's read back in;
-               % it needs to be 
-               % {\code {{\tt \backslashcurfont }acronym}
-    \shipout\vbox{%
-      % Do this early so pdf references go to the beginning of the page.
-      \ifpdfmakepagedest \pdfdest name{\the\pageno} xyz\fi
-      %
-      \ifcropmarks \vbox to \outervsize\bgroup
-        \hsize = \outerhsize
-        \vskip-\topandbottommargin
-        \vtop to0pt{%
-          \line{\ewtop\hfil\ewtop}%
-          \nointerlineskip
-          \line{%
-            \vbox{\moveleft\cornerthick\nstop}%
-            \hfill
-            \vbox{\moveright\cornerthick\nstop}%
-          }%
-          \vss}%
-        \vskip\topandbottommargin
-        \line\bgroup
-          \hfil % center the page within the outer (page) hsize.
-          \ifodd\pageno\hskip\bindingoffset\fi
-          \vbox\bgroup
-      \fi
-      %
-      \unvbox\headlinebox
-      \pagebody{#1}%
-      \ifdim\ht\footlinebox > 0pt
-        % Only leave this space if the footline is nonempty.
-        % (We lessened \vsize for it in \oddfootingyyy.)
-        % The \baselineskip=24pt in plain's \makefootline has no effect.
-        \vskip 24pt
-        \unvbox\footlinebox
-      \fi
-      %
-      \ifcropmarks
-          \egroup % end of \vbox\bgroup
-        \hfil\egroup % end of (centering) \line\bgroup
-        \vskip\topandbottommargin plus1fill minus1fill
-        \boxmaxdepth = \cornerthick
-        \vbox to0pt{\vss
-          \line{%
-            \vbox{\moveleft\cornerthick\nsbot}%
-            \hfill
-            \vbox{\moveright\cornerthick\nsbot}%
-          }%
-          \nointerlineskip
-          \line{\ewbot\hfil\ewbot}%
-        }%
-      \egroup % \vbox from first cropmarks clause
-      \fi
-    }% end of \shipout\vbox
-  }% end of group with \indexdummies
-  \advancepageno
-  \ifnum\outputpenalty>-20000 \else\dosupereject\fi
-}
-
-\newinsert\margin \dimen\margin=\maxdimen
-
-\def\pagebody#1{\vbox to\pageheight{\boxmaxdepth=\maxdepth #1}}
-{\catcode`\@ =11
-\gdef\pagecontents#1{\ifvoid\topins\else\unvbox\topins\fi
-% marginal hacks, juha@viisa.uucp (Juha Takala)
-\ifvoid\margin\else % marginal info is present
-  \rlap{\kern\hsize\vbox to\z@{\kern1pt\box\margin \vss}}\fi
-\dimen@=\dp#1 \unvbox#1
-\ifvoid\footins\else\vskip\skip\footins\footnoterule \unvbox\footins\fi
-\ifr@ggedbottom \kern-\dimen@ \vfil \fi}
-}
-
-% Here are the rules for the cropmarks.  Note that they are
-% offset so that the space between them is truly \outerhsize or \outervsize
-% (P. A. MacKay, 12 November, 1986)
-%
-\def\ewtop{\vrule height\cornerthick depth0pt width\cornerlong}
-\def\nstop{\vbox
-  {\hrule height\cornerthick depth\cornerlong width\cornerthick}}
-\def\ewbot{\vrule height0pt depth\cornerthick width\cornerlong}
-\def\nsbot{\vbox
-  {\hrule height\cornerlong depth\cornerthick width\cornerthick}}
-
-% Parse an argument, then pass it to #1.  The argument is the rest of
-% the input line (except we remove a trailing comment).  #1 should be a
-% macro which expects an ordinary undelimited TeX argument.
-%
-\def\parsearg{\parseargusing{}}
-\def\parseargusing#1#2{%
-  \def\argtorun{#2}%
-  \begingroup
-    \obeylines
-    \spaceisspace
-    #1%
-    \parseargline\empty% Insert the \empty token, see \finishparsearg below.
-}
-
-{\obeylines %
-  \gdef\parseargline#1^^M{%
-    \endgroup % End of the group started in \parsearg.
-    \argremovecomment #1\comment\ArgTerm%
-  }%
-}
-
-% First remove any @comment, then any @c comment.
-\def\argremovecomment#1\comment#2\ArgTerm{\argremovec #1\c\ArgTerm}
-\def\argremovec#1\c#2\ArgTerm{\argcheckspaces#1\^^M\ArgTerm}
-
-% Each occurrence of `\^^M' or `<space>\^^M' is replaced by a single space.
-%
-% \argremovec might leave us with trailing space, e.g.,
-%    @end itemize  @c foo
-% This space token undergoes the same procedure and is eventually removed
-% by \finishparsearg.
-%
-\def\argcheckspaces#1\^^M{\argcheckspacesX#1\^^M \^^M}
-\def\argcheckspacesX#1 \^^M{\argcheckspacesY#1\^^M}
-\def\argcheckspacesY#1\^^M#2\^^M#3\ArgTerm{%
-  \def\temp{#3}%
-  \ifx\temp\empty
-    % Do not use \next, perhaps the caller of \parsearg uses it; reuse \temp:
-    \let\temp\finishparsearg
-  \else
-    \let\temp\argcheckspaces
-  \fi
-  % Put the space token in:
-  \temp#1 #3\ArgTerm
-}
-
-% If a _delimited_ argument is enclosed in braces, they get stripped; so
-% to get _exactly_ the rest of the line, we had to prevent such situation.
-% We prepended an \empty token at the very beginning and we expand it now,
-% just before passing the control to \argtorun.
-% (Similarly, we have to think about #3 of \argcheckspacesY above: it is
-% either the null string, or it ends with \^^M---thus there is no danger
-% that a pair of braces would be stripped.
-%
-% But first, we have to remove the trailing space token.
-%
-\def\finishparsearg#1 \ArgTerm{\expandafter\argtorun\expandafter{#1}}
-
-% \parseargdef\foo{...}
-%	is roughly equivalent to
-% \def\foo{\parsearg\Xfoo}
-% \def\Xfoo#1{...}
-%
-% Actually, I use \csname\string\foo\endcsname, ie. \\foo, as it is my
-% favourite TeX trick.  --kasal, 16nov03
-
-\def\parseargdef#1{%
-  \expandafter \doparseargdef \csname\string#1\endcsname #1%
-}
-\def\doparseargdef#1#2{%
-  \def#2{\parsearg#1}%
-  \def#1##1%
-}
-
-% Several utility definitions with active space:
-{
-  \obeyspaces
-  \gdef\obeyedspace{ }
-
-  % Make each space character in the input produce a normal interword
-  % space in the output.  Don't allow a line break at this space, as this
-  % is used only in environments like @example, where each line of input
-  % should produce a line of output anyway.
-  %
-  \gdef\sepspaces{\obeyspaces\let =\tie}
-
-  % If an index command is used in an @example environment, any spaces
-  % therein should become regular spaces in the raw index file, not the
-  % expansion of \tie (\leavevmode \penalty \@M \ ).
-  \gdef\unsepspaces{\let =\space}
-}
-
-
-\def\flushcr{\ifx\par\lisppar \def\next##1{}\else \let\next=\relax \fi \next}
-
-% Define the framework for environments in texinfo.tex.  It's used like this:
-%
-%   \envdef\foo{...}
-%   \def\Efoo{...}
-%
-% It's the responsibility of \envdef to insert \begingroup before the
-% actual body; @end closes the group after calling \Efoo.  \envdef also
-% defines \thisenv, so the current environment is known; @end checks
-% whether the environment name matches.  The \checkenv macro can also be
-% used to check whether the current environment is the one expected.
-%
-% Non-false conditionals (@iftex, @ifset) don't fit into this, so they
-% are not treated as environments; they don't open a group.  (The
-% implementation of @end takes care not to call \endgroup in this
-% special case.)
-
-
-% At runtime, environments start with this:
-\def\startenvironment#1{\begingroup\def\thisenv{#1}}
-% initialize
-\let\thisenv\empty
-
-% ... but they get defined via ``\envdef\foo{...}'':
-\long\def\envdef#1#2{\def#1{\startenvironment#1#2}}
-\def\envparseargdef#1#2{\parseargdef#1{\startenvironment#1#2}}
-
-% Check whether we're in the right environment:
-\def\checkenv#1{%
-  \def\temp{#1}%
-  \ifx\thisenv\temp
-  \else
-    \badenverr
-  \fi
-}
-
-% Evironment mismatch, #1 expected:
-\def\badenverr{%
-  \errhelp = \EMsimple
-  \errmessage{This command can appear only \inenvironment\temp,
-    not \inenvironment\thisenv}%
-}
-\def\inenvironment#1{%
-  \ifx#1\empty
-    out of any environment%
-  \else
-    in environment \expandafter\string#1%
-  \fi
-}
-
-% @end foo executes the definition of \Efoo.
-% But first, it executes a specialized version of \checkenv
-%
-\parseargdef\end{%
-  \if 1\csname iscond.#1\endcsname
-  \else
-    % The general wording of \badenverr may not be ideal, but... --kasal, 06nov03
-    \expandafter\checkenv\csname#1\endcsname
-    \csname E#1\endcsname
-    \endgroup
-  \fi
-}
-
-\newhelp\EMsimple{Press RETURN to continue.}
-
-
-%% Simple single-character @ commands
-
-% @@ prints an @
-% Kludge this until the fonts are right (grr).
-\def\@{{\tt\char64}}
-
-% This is turned off because it was never documented
-% and you can use @w{...} around a quote to suppress ligatures.
-%% Define @` and @' to be the same as ` and '
-%% but suppressing ligatures.
-%\def\`{{`}}
-%\def\'{{'}}
-
-% Used to generate quoted braces.
-\def\mylbrace {{\tt\char123}}
-\def\myrbrace {{\tt\char125}}
-\let\{=\mylbrace
-\let\}=\myrbrace
-\begingroup
-  % Definitions to produce \{ and \} commands for indices,
-  % and @{ and @} for the aux/toc files.
-  \catcode`\{ = \other \catcode`\} = \other
-  \catcode`\[ = 1 \catcode`\] = 2
-  \catcode`\! = 0 \catcode`\\ = \other
-  !gdef!lbracecmd[\{]%
-  !gdef!rbracecmd[\}]%
-  !gdef!lbraceatcmd[@{]%
-  !gdef!rbraceatcmd[@}]%
-!endgroup
-
-% @comma{} to avoid , parsing problems.
-\let\comma = ,
-
-% Accents: @, @dotaccent @ringaccent @ubaraccent @udotaccent
-% Others are defined by plain TeX: @` @' @" @^ @~ @= @u @v @H.
-\let\, = \c
-\let\dotaccent = \.
-\def\ringaccent#1{{\accent23 #1}}
-\let\tieaccent = \t
-\let\ubaraccent = \b
-\let\udotaccent = \d
-
-% Other special characters: @questiondown @exclamdown @ordf @ordm
-% Plain TeX defines: @AA @AE @O @OE @L (plus lowercase versions) @ss.
-\def\questiondown{?`}
-\def\exclamdown{!`}
-\def\ordf{\leavevmode\raise1ex\hbox{\selectfonts\lllsize \underbar{a}}}
-\def\ordm{\leavevmode\raise1ex\hbox{\selectfonts\lllsize \underbar{o}}}
-
-% Dotless i and dotless j, used for accents.
-\def\imacro{i}
-\def\jmacro{j}
-\def\dotless#1{%
-  \def\temp{#1}%
-  \ifx\temp\imacro \ptexi
-  \else\ifx\temp\jmacro \j
-  \else \errmessage{@dotless can be used only with i or j}%
-  \fi\fi
-}
-
-% The \TeX{} logo, as in plain, but resetting the spacing so that a
-% period following counts as ending a sentence.  (Idea found in latex.)
-%
-\edef\TeX{\TeX \spacefactor=1000 }
-
-% @LaTeX{} logo.  Not quite the same results as the definition in
-% latex.ltx, since we use a different font for the raised A; it's most
-% convenient for us to use an explicitly smaller font, rather than using
-% the \scriptstyle font (since we don't reset \scriptstyle and
-% \scriptscriptstyle).
-%
-\def\LaTeX{%
-  L\kern-.36em
-  {\setbox0=\hbox{T}%
-   \vbox to \ht0{\hbox{\selectfonts\lllsize A}\vss}}%
-  \kern-.15em
-  \TeX
-}
-
-% Be sure we're in horizontal mode when doing a tie, since we make space
-% equivalent to this in @example-like environments. Otherwise, a space
-% at the beginning of a line will start with \penalty -- and
-% since \penalty is valid in vertical mode, we'd end up putting the
-% penalty on the vertical list instead of in the new paragraph.
-{\catcode`@ = 11
- % Avoid using \@M directly, because that causes trouble
- % if the definition is written into an index file.
- \global\let\tiepenalty = \@M
- \gdef\tie{\leavevmode\penalty\tiepenalty\ }
-}
-
-% @: forces normal size whitespace following.
-\def\:{\spacefactor=1000 }
-
-% @* forces a line break.
-\def\*{\hfil\break\hbox{}\ignorespaces}
-
-% @/ allows a line break.
-\let\/=\allowbreak
-
-% @. is an end-of-sentence period.
-\def\.{.\spacefactor=\endofsentencespacefactor\space}
-
-% @! is an end-of-sentence bang.
-\def\!{!\spacefactor=\endofsentencespacefactor\space}
-
-% @? is an end-of-sentence query.
-\def\?{?\spacefactor=\endofsentencespacefactor\space}
-
-% @frenchspacing on|off  says whether to put extra space after punctuation.
-% 
-\def\onword{on}
-\def\offword{off}
-%
-\parseargdef\frenchspacing{%
-  \def\temp{#1}%
-  \ifx\temp\onword \plainfrenchspacing
-  \else\ifx\temp\offword \plainnonfrenchspacing
-  \else
-    \errhelp = \EMsimple
-    \errmessage{Unknown @frenchspacing option `\temp', must be on/off}%
-  \fi\fi
-}
-
-% @w prevents a word break.  Without the \leavevmode, @w at the
-% beginning of a paragraph, when TeX is still in vertical mode, would
-% produce a whole line of output instead of starting the paragraph.
-\def\w#1{\leavevmode\hbox{#1}}
-
-% @group ... @end group forces ... to be all on one page, by enclosing
-% it in a TeX vbox.  We use \vtop instead of \vbox to construct the box
-% to keep its height that of a normal line.  According to the rules for
-% \topskip (p.114 of the TeXbook), the glue inserted is
-% max (\topskip - \ht (first item), 0).  If that height is large,
-% therefore, no glue is inserted, and the space between the headline and
-% the text is small, which looks bad.
-%
-% Another complication is that the group might be very large.  This can
-% cause the glue on the previous page to be unduly stretched, because it
-% does not have much material.  In this case, it's better to add an
-% explicit \vfill so that the extra space is at the bottom.  The
-% threshold for doing this is if the group is more than \vfilllimit
-% percent of a page (\vfilllimit can be changed inside of @tex).
-%
-\newbox\groupbox
-\def\vfilllimit{0.7}
-%
-\envdef\group{%
-  \ifnum\catcode`\^^M=\active \else
-    \errhelp = \groupinvalidhelp
-    \errmessage{@group invalid in context where filling is enabled}%
-  \fi
-  \startsavinginserts
-  %
-  \setbox\groupbox = \vtop\bgroup
-    % Do @comment since we are called inside an environment such as
-    % @example, where each end-of-line in the input causes an
-    % end-of-line in the output.  We don't want the end-of-line after
-    % the `@group' to put extra space in the output.  Since @group
-    % should appear on a line by itself (according to the Texinfo
-    % manual), we don't worry about eating any user text.
-    \comment
-}
-%
-% The \vtop produces a box with normal height and large depth; thus, TeX puts
-% \baselineskip glue before it, and (when the next line of text is done)
-% \lineskip glue after it.  Thus, space below is not quite equal to space
-% above.  But it's pretty close.
-\def\Egroup{%
-    % To get correct interline space between the last line of the group
-    % and the first line afterwards, we have to propagate \prevdepth.
-    \endgraf % Not \par, as it may have been set to \lisppar.
-    \global\dimen1 = \prevdepth
-  \egroup           % End the \vtop.
-  % \dimen0 is the vertical size of the group's box.
-  \dimen0 = \ht\groupbox  \advance\dimen0 by \dp\groupbox
-  % \dimen2 is how much space is left on the page (more or less).
-  \dimen2 = \pageheight   \advance\dimen2 by -\pagetotal
-  % if the group doesn't fit on the current page, and it's a big big
-  % group, force a page break.
-  \ifdim \dimen0 > \dimen2
-    \ifdim \pagetotal < \vfilllimit\pageheight
-      \page
-    \fi
-  \fi
-  \box\groupbox
-  \prevdepth = \dimen1
-  \checkinserts
-}
-%
-% TeX puts in an \escapechar (i.e., `@') at the beginning of the help
-% message, so this ends up printing `@group can only ...'.
-%
-\newhelp\groupinvalidhelp{%
-group can only be used in environments such as @example,^^J%
-where each line of input produces a line of output.}
-
-% @need space-in-mils
-% forces a page break if there is not space-in-mils remaining.
-
-\newdimen\mil  \mil=0.001in
-
-% Old definition--didn't work.
-%\parseargdef\need{\par %
-%% This method tries to make TeX break the page naturally
-%% if the depth of the box does not fit.
-%{\baselineskip=0pt%
-%\vtop to #1\mil{\vfil}\kern -#1\mil\nobreak
-%\prevdepth=-1000pt
-%}}
-
-\parseargdef\need{%
-  % Ensure vertical mode, so we don't make a big box in the middle of a
-  % paragraph.
-  \par
-  %
-  % If the @need value is less than one line space, it's useless.
-  \dimen0 = #1\mil
-  \dimen2 = \ht\strutbox
-  \advance\dimen2 by \dp\strutbox
-  \ifdim\dimen0 > \dimen2
-    %
-    % Do a \strut just to make the height of this box be normal, so the
-    % normal leading is inserted relative to the preceding line.
-    % And a page break here is fine.
-    \vtop to #1\mil{\strut\vfil}%
-    %
-    % TeX does not even consider page breaks if a penalty added to the
-    % main vertical list is 10000 or more.  But in order to see if the
-    % empty box we just added fits on the page, we must make it consider
-    % page breaks.  On the other hand, we don't want to actually break the
-    % page after the empty box.  So we use a penalty of 9999.
-    %
-    % There is an extremely small chance that TeX will actually break the
-    % page at this \penalty, if there are no other feasible breakpoints in
-    % sight.  (If the user is using lots of big @group commands, which
-    % almost-but-not-quite fill up a page, TeX will have a hard time doing
-    % good page breaking, for example.)  However, I could not construct an
-    % example where a page broke at this \penalty; if it happens in a real
-    % document, then we can reconsider our strategy.
-    \penalty9999
-    %
-    % Back up by the size of the box, whether we did a page break or not.
-    \kern -#1\mil
-    %
-    % Do not allow a page break right after this kern.
-    \nobreak
-  \fi
-}
-
-% @br   forces paragraph break (and is undocumented).
-
-\let\br = \par
-
-% @page forces the start of a new page.
-%
-\def\page{\par\vfill\supereject}
-
-% @exdent text....
-% outputs text on separate line in roman font, starting at standard page margin
-
-% This records the amount of indent in the innermost environment.
-% That's how much \exdent should take out.
-\newskip\exdentamount
-
-% This defn is used inside fill environments such as @defun.
-\parseargdef\exdent{\hfil\break\hbox{\kern -\exdentamount{\rm#1}}\hfil\break}
-
-% This defn is used inside nofill environments such as @example.
-\parseargdef\nofillexdent{{\advance \leftskip by -\exdentamount
-  \leftline{\hskip\leftskip{\rm#1}}}}
-
-% @inmargin{WHICH}{TEXT} puts TEXT in the WHICH margin next to the current
-% paragraph.  For more general purposes, use the \margin insertion
-% class.  WHICH is `l' or `r'.
-%
-\newskip\inmarginspacing \inmarginspacing=1cm
-\def\strutdepth{\dp\strutbox}
-%
-\def\doinmargin#1#2{\strut\vadjust{%
-  \nobreak
-  \kern-\strutdepth
-  \vtop to \strutdepth{%
-    \baselineskip=\strutdepth
-    \vss
-    % if you have multiple lines of stuff to put here, you'll need to
-    % make the vbox yourself of the appropriate size.
-    \ifx#1l%
-      \llap{\ignorespaces #2\hskip\inmarginspacing}%
-    \else
-      \rlap{\hskip\hsize \hskip\inmarginspacing \ignorespaces #2}%
-    \fi
-    \null
-  }%
-}}
-\def\inleftmargin{\doinmargin l}
-\def\inrightmargin{\doinmargin r}
-%
-% @inmargin{TEXT [, RIGHT-TEXT]}
-% (if RIGHT-TEXT is given, use TEXT for left page, RIGHT-TEXT for right;
-% else use TEXT for both).
-%
-\def\inmargin#1{\parseinmargin #1,,\finish}
-\def\parseinmargin#1,#2,#3\finish{% not perfect, but better than nothing.
-  \setbox0 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #2}%
-  \ifdim\wd0 > 0pt
-    \def\lefttext{#1}%  have both texts
-    \def\righttext{#2}%
-  \else
-    \def\lefttext{#1}%  have only one text
-    \def\righttext{#1}%
-  \fi
-  %
-  \ifodd\pageno
-    \def\temp{\inrightmargin\righttext}% odd page -> outside is right margin
-  \else
-    \def\temp{\inleftmargin\lefttext}%
-  \fi
-  \temp
-}
-
-% @include file    insert text of that file as input.
-%
-\def\include{\parseargusing\filenamecatcodes\includezzz}
-\def\includezzz#1{%
-  \pushthisfilestack
-  \def\thisfile{#1}%
-  {%
-    \makevalueexpandable
-    \def\temp{\input #1 }%
-    \expandafter
-  }\temp
-  \popthisfilestack
-}
-\def\filenamecatcodes{%
-  \catcode`\\=\other
-  \catcode`~=\other
-  \catcode`^=\other
-  \catcode`_=\other
-  \catcode`|=\other
-  \catcode`<=\other
-  \catcode`>=\other
-  \catcode`+=\other
-  \catcode`-=\other
-}
-
-\def\pushthisfilestack{%
-  \expandafter\pushthisfilestackX\popthisfilestack\StackTerm
-}
-\def\pushthisfilestackX{%
-  \expandafter\pushthisfilestackY\thisfile\StackTerm
-}
-\def\pushthisfilestackY #1\StackTerm #2\StackTerm {%
-  \gdef\popthisfilestack{\gdef\thisfile{#1}\gdef\popthisfilestack{#2}}%
-}
-
-\def\popthisfilestack{\errthisfilestackempty}
-\def\errthisfilestackempty{\errmessage{Internal error:
-  the stack of filenames is empty.}}
-
-\def\thisfile{}
-
-% @center line
-% outputs that line, centered.
-%
-\parseargdef\center{%
-  \ifhmode
-    \let\next\centerH
-  \else
-    \let\next\centerV
-  \fi
-  \next{\hfil \ignorespaces#1\unskip \hfil}%
-}
-\def\centerH#1{%
-  {%
-    \hfil\break
-    \advance\hsize by -\leftskip
-    \advance\hsize by -\rightskip
-    \line{#1}%
-    \break
-  }%
-}
-\def\centerV#1{\line{\kern\leftskip #1\kern\rightskip}}
-
-% @sp n   outputs n lines of vertical space
-
-\parseargdef\sp{\vskip #1\baselineskip}
-
-% @comment ...line which is ignored...
-% @c is the same as @comment
-% @ignore ... @end ignore  is another way to write a comment
-
-\def\comment{\begingroup \catcode`\^^M=\other%
-\catcode`\@=\other \catcode`\{=\other \catcode`\}=\other%
-\commentxxx}
-{\catcode`\^^M=\other \gdef\commentxxx#1^^M{\endgroup}}
-
-\let\c=\comment
-
-% @paragraphindent NCHARS
-% We'll use ems for NCHARS, close enough.
-% NCHARS can also be the word `asis' or `none'.
-% We cannot feasibly implement @paragraphindent asis, though.
-%
-\def\asisword{asis} % no translation, these are keywords
-\def\noneword{none}
-%
-\parseargdef\paragraphindent{%
-  \def\temp{#1}%
-  \ifx\temp\asisword
-  \else
-    \ifx\temp\noneword
-      \defaultparindent = 0pt
-    \else
-      \defaultparindent = #1em
-    \fi
-  \fi
-  \parindent = \defaultparindent
-}
-
-% @exampleindent NCHARS
-% We'll use ems for NCHARS like @paragraphindent.
-% It seems @exampleindent asis isn't necessary, but
-% I preserve it to make it similar to @paragraphindent.
-\parseargdef\exampleindent{%
-  \def\temp{#1}%
-  \ifx\temp\asisword
-  \else
-    \ifx\temp\noneword
-      \lispnarrowing = 0pt
-    \else
-      \lispnarrowing = #1em
-    \fi
-  \fi
-}
-
-% @firstparagraphindent WORD
-% If WORD is `none', then suppress indentation of the first paragraph
-% after a section heading.  If WORD is `insert', then do indent at such
-% paragraphs.
-%
-% The paragraph indentation is suppressed or not by calling
-% \suppressfirstparagraphindent, which the sectioning commands do.
-% We switch the definition of this back and forth according to WORD.
-% By default, we suppress indentation.
-%
-\def\suppressfirstparagraphindent{\dosuppressfirstparagraphindent}
-\def\insertword{insert}
-%
-\parseargdef\firstparagraphindent{%
-  \def\temp{#1}%
-  \ifx\temp\noneword
-    \let\suppressfirstparagraphindent = \dosuppressfirstparagraphindent
-  \else\ifx\temp\insertword
-    \let\suppressfirstparagraphindent = \relax
-  \else
-    \errhelp = \EMsimple
-    \errmessage{Unknown @firstparagraphindent option `\temp'}%
-  \fi\fi
-}
-
-% Here is how we actually suppress indentation.  Redefine \everypar to
-% \kern backwards by \parindent, and then reset itself to empty.
-%
-% We also make \indent itself not actually do anything until the next
-% paragraph.
-%
-\gdef\dosuppressfirstparagraphindent{%
-  \gdef\indent{%
-    \restorefirstparagraphindent
-    \indent
-  }%
-  \gdef\noindent{%
-    \restorefirstparagraphindent
-    \noindent
-  }%
-  \global\everypar = {%
-    \kern -\parindent
-    \restorefirstparagraphindent
-  }%
-}
-
-\gdef\restorefirstparagraphindent{%
-  \global \let \indent = \ptexindent
-  \global \let \noindent = \ptexnoindent
-  \global \everypar = {}%
-}
-
-
-% @asis just yields its argument.  Used with @table, for example.
-%
-\def\asis#1{#1}
-
-% @math outputs its argument in math mode.
-%
-% One complication: _ usually means subscripts, but it could also mean
-% an actual _ character, as in @math{@var{some_variable} + 1}.  So make
-% _ active, and distinguish by seeing if the current family is \slfam,
-% which is what @var uses.
-{
-  \catcode`\_ = \active
-  \gdef\mathunderscore{%
-    \catcode`\_=\active
-    \def_{\ifnum\fam=\slfam \_\else\sb\fi}%
-  }
-}
-% Another complication: we want \\ (and @\) to output a \ character.
-% FYI, plain.tex uses \\ as a temporary control sequence (why?), but
-% this is not advertised and we don't care.  Texinfo does not
-% otherwise define @\.
-%
-% The \mathchar is class=0=ordinary, family=7=ttfam, position=5C=\.
-\def\mathbackslash{\ifnum\fam=\ttfam \mathchar"075C \else\backslash \fi}
-%
-\def\math{%
-  \tex
-  \mathunderscore
-  \let\\ = \mathbackslash
-  \mathactive
-  $\finishmath
-}
-\def\finishmath#1{#1$\endgroup}  % Close the group opened by \tex.
-
-% Some active characters (such as <) are spaced differently in math.
-% We have to reset their definitions in case the @math was an argument
-% to a command which sets the catcodes (such as @item or @section).
-%
-{
-  \catcode`^ = \active
-  \catcode`< = \active
-  \catcode`> = \active
-  \catcode`+ = \active
-  \gdef\mathactive{%
-    \let^ = \ptexhat
-    \let< = \ptexless
-    \let> = \ptexgtr
-    \let+ = \ptexplus
-  }
-}
-
-% @bullet and @minus need the same treatment as @math, just above.
-\def\bullet{$\ptexbullet$}
-\def\minus{$-$}
-
-% @dots{} outputs an ellipsis using the current font.
-% We do .5em per period so that it has the same spacing in the cm
-% typewriter fonts as three actual period characters; on the other hand,
-% in other typewriter fonts three periods are wider than 1.5em.  So do
-% whichever is larger.
-%
-\def\dots{%
-  \leavevmode
-  \setbox0=\hbox{...}% get width of three periods
-  \ifdim\wd0 > 1.5em
-    \dimen0 = \wd0
-  \else
-    \dimen0 = 1.5em
-  \fi
-  \hbox to \dimen0{%
-    \hskip 0pt plus.25fil
-    .\hskip 0pt plus1fil
-    .\hskip 0pt plus1fil
-    .\hskip 0pt plus.5fil
-  }%
-}
-
-% @enddots{} is an end-of-sentence ellipsis.
-%
-\def\enddots{%
-  \dots
-  \spacefactor=\endofsentencespacefactor
-}
-
-% @comma{} is so commas can be inserted into text without messing up
-% Texinfo's parsing.
-%
-\let\comma = ,
-
-% @refill is a no-op.
-\let\refill=\relax
-
-% If working on a large document in chapters, it is convenient to
-% be able to disable indexing, cross-referencing, and contents, for test runs.
-% This is done with @novalidate (before @setfilename).
-%
-\newif\iflinks \linkstrue % by default we want the aux files.
-\let\novalidate = \linksfalse
-
-% @setfilename is done at the beginning of every texinfo file.
-% So open here the files we need to have open while reading the input.
-% This makes it possible to make a .fmt file for texinfo.
-\def\setfilename{%
-   \fixbackslash  % Turn off hack to swallow `\input texinfo'.
-   \iflinks
-     \tryauxfile
-     % Open the new aux file.  TeX will close it automatically at exit.
-     \immediate\openout\auxfile=\jobname.aux
-   \fi % \openindices needs to do some work in any case.
-   \openindices
-   \let\setfilename=\comment % Ignore extra @setfilename cmds.
-   %
-   % If texinfo.cnf is present on the system, read it.
-   % Useful for site-wide @afourpaper, etc.
-   \openin 1 texinfo.cnf
-   \ifeof 1 \else \input texinfo.cnf \fi
-   \closein 1
-   %
-   \comment % Ignore the actual filename.
-}
-
-% Called from \setfilename.
-%
-\def\openindices{%
-  \newindex{cp}%
-  \newcodeindex{fn}%
-  \newcodeindex{vr}%
-  \newcodeindex{tp}%
-  \newcodeindex{ky}%
-  \newcodeindex{pg}%
-}
-
-% @bye.
-\outer\def\bye{\pagealignmacro\tracingstats=1\ptexend}
-
-
-\message{pdf,}
-% adobe `portable' document format
-\newcount\tempnum
-\newcount\lnkcount
-\newtoks\filename
-\newcount\filenamelength
-\newcount\pgn
-\newtoks\toksA
-\newtoks\toksB
-\newtoks\toksC
-\newtoks\toksD
-\newbox\boxA
-\newcount\countA
-\newif\ifpdf
-\newif\ifpdfmakepagedest
-
-% when pdftex is run in dvi mode, \pdfoutput is defined (so \pdfoutput=1
-% can be set).  So we test for \relax and 0 as well as \undefined,
-% borrowed from ifpdf.sty.
-\ifx\pdfoutput\undefined
-\else
-  \ifx\pdfoutput\relax
-  \else
-    \ifcase\pdfoutput
-    \else
-      \pdftrue
-    \fi
-  \fi
-\fi
-
-% PDF uses PostScript string constants for the names of xref targets,
-% for display in the outlines, and in other places.  Thus, we have to
-% double any backslashes.  Otherwise, a name like "\node" will be
-% interpreted as a newline (\n), followed by o, d, e.  Not good.
-% https://mailman.ntg.nl/pipermail/ntg-pdftex/2004-July/000654.html
-% (and related messages, the final outcome is that it is up to the TeX
-% user to double the backslashes and otherwise make the string valid, so
-% that's what we do).
-
-% double active backslashes.
-% 
-{\catcode`\@=0 \catcode`\\=\active
- @gdef@activebackslashdouble{%
-   @catcode`@\=@active
-   @let\=@doublebackslash}
-}
-
-% To handle parens, we must adopt a different approach, since parens are
-% not active characters.  hyperref.dtx (which has the same problem as
-% us) handles it with this amazing macro to replace tokens, with minor
-% changes for Texinfo.  It is included here under the GPL by permission
-% from the author, Heiko Oberdiek.
-% 
-% #1 is the tokens to replace.
-% #2 is the replacement.
-% #3 is the control sequence with the string.
-% 
-\def\HyPsdSubst#1#2#3{%
-  \def\HyPsdReplace##1#1##2\END{%
-    ##1%
-    \ifx\\##2\\%
-    \else
-      #2%
-      \HyReturnAfterFi{%
-        \HyPsdReplace##2\END
-      }%
-    \fi
-  }%
-  \xdef#3{\expandafter\HyPsdReplace#3#1\END}%
-}
-\long\def\HyReturnAfterFi#1\fi{\fi#1}
-
-% #1 is a control sequence in which to do the replacements.
-\def\backslashparens#1{%
-  \xdef#1{#1}% redefine it as its expansion; the definition is simply
-             % \lastnode when called from \setref -> \pdfmkdest.
-  \HyPsdSubst{(}{\realbackslash(}{#1}%
-  \HyPsdSubst{)}{\realbackslash)}{#1}%
-}
-
-\newhelp\nopdfimagehelp{Texinfo supports .png, .jpg, .jpeg, and .pdf images
-with PDF output, and none of those formats could be found.  (.eps cannot
-be supported due to the design of the PDF format; use regular TeX (DVI
-output) for that.)}
-
-\ifpdf
-  \input pdfcolor
-  \pdfcatalog{/PageMode /UseOutlines}
-  %
-  % #1 is image name, #2 width (might be empty/whitespace), #3 height (ditto).
-  \def\dopdfimage#1#2#3{%
-    \def\imagewidth{#2}\setbox0 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #2}%
-    \def\imageheight{#3}\setbox2 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #3}%
-    %
-    % pdftex (and the PDF format) support .png, .jpg, .pdf (among
-    % others).  Let's try in that order.
-    \let\pdfimgext=\empty
-    \begingroup
-      \openin 1 #1.png \ifeof 1
-        \openin 1 #1.jpg \ifeof 1
-          \openin 1 #1.jpeg \ifeof 1
-            \openin 1 #1.JPG \ifeof 1
-              \openin 1 #1.pdf \ifeof 1
-                \errhelp = \nopdfimagehelp
-                \errmessage{Could not find image file #1 for pdf}%
-              \else \gdef\pdfimgext{pdf}%
-              \fi
-            \else \gdef\pdfimgext{JPG}%
-            \fi
-          \else \gdef\pdfimgext{jpeg}%
-          \fi
-        \else \gdef\pdfimgext{jpg}%
-        \fi
-      \else \gdef\pdfimgext{png}%
-      \fi
-      \closein 1
-    \endgroup
-    %
-    % without \immediate, pdftex seg faults when the same image is
-    % included twice.  (Version 3.14159-pre-1.0-unofficial-20010704.)
-    \ifnum\pdftexversion < 14
-      \immediate\pdfimage
-    \else
-      \immediate\pdfximage
-    \fi
-      \ifdim \wd0 >0pt width \imagewidth \fi
-      \ifdim \wd2 >0pt height \imageheight \fi
-      \ifnum\pdftexversion<13
-         #1.\pdfimgext
-       \else
-         {#1.\pdfimgext}%
-       \fi
-    \ifnum\pdftexversion < 14 \else
-      \pdfrefximage \pdflastximage
-    \fi}
-  %
-  \def\pdfmkdest#1{{%
-    % We have to set dummies so commands such as @code, and characters
-    % such as \, aren't expanded when present in a section title.
-    \indexnofonts
-    \turnoffactive
-    \activebackslashdouble
-    \makevalueexpandable
-    \def\pdfdestname{#1}%
-    \backslashparens\pdfdestname
-    \safewhatsit{\pdfdest name{\pdfdestname} xyz}%
-  }}
-  %
-  % used to mark target names; must be expandable.
-  \def\pdfmkpgn#1{#1}
-  %
-  % by default, use a color that is dark enough to print on paper as
-  % nearly black, but still distinguishable for online viewing.
-  % (Defined in pdfcolor.tex.)
-  \let\urlcolor = \BrickRed
-  \let\linkcolor = \BrickRed
-  \def\endlink{\Black\pdfendlink}
-  %
-  % Adding outlines to PDF; macros for calculating structure of outlines
-  % come from Petr Olsak
-  \def\expnumber#1{\expandafter\ifx\csname#1\endcsname\relax 0%
-    \else \csname#1\endcsname \fi}
-  \def\advancenumber#1{\tempnum=\expnumber{#1}\relax
-    \advance\tempnum by 1
-    \expandafter\xdef\csname#1\endcsname{\the\tempnum}}
-  %
-  % #1 is the section text, which is what will be displayed in the
-  % outline by the pdf viewer.  #2 is the pdf expression for the number
-  % of subentries (or empty, for subsubsections).  #3 is the node text,
-  % which might be empty if this toc entry had no corresponding node.
-  % #4 is the page number
-  %
-  \def\dopdfoutline#1#2#3#4{%
-    % Generate a link to the node text if that exists; else, use the
-    % page number.  We could generate a destination for the section
-    % text in the case where a section has no node, but it doesn't
-    % seem worth the trouble, since most documents are normally structured.
-    \def\pdfoutlinedest{#3}%
-    \ifx\pdfoutlinedest\empty
-      \def\pdfoutlinedest{#4}%
-    \else
-      % Doubled backslashes in the name.
-      {\activebackslashdouble \xdef\pdfoutlinedest{#3}%
-       \backslashparens\pdfoutlinedest}%
-    \fi
-    %
-    % Also double the backslashes in the display string.
-    {\activebackslashdouble \xdef\pdfoutlinetext{#1}%
-     \backslashparens\pdfoutlinetext}%
-    %
-    \pdfoutline goto name{\pdfmkpgn{\pdfoutlinedest}}#2{\pdfoutlinetext}%
-  }
-  %
-  \def\pdfmakeoutlines{%
-    \begingroup
-      % Thanh's hack / proper braces in bookmarks
-      \edef\mylbrace{\iftrue \string{\else}\fi}\let\{=\mylbrace
-      \edef\myrbrace{\iffalse{\else\string}\fi}\let\}=\myrbrace
-      %
-      % Read toc silently, to get counts of subentries for \pdfoutline.
-      \def\numchapentry##1##2##3##4{%
-	\def\thischapnum{##2}%
-	\def\thissecnum{0}%
-	\def\thissubsecnum{0}%
-      }%
-      \def\numsecentry##1##2##3##4{%
-	\advancenumber{chap\thischapnum}%
-	\def\thissecnum{##2}%
-	\def\thissubsecnum{0}%
-      }%
-      \def\numsubsecentry##1##2##3##4{%
-	\advancenumber{sec\thissecnum}%
-	\def\thissubsecnum{##2}%
-      }%
-      \def\numsubsubsecentry##1##2##3##4{%
-	\advancenumber{subsec\thissubsecnum}%
-      }%
-      \def\thischapnum{0}%
-      \def\thissecnum{0}%
-      \def\thissubsecnum{0}%
-      %
-      % use \def rather than \let here because we redefine \chapentry et
-      % al. a second time, below.
-      \def\appentry{\numchapentry}%
-      \def\appsecentry{\numsecentry}%
-      \def\appsubsecentry{\numsubsecentry}%
-      \def\appsubsubsecentry{\numsubsubsecentry}%
-      \def\unnchapentry{\numchapentry}%
-      \def\unnsecentry{\numsecentry}%
-      \def\unnsubsecentry{\numsubsecentry}%
-      \def\unnsubsubsecentry{\numsubsubsecentry}%
-      \readdatafile{toc}%
-      %
-      % Read toc second time, this time actually producing the outlines.
-      % The `-' means take the \expnumber as the absolute number of
-      % subentries, which we calculated on our first read of the .toc above.
-      %
-      % We use the node names as the destinations.
-      \def\numchapentry##1##2##3##4{%
-        \dopdfoutline{##1}{count-\expnumber{chap##2}}{##3}{##4}}%
-      \def\numsecentry##1##2##3##4{%
-        \dopdfoutline{##1}{count-\expnumber{sec##2}}{##3}{##4}}%
-      \def\numsubsecentry##1##2##3##4{%
-        \dopdfoutline{##1}{count-\expnumber{subsec##2}}{##3}{##4}}%
-      \def\numsubsubsecentry##1##2##3##4{% count is always zero
-        \dopdfoutline{##1}{}{##3}{##4}}%
-      %
-      % PDF outlines are displayed using system fonts, instead of
-      % document fonts.  Therefore we cannot use special characters,
-      % since the encoding is unknown.  For example, the eogonek from
-      % Latin 2 (0xea) gets translated to a | character.  Info from
-      % Staszek Wawrykiewicz, 19 Jan 2004 04:09:24 +0100.
-      %
-      % xx to do this right, we have to translate 8-bit characters to
-      % their "best" equivalent, based on the @documentencoding.  Right
-      % now, I guess we'll just let the pdf reader have its way.
-      \indexnofonts
-      \setupdatafile
-      \catcode`\\=\active \otherbackslash
-      \input \jobname.toc
-    \endgroup
-  }
-  %
-  \def\skipspaces#1{\def\PP{#1}\def\D{|}%
-    \ifx\PP\D\let\nextsp\relax
-    \else\let\nextsp\skipspaces
-      \ifx\p\space\else\addtokens{\filename}{\PP}%
-        \advance\filenamelength by 1
-      \fi
-    \fi
-    \nextsp}
-  \def\getfilename#1{\filenamelength=0\expandafter\skipspaces#1|\relax}
-  \ifnum\pdftexversion < 14
-    \let \startlink \pdfannotlink
-  \else
-    \let \startlink \pdfstartlink
-  \fi
-  % make a live url in pdf output.
-  \def\pdfurl#1{%
-    \begingroup
-      % it seems we really need yet another set of dummies; have not
-      % tried to figure out what each command should do in the context
-      % of @url.  for now, just make @/ a no-op, that's the only one
-      % people have actually reported a problem with.
-      % 
-      \normalturnoffactive
-      \def\@{@}%
-      \let\/=\empty
-      \makevalueexpandable
-      \leavevmode\urlcolor
-      \startlink attr{/Border [0 0 0]}%
-        user{/Subtype /Link /A << /S /URI /URI (#1) >>}%
-    \endgroup}
-  \def\pdfgettoks#1.{\setbox\boxA=\hbox{\toksA={#1.}\toksB={}\maketoks}}
-  \def\addtokens#1#2{\edef\addtoks{\noexpand#1={\the#1#2}}\addtoks}
-  \def\adn#1{\addtokens{\toksC}{#1}\global\countA=1\let\next=\maketoks}
-  \def\poptoks#1#2|ENDTOKS|{\let\first=#1\toksD={#1}\toksA={#2}}
-  \def\maketoks{%
-    \expandafter\poptoks\the\toksA|ENDTOKS|\relax
-    \ifx\first0\adn0
-    \else\ifx\first1\adn1 \else\ifx\first2\adn2 \else\ifx\first3\adn3
-    \else\ifx\first4\adn4 \else\ifx\first5\adn5 \else\ifx\first6\adn6
-    \else\ifx\first7\adn7 \else\ifx\first8\adn8 \else\ifx\first9\adn9
-    \else
-      \ifnum0=\countA\else\makelink\fi
-      \ifx\first.\let\next=\done\else
-        \let\next=\maketoks
-        \addtokens{\toksB}{\the\toksD}
-        \ifx\first,\addtokens{\toksB}{\space}\fi
-      \fi
-    \fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi
-    \next}
-  \def\makelink{\addtokens{\toksB}%
-    {\noexpand\pdflink{\the\toksC}}\toksC={}\global\countA=0}
-  \def\pdflink#1{%
-    \startlink attr{/Border [0 0 0]} goto name{\pdfmkpgn{#1}}
-    \linkcolor #1\endlink}
-  \def\done{\edef\st{\global\noexpand\toksA={\the\toksB}}\st}
-\else
-  \let\pdfmkdest = \gobble
-  \let\pdfurl = \gobble
-  \let\endlink = \relax
-  \let\linkcolor = \relax
-  \let\pdfmakeoutlines = \relax
-\fi  % \ifx\pdfoutput
-
-
-\message{fonts,}
-
-% Change the current font style to #1, remembering it in \curfontstyle.
-% For now, we do not accumulate font styles: @b{@i{foo}} prints foo in
-% italics, not bold italics.
-%
-\def\setfontstyle#1{%
-  \def\curfontstyle{#1}% not as a control sequence, because we are \edef'd.
-  \csname ten#1\endcsname  % change the current font
-}
-
-% Select #1 fonts with the current style.
-%
-\def\selectfonts#1{\csname #1fonts\endcsname \csname\curfontstyle\endcsname}
-
-\def\rm{\fam=0 \setfontstyle{rm}}
-\def\it{\fam=\itfam \setfontstyle{it}}
-\def\sl{\fam=\slfam \setfontstyle{sl}}
-\def\bf{\fam=\bffam \setfontstyle{bf}}\def\bfstylename{bf}
-\def\tt{\fam=\ttfam \setfontstyle{tt}}
-
-% Texinfo sort of supports the sans serif font style, which plain TeX does not.
-% So we set up a \sf.
-\newfam\sffam
-\def\sf{\fam=\sffam \setfontstyle{sf}}
-\let\li = \sf % Sometimes we call it \li, not \sf.
-
-% We don't need math for this font style.
-\def\ttsl{\setfontstyle{ttsl}}
-
-
-% Default leading.
-\newdimen\textleading  \textleading = 13.2pt
-
-% Set the baselineskip to #1, and the lineskip and strut size
-% correspondingly.  There is no deep meaning behind these magic numbers
-% used as factors; they just match (closely enough) what Knuth defined.
-%
-\def\lineskipfactor{.08333}
-\def\strutheightpercent{.70833}
-\def\strutdepthpercent {.29167}
-%
-\def\setleading#1{%
-  \normalbaselineskip = #1\relax
-  \normallineskip = \lineskipfactor\normalbaselineskip
-  \normalbaselines
-  \setbox\strutbox =\hbox{%
-    \vrule width0pt height\strutheightpercent\baselineskip
-                    depth \strutdepthpercent \baselineskip
-  }%
-}
-
-%
-% PDF CMaps.  See also LaTeX's t1.cmap.
-%
-% \cmapOT1
-\ifpdf
-  \begingroup
-    \catcode`\^^M=\active \def^^M{^^J}% Output line endings as the ^^J char.
-    \catcode`\%=12 \immediate\pdfobj stream {%!PS-Adobe-3.0 Resource-CMap
-%%DocumentNeededResources: ProcSet (CIDInit)
-%%IncludeResource: ProcSet (CIDInit)
-%%BeginResource: CMap (TeX-OT1-0)
-%%Title: (TeX-OT1-0 TeX OT1 0)
-%%Version: 1.000
-%%EndComments
-/CIDInit /ProcSet findresource begin
-12 dict begin
-begincmap
-/CIDSystemInfo
-<< /Registry (TeX)
-/Ordering (OT1)
-/Supplement 0
->> def
-/CMapName /TeX-OT1-0 def
-/CMapType 2 def
-1 begincodespacerange
-<00> <7F>
-endcodespacerange
-8 beginbfrange
-<00> <01> <0393>
-<09> <0A> <03A8>
-<23> <26> <0023>
-<28> <3B> <0028>
-<3F> <5B> <003F>
-<5D> <5E> <005D>
-<61> <7A> <0061>
-<7B> <7C> <2013>
-endbfrange
-40 beginbfchar
-<02> <0398>
-<03> <039B>
-<04> <039E>
-<05> <03A0>
-<06> <03A3>
-<07> <03D2>
-<08> <03A6>
-<0B> <00660066>
-<0C> <00660069>
-<0D> <0066006C>
-<0E> <006600660069>
-<0F> <00660066006C>
-<10> <0131>
-<11> <0237>
-<12> <0060>
-<13> <00B4>
-<14> <02C7>
-<15> <02D8>
-<16> <00AF>
-<17> <02DA>
-<18> <00B8>
-<19> <00DF>
-<1A> <00E6>
-<1B> <0153>
-<1C> <00F8>
-<1D> <00C6>
-<1E> <0152>
-<1F> <00D8>
-<21> <0021>
-<22> <201D>
-<27> <2019>
-<3C> <00A1>
-<3D> <003D>
-<3E> <00BF>
-<5C> <201C>
-<5F> <02D9>
-<60> <2018>
-<7D> <02DD>
-<7E> <007E>
-<7F> <00A8>
-endbfchar
-endcmap
-CMapName currentdict /CMap defineresource pop
-end
-end
-%%EndResource
-%%EOF
-    }\endgroup
-  \expandafter\edef\csname cmapOT1\endcsname#1{%
-    \pdffontattr#1{/ToUnicode \the\pdflastobj\space 0 R}%
-  }%
-%
-% \cmapOT1IT
-  \begingroup
-    \catcode`\^^M=\active \def^^M{^^J}% Output line endings as the ^^J char.
-    \catcode`\%=12 \immediate\pdfobj stream {%!PS-Adobe-3.0 Resource-CMap
-%%DocumentNeededResources: ProcSet (CIDInit)
-%%IncludeResource: ProcSet (CIDInit)
-%%BeginResource: CMap (TeX-OT1IT-0)
-%%Title: (TeX-OT1IT-0 TeX OT1IT 0)
-%%Version: 1.000
-%%EndComments
-/CIDInit /ProcSet findresource begin
-12 dict begin
-begincmap
-/CIDSystemInfo
-<< /Registry (TeX)
-/Ordering (OT1IT)
-/Supplement 0
->> def
-/CMapName /TeX-OT1IT-0 def
-/CMapType 2 def
-1 begincodespacerange
-<00> <7F>
-endcodespacerange
-8 beginbfrange
-<00> <01> <0393>
-<09> <0A> <03A8>
-<25> <26> <0025>
-<28> <3B> <0028>
-<3F> <5B> <003F>
-<5D> <5E> <005D>
-<61> <7A> <0061>
-<7B> <7C> <2013>
-endbfrange
-42 beginbfchar
-<02> <0398>
-<03> <039B>
-<04> <039E>
-<05> <03A0>
-<06> <03A3>
-<07> <03D2>
-<08> <03A6>
-<0B> <00660066>
-<0C> <00660069>
-<0D> <0066006C>
-<0E> <006600660069>
-<0F> <00660066006C>
-<10> <0131>
-<11> <0237>
-<12> <0060>
-<13> <00B4>
-<14> <02C7>
-<15> <02D8>
-<16> <00AF>
-<17> <02DA>
-<18> <00B8>
-<19> <00DF>
-<1A> <00E6>
-<1B> <0153>
-<1C> <00F8>
-<1D> <00C6>
-<1E> <0152>
-<1F> <00D8>
-<21> <0021>
-<22> <201D>
-<23> <0023>
-<24> <00A3>
-<27> <2019>
-<3C> <00A1>
-<3D> <003D>
-<3E> <00BF>
-<5C> <201C>
-<5F> <02D9>
-<60> <2018>
-<7D> <02DD>
-<7E> <007E>
-<7F> <00A8>
-endbfchar
-endcmap
-CMapName currentdict /CMap defineresource pop
-end
-end
-%%EndResource
-%%EOF
-    }\endgroup
-  \expandafter\edef\csname cmapOT1IT\endcsname#1{%
-    \pdffontattr#1{/ToUnicode \the\pdflastobj\space 0 R}%
-  }%
-%
-% \cmapOT1TT
-  \begingroup
-    \catcode`\^^M=\active \def^^M{^^J}% Output line endings as the ^^J char.
-    \catcode`\%=12 \immediate\pdfobj stream {%!PS-Adobe-3.0 Resource-CMap
-%%DocumentNeededResources: ProcSet (CIDInit)
-%%IncludeResource: ProcSet (CIDInit)
-%%BeginResource: CMap (TeX-OT1TT-0)
-%%Title: (TeX-OT1TT-0 TeX OT1TT 0)
-%%Version: 1.000
-%%EndComments
-/CIDInit /ProcSet findresource begin
-12 dict begin
-begincmap
-/CIDSystemInfo
-<< /Registry (TeX)
-/Ordering (OT1TT)
-/Supplement 0
->> def
-/CMapName /TeX-OT1TT-0 def
-/CMapType 2 def
-1 begincodespacerange
-<00> <7F>
-endcodespacerange
-5 beginbfrange
-<00> <01> <0393>
-<09> <0A> <03A8>
-<21> <26> <0021>
-<28> <5F> <0028>
-<61> <7E> <0061>
-endbfrange
-32 beginbfchar
-<02> <0398>
-<03> <039B>
-<04> <039E>
-<05> <03A0>
-<06> <03A3>
-<07> <03D2>
-<08> <03A6>
-<0B> <2191>
-<0C> <2193>
-<0D> <0027>
-<0E> <00A1>
-<0F> <00BF>
-<10> <0131>
-<11> <0237>
-<12> <0060>
-<13> <00B4>
-<14> <02C7>
-<15> <02D8>
-<16> <00AF>
-<17> <02DA>
-<18> <00B8>
-<19> <00DF>
-<1A> <00E6>
-<1B> <0153>
-<1C> <00F8>
-<1D> <00C6>
-<1E> <0152>
-<1F> <00D8>
-<20> <2423>
-<27> <2019>
-<60> <2018>
-<7F> <00A8>
-endbfchar
-endcmap
-CMapName currentdict /CMap defineresource pop
-end
-end
-%%EndResource
-%%EOF
-    }\endgroup
-  \expandafter\edef\csname cmapOT1TT\endcsname#1{%
-    \pdffontattr#1{/ToUnicode \the\pdflastobj\space 0 R}%
-  }%
-\else
-  \expandafter\let\csname cmapOT1\endcsname\gobble
-  \expandafter\let\csname cmapOT1IT\endcsname\gobble
-  \expandafter\let\csname cmapOT1TT\endcsname\gobble
-\fi
-
-
-% Set the font macro #1 to the font named #2, adding on the
-% specified font prefix (normally `cm').
-% #3 is the font's design size, #4 is a scale factor, #5 is the CMap
-% encoding (currently only OT1, OT1IT and OT1TT are allowed, pass
-% empty to omit).
-\def\setfont#1#2#3#4#5{%
-  \font#1=\fontprefix#2#3 scaled #4
-  \csname cmap#5\endcsname#1%
-}
-% This is what gets called when #5 of \setfont is empty.
-\let\cmap\gobble
-
-
-% Use cm as the default font prefix.
-% To specify the font prefix, you must define \fontprefix
-% before you read in texinfo.tex.
-\ifx\fontprefix\undefined
-\def\fontprefix{cm}
-\fi
-% Support font families that don't use the same naming scheme as CM.
-\def\rmshape{r}
-\def\rmbshape{bx}               %where the normal face is bold
-\def\bfshape{b}
-\def\bxshape{bx}
-\def\ttshape{tt}
-\def\ttbshape{tt}
-\def\ttslshape{sltt}
-\def\itshape{ti}
-\def\itbshape{bxti}
-\def\slshape{sl}
-\def\slbshape{bxsl}
-\def\sfshape{ss}
-\def\sfbshape{ss}
-\def\scshape{csc}
-\def\scbshape{csc}
-
-% Definitions for a main text size of 11pt.  This is the default in
-% Texinfo.
-% 
-\def\definetextfontsizexi{%
-% Text fonts (11.2pt, magstep1).
-\def\textnominalsize{11pt}
-\edef\mainmagstep{\magstephalf}
-\setfont\textrm\rmshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1}
-\setfont\texttt\ttshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1TT}
-\setfont\textbf\bfshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1}
-\setfont\textit\itshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1IT}
-\setfont\textsl\slshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1}
-\setfont\textsf\sfshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1}
-\setfont\textsc\scshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1}
-\setfont\textttsl\ttslshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1TT}
-\font\texti=cmmi10 scaled \mainmagstep
-\font\textsy=cmsy10 scaled \mainmagstep
-
-% A few fonts for @defun names and args.
-\setfont\defbf\bfshape{10}{\magstep1}{OT1}
-\setfont\deftt\ttshape{10}{\magstep1}{OT1TT}
-\setfont\defttsl\ttslshape{10}{\magstep1}{OT1TT}
-\def\df{\let\tentt=\deftt \let\tenbf = \defbf \let\tenttsl=\defttsl \bf}
-
-% Fonts for indices, footnotes, small examples (9pt).
-\def\smallnominalsize{9pt}
-\setfont\smallrm\rmshape{9}{1000}{OT1}
-\setfont\smalltt\ttshape{9}{1000}{OT1TT}
-\setfont\smallbf\bfshape{10}{900}{OT1}
-\setfont\smallit\itshape{9}{1000}{OT1IT}
-\setfont\smallsl\slshape{9}{1000}{OT1}
-\setfont\smallsf\sfshape{9}{1000}{OT1}
-\setfont\smallsc\scshape{10}{900}{OT1}
-\setfont\smallttsl\ttslshape{10}{900}{OT1TT}
-\font\smalli=cmmi9
-\font\smallsy=cmsy9
-
-% Fonts for small examples (8pt).
-\def\smallernominalsize{8pt}
-\setfont\smallerrm\rmshape{8}{1000}{OT1}
-\setfont\smallertt\ttshape{8}{1000}{OT1TT}
-\setfont\smallerbf\bfshape{10}{800}{OT1}
-\setfont\smallerit\itshape{8}{1000}{OT1IT}
-\setfont\smallersl\slshape{8}{1000}{OT1}
-\setfont\smallersf\sfshape{8}{1000}{OT1}
-\setfont\smallersc\scshape{10}{800}{OT1}
-\setfont\smallerttsl\ttslshape{10}{800}{OT1TT}
-\font\smalleri=cmmi8
-\font\smallersy=cmsy8
-
-% Fonts for title page (20.4pt):
-\def\titlenominalsize{20pt}
-\setfont\titlerm\rmbshape{12}{\magstep3}{OT1}
-\setfont\titleit\itbshape{10}{\magstep4}{OT1IT}
-\setfont\titlesl\slbshape{10}{\magstep4}{OT1}
-\setfont\titlett\ttbshape{12}{\magstep3}{OT1TT}
-\setfont\titlettsl\ttslshape{10}{\magstep4}{OT1TT}
-\setfont\titlesf\sfbshape{17}{\magstep1}{OT1}
-\let\titlebf=\titlerm
-\setfont\titlesc\scbshape{10}{\magstep4}{OT1}
-\font\titlei=cmmi12 scaled \magstep3
-\font\titlesy=cmsy10 scaled \magstep4
-\def\authorrm{\secrm}
-\def\authortt{\sectt}
-
-% Chapter (and unnumbered) fonts (17.28pt).
-\def\chapnominalsize{17pt}
-\setfont\chaprm\rmbshape{12}{\magstep2}{OT1}
-\setfont\chapit\itbshape{10}{\magstep3}{OT1IT}
-\setfont\chapsl\slbshape{10}{\magstep3}{OT1}
-\setfont\chaptt\ttbshape{12}{\magstep2}{OT1TT}
-\setfont\chapttsl\ttslshape{10}{\magstep3}{OT1TT}
-\setfont\chapsf\sfbshape{17}{1000}{OT1}
-\let\chapbf=\chaprm
-\setfont\chapsc\scbshape{10}{\magstep3}{OT1}
-\font\chapi=cmmi12 scaled \magstep2
-\font\chapsy=cmsy10 scaled \magstep3
-
-% Section fonts (14.4pt).
-\def\secnominalsize{14pt}
-\setfont\secrm\rmbshape{12}{\magstep1}{OT1}
-\setfont\secit\itbshape{10}{\magstep2}{OT1IT}
-\setfont\secsl\slbshape{10}{\magstep2}{OT1}
-\setfont\sectt\ttbshape{12}{\magstep1}{OT1TT}
-\setfont\secttsl\ttslshape{10}{\magstep2}{OT1TT}
-\setfont\secsf\sfbshape{12}{\magstep1}{OT1}
-\let\secbf\secrm
-\setfont\secsc\scbshape{10}{\magstep2}{OT1}
-\font\seci=cmmi12 scaled \magstep1
-\font\secsy=cmsy10 scaled \magstep2
-
-% Subsection fonts (13.15pt).
-\def\ssecnominalsize{13pt}
-\setfont\ssecrm\rmbshape{12}{\magstephalf}{OT1}
-\setfont\ssecit\itbshape{10}{1315}{OT1IT}
-\setfont\ssecsl\slbshape{10}{1315}{OT1}
-\setfont\ssectt\ttbshape{12}{\magstephalf}{OT1TT}
-\setfont\ssecttsl\ttslshape{10}{1315}{OT1TT}
-\setfont\ssecsf\sfbshape{12}{\magstephalf}{OT1}
-\let\ssecbf\ssecrm
-\setfont\ssecsc\scbshape{10}{1315}{OT1}
-\font\sseci=cmmi12 scaled \magstephalf
-\font\ssecsy=cmsy10 scaled 1315
-
-% Reduced fonts for @acro in text (10pt).
-\def\reducednominalsize{10pt}
-\setfont\reducedrm\rmshape{10}{1000}{OT1}
-\setfont\reducedtt\ttshape{10}{1000}{OT1TT}
-\setfont\reducedbf\bfshape{10}{1000}{OT1}
-\setfont\reducedit\itshape{10}{1000}{OT1IT}
-\setfont\reducedsl\slshape{10}{1000}{OT1}
-\setfont\reducedsf\sfshape{10}{1000}{OT1}
-\setfont\reducedsc\scshape{10}{1000}{OT1}
-\setfont\reducedttsl\ttslshape{10}{1000}{OT1TT}
-\font\reducedi=cmmi10
-\font\reducedsy=cmsy10
-
-% reset the current fonts
-\textfonts
-\rm
-} % end of 11pt text font size definitions
-
-
-% Definitions to make the main text be 10pt Computer Modern, with
-% section, chapter, etc., sizes following suit.  This is for the GNU
-% Press printing of the Emacs 22 manual.  Maybe other manuals in the
-% future.  Used with @smallbook, which sets the leading to 12pt.
-% 
-\def\definetextfontsizex{%
-% Text fonts (10pt).
-\def\textnominalsize{10pt}
-\edef\mainmagstep{1000}
-\setfont\textrm\rmshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1}
-\setfont\texttt\ttshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1TT}
-\setfont\textbf\bfshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1}
-\setfont\textit\itshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1IT}
-\setfont\textsl\slshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1}
-\setfont\textsf\sfshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1}
-\setfont\textsc\scshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1}
-\setfont\textttsl\ttslshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1TT}
-\font\texti=cmmi10 scaled \mainmagstep
-\font\textsy=cmsy10 scaled \mainmagstep
-
-% A few fonts for @defun names and args.
-\setfont\defbf\bfshape{10}{\magstephalf}{OT1}
-\setfont\deftt\ttshape{10}{\magstephalf}{OT1TT}
-\setfont\defttsl\ttslshape{10}{\magstephalf}{OT1TT}
-\def\df{\let\tentt=\deftt \let\tenbf = \defbf \let\tenttsl=\defttsl \bf}
-
-% Fonts for indices, footnotes, small examples (9pt).
-\def\smallnominalsize{9pt}
-\setfont\smallrm\rmshape{9}{1000}{OT1}
-\setfont\smalltt\ttshape{9}{1000}{OT1TT}
-\setfont\smallbf\bfshape{10}{900}{OT1}
-\setfont\smallit\itshape{9}{1000}{OT1IT}
-\setfont\smallsl\slshape{9}{1000}{OT1}
-\setfont\smallsf\sfshape{9}{1000}{OT1}
-\setfont\smallsc\scshape{10}{900}{OT1}
-\setfont\smallttsl\ttslshape{10}{900}{OT1TT}
-\font\smalli=cmmi9
-\font\smallsy=cmsy9
-
-% Fonts for small examples (8pt).
-\def\smallernominalsize{8pt}
-\setfont\smallerrm\rmshape{8}{1000}{OT1}
-\setfont\smallertt\ttshape{8}{1000}{OT1TT}
-\setfont\smallerbf\bfshape{10}{800}{OT1}
-\setfont\smallerit\itshape{8}{1000}{OT1IT}
-\setfont\smallersl\slshape{8}{1000}{OT1}
-\setfont\smallersf\sfshape{8}{1000}{OT1}
-\setfont\smallersc\scshape{10}{800}{OT1}
-\setfont\smallerttsl\ttslshape{10}{800}{OT1TT}
-\font\smalleri=cmmi8
-\font\smallersy=cmsy8
-
-% Fonts for title page (20.4pt):
-\def\titlenominalsize{20pt}
-\setfont\titlerm\rmbshape{12}{\magstep3}{OT1}
-\setfont\titleit\itbshape{10}{\magstep4}{OT1IT}
-\setfont\titlesl\slbshape{10}{\magstep4}{OT1}
-\setfont\titlett\ttbshape{12}{\magstep3}{OT1TT}
-\setfont\titlettsl\ttslshape{10}{\magstep4}{OT1TT}
-\setfont\titlesf\sfbshape{17}{\magstep1}{OT1}
-\let\titlebf=\titlerm
-\setfont\titlesc\scbshape{10}{\magstep4}{OT1}
-\font\titlei=cmmi12 scaled \magstep3
-\font\titlesy=cmsy10 scaled \magstep4
-\def\authorrm{\secrm}
-\def\authortt{\sectt}
-
-% Chapter fonts (14.4pt).
-\def\chapnominalsize{14pt}
-\setfont\chaprm\rmbshape{12}{\magstep1}{OT1}
-\setfont\chapit\itbshape{10}{\magstep2}{OT1IT}
-\setfont\chapsl\slbshape{10}{\magstep2}{OT1}
-\setfont\chaptt\ttbshape{12}{\magstep1}{OT1TT}
-\setfont\chapttsl\ttslshape{10}{\magstep2}{OT1TT}
-\setfont\chapsf\sfbshape{12}{\magstep1}{OT1}
-\let\chapbf\chaprm
-\setfont\chapsc\scbshape{10}{\magstep2}{OT1}
-\font\chapi=cmmi12 scaled \magstep1
-\font\chapsy=cmsy10 scaled \magstep2
-
-% Section fonts (12pt).
-\def\secnominalsize{12pt}
-\setfont\secrm\rmbshape{12}{1000}{OT1}
-\setfont\secit\itbshape{10}{\magstep1}{OT1IT}
-\setfont\secsl\slbshape{10}{\magstep1}{OT1}
-\setfont\sectt\ttbshape{12}{1000}{OT1TT}
-\setfont\secttsl\ttslshape{10}{\magstep1}{OT1TT}
-\setfont\secsf\sfbshape{12}{1000}{OT1}
-\let\secbf\secrm
-\setfont\secsc\scbshape{10}{\magstep1}{OT1}
-\font\seci=cmmi12 
-\font\secsy=cmsy10 scaled \magstep1
-
-% Subsection fonts (10pt).
-\def\ssecnominalsize{10pt}
-\setfont\ssecrm\rmbshape{10}{1000}{OT1}
-\setfont\ssecit\itbshape{10}{1000}{OT1IT}
-\setfont\ssecsl\slbshape{10}{1000}{OT1}
-\setfont\ssectt\ttbshape{10}{1000}{OT1TT}
-\setfont\ssecttsl\ttslshape{10}{1000}{OT1TT}
-\setfont\ssecsf\sfbshape{10}{1000}{OT1}
-\let\ssecbf\ssecrm
-\setfont\ssecsc\scbshape{10}{1000}{OT1}
-\font\sseci=cmmi10
-\font\ssecsy=cmsy10
-
-% Reduced fonts for @acro in text (9pt).
-\def\reducednominalsize{9pt}
-\setfont\reducedrm\rmshape{9}{1000}{OT1}
-\setfont\reducedtt\ttshape{9}{1000}{OT1TT}
-\setfont\reducedbf\bfshape{10}{900}{OT1}
-\setfont\reducedit\itshape{9}{1000}{OT1IT}
-\setfont\reducedsl\slshape{9}{1000}{OT1}
-\setfont\reducedsf\sfshape{9}{1000}{OT1}
-\setfont\reducedsc\scshape{10}{900}{OT1}
-\setfont\reducedttsl\ttslshape{10}{900}{OT1TT}
-\font\reducedi=cmmi9
-\font\reducedsy=cmsy9
-
-% reduce space between paragraphs
-\divide\parskip by 2
-
-% reset the current fonts
-\textfonts
-\rm
-} % end of 10pt text font size definitions
-
-
-% We provide the user-level command
-%   @fonttextsize 10
-% (or 11) to redefine the text font size.  pt is assumed.
-% 
-\def\xword{10}
-\def\xiword{11}
-%
-\parseargdef\fonttextsize{%
-  \def\textsizearg{#1}%
-  \wlog{doing @fonttextsize \textsizearg}%
-  %
-  % Set \globaldefs so that documents can use this inside @tex, since
-  % makeinfo 4.8 does not support it, but we need it nonetheless.
-  % 
- \begingroup \globaldefs=1
-  \ifx\textsizearg\xword \definetextfontsizex
-  \else \ifx\textsizearg\xiword \definetextfontsizexi
-  \else
-    \errhelp=\EMsimple
-    \errmessage{@fonttextsize only supports `10' or `11', not `\textsizearg'}
-  \fi\fi
- \endgroup
-}
-
-
-% In order for the font changes to affect most math symbols and letters,
-% we have to define the \textfont of the standard families.  Since
-% texinfo doesn't allow for producing subscripts and superscripts except
-% in the main text, we don't bother to reset \scriptfont and
-% \scriptscriptfont (which would also require loading a lot more fonts).
-%
-\def\resetmathfonts{%
-  \textfont0=\tenrm \textfont1=\teni \textfont2=\tensy
-  \textfont\itfam=\tenit \textfont\slfam=\tensl \textfont\bffam=\tenbf
-  \textfont\ttfam=\tentt \textfont\sffam=\tensf
-}
-
-% The font-changing commands redefine the meanings of \tenSTYLE, instead
-% of just \STYLE.  We do this because \STYLE needs to also set the
-% current \fam for math mode.  Our \STYLE (e.g., \rm) commands hardwire
-% \tenSTYLE to set the current font.
-%
-% Each font-changing command also sets the names \lsize (one size lower)
-% and \lllsize (three sizes lower).  These relative commands are used in
-% the LaTeX logo and acronyms.
-%
-% This all needs generalizing, badly.
-%
-\def\textfonts{%
-  \let\tenrm=\textrm \let\tenit=\textit \let\tensl=\textsl
-  \let\tenbf=\textbf \let\tentt=\texttt \let\smallcaps=\textsc
-  \let\tensf=\textsf \let\teni=\texti \let\tensy=\textsy
-  \let\tenttsl=\textttsl
-  \def\curfontsize{text}%
-  \def\lsize{reduced}\def\lllsize{smaller}%
-  \resetmathfonts \setleading{\textleading}}
-\def\titlefonts{%
-  \let\tenrm=\titlerm \let\tenit=\titleit \let\tensl=\titlesl
-  \let\tenbf=\titlebf \let\tentt=\titlett \let\smallcaps=\titlesc
-  \let\tensf=\titlesf \let\teni=\titlei \let\tensy=\titlesy
-  \let\tenttsl=\titlettsl
-  \def\curfontsize{title}%
-  \def\lsize{chap}\def\lllsize{subsec}%
-  \resetmathfonts \setleading{25pt}}
-\def\titlefont#1{{\titlefonts\rm #1}}
-\def\chapfonts{%
-  \let\tenrm=\chaprm \let\tenit=\chapit \let\tensl=\chapsl
-  \let\tenbf=\chapbf \let\tentt=\chaptt \let\smallcaps=\chapsc
-  \let\tensf=\chapsf \let\teni=\chapi \let\tensy=\chapsy
-  \let\tenttsl=\chapttsl
-  \def\curfontsize{chap}%
-  \def\lsize{sec}\def\lllsize{text}%
-  \resetmathfonts \setleading{19pt}}
-\def\secfonts{%
-  \let\tenrm=\secrm \let\tenit=\secit \let\tensl=\secsl
-  \let\tenbf=\secbf \let\tentt=\sectt \let\smallcaps=\secsc
-  \let\tensf=\secsf \let\teni=\seci \let\tensy=\secsy
-  \let\tenttsl=\secttsl
-  \def\curfontsize{sec}%
-  \def\lsize{subsec}\def\lllsize{reduced}%
-  \resetmathfonts \setleading{16pt}}
-\def\subsecfonts{%
-  \let\tenrm=\ssecrm \let\tenit=\ssecit \let\tensl=\ssecsl
-  \let\tenbf=\ssecbf \let\tentt=\ssectt \let\smallcaps=\ssecsc
-  \let\tensf=\ssecsf \let\teni=\sseci \let\tensy=\ssecsy
-  \let\tenttsl=\ssecttsl
-  \def\curfontsize{ssec}%
-  \def\lsize{text}\def\lllsize{small}%
-  \resetmathfonts \setleading{15pt}}
-\let\subsubsecfonts = \subsecfonts
-\def\reducedfonts{%
-  \let\tenrm=\reducedrm \let\tenit=\reducedit \let\tensl=\reducedsl
-  \let\tenbf=\reducedbf \let\tentt=\reducedtt \let\reducedcaps=\reducedsc
-  \let\tensf=\reducedsf \let\teni=\reducedi \let\tensy=\reducedsy
-  \let\tenttsl=\reducedttsl
-  \def\curfontsize{reduced}%
-  \def\lsize{small}\def\lllsize{smaller}%
-  \resetmathfonts \setleading{10.5pt}}
-\def\smallfonts{%
-  \let\tenrm=\smallrm \let\tenit=\smallit \let\tensl=\smallsl
-  \let\tenbf=\smallbf \let\tentt=\smalltt \let\smallcaps=\smallsc
-  \let\tensf=\smallsf \let\teni=\smalli \let\tensy=\smallsy
-  \let\tenttsl=\smallttsl
-  \def\curfontsize{small}%
-  \def\lsize{smaller}\def\lllsize{smaller}%
-  \resetmathfonts \setleading{10.5pt}}
-\def\smallerfonts{%
-  \let\tenrm=\smallerrm \let\tenit=\smallerit \let\tensl=\smallersl
-  \let\tenbf=\smallerbf \let\tentt=\smallertt \let\smallcaps=\smallersc
-  \let\tensf=\smallersf \let\teni=\smalleri \let\tensy=\smallersy
-  \let\tenttsl=\smallerttsl
-  \def\curfontsize{smaller}%
-  \def\lsize{smaller}\def\lllsize{smaller}%
-  \resetmathfonts \setleading{9.5pt}}
-
-% Set the fonts to use with the @small... environments.
-\let\smallexamplefonts = \smallfonts
-
-% About \smallexamplefonts.  If we use \smallfonts (9pt), @smallexample
-% can fit this many characters:
-%   8.5x11=86   smallbook=72  a4=90  a5=69
-% If we use \scriptfonts (8pt), then we can fit this many characters:
-%   8.5x11=90+  smallbook=80  a4=90+  a5=77
-% For me, subjectively, the few extra characters that fit aren't worth
-% the additional smallness of 8pt.  So I'm making the default 9pt.
-%
-% By the way, for comparison, here's what fits with @example (10pt):
-%   8.5x11=71  smallbook=60  a4=75  a5=58
-%
-% I wish the USA used A4 paper.
-% --karl, 24jan03.
-
-
-% Set up the default fonts, so we can use them for creating boxes.
-%
-\definetextfontsizexi
-
-% Define these so they can be easily changed for other fonts.
-\def\angleleft{$\langle$}
-\def\angleright{$\rangle$}
-
-% Count depth in font-changes, for error checks
-\newcount\fontdepth \fontdepth=0
-
-% Fonts for short table of contents.
-\setfont\shortcontrm\rmshape{12}{1000}{OT1}
-\setfont\shortcontbf\bfshape{10}{\magstep1}{OT1}  % no cmb12
-\setfont\shortcontsl\slshape{12}{1000}{OT1}
-\setfont\shortconttt\ttshape{12}{1000}{OT1TT}
-
-%% Add scribe-like font environments, plus @l for inline lisp (usually sans
-%% serif) and @ii for TeX italic
-
-% \smartitalic{ARG} outputs arg in italics, followed by an italic correction
-% unless the following character is such as not to need one.
-\def\smartitalicx{\ifx\next,\else\ifx\next-\else\ifx\next.\else
-                    \ptexslash\fi\fi\fi}
-\def\smartslanted#1{{\ifusingtt\ttsl\sl #1}\futurelet\next\smartitalicx}
-\def\smartitalic#1{{\ifusingtt\ttsl\it #1}\futurelet\next\smartitalicx}
-
-% like \smartslanted except unconditionally uses \ttsl.
-% @var is set to this for defun arguments.
-\def\ttslanted#1{{\ttsl #1}\futurelet\next\smartitalicx}
-
-% like \smartslanted except unconditionally use \sl.  We never want
-% ttsl for book titles, do we?
-\def\cite#1{{\sl #1}\futurelet\next\smartitalicx}
-
-\let\i=\smartitalic
-\let\slanted=\smartslanted
-\let\var=\smartslanted
-\let\dfn=\smartslanted
-\let\emph=\smartitalic
-
-% @b, explicit bold.
-\def\b#1{{\bf #1}}
-\let\strong=\b
-
-% @sansserif, explicit sans.
-\def\sansserif#1{{\sf #1}}
-
-% We can't just use \exhyphenpenalty, because that only has effect at
-% the end of a paragraph.  Restore normal hyphenation at the end of the
-% group within which \nohyphenation is presumably called.
-%
-\def\nohyphenation{\hyphenchar\font = -1  \aftergroup\restorehyphenation}
-\def\restorehyphenation{\hyphenchar\font = `- }
-
-% Set sfcode to normal for the chars that usually have another value.
-% Can't use plain's \frenchspacing because it uses the `\x notation, and
-% sometimes \x has an active definition that messes things up.
-%
-\catcode`@=11
-  \def\plainfrenchspacing{%
-    \sfcode\dotChar  =\@m \sfcode\questChar=\@m \sfcode\exclamChar=\@m
-    \sfcode\colonChar=\@m \sfcode\semiChar =\@m \sfcode\commaChar =\@m
-    \def\endofsentencespacefactor{1000}% for @. and friends
-  }
-  \def\plainnonfrenchspacing{%
-    \sfcode`\.3000\sfcode`\?3000\sfcode`\!3000
-    \sfcode`\:2000\sfcode`\;1500\sfcode`\,1250
-    \def\endofsentencespacefactor{3000}% for @. and friends
-  }
-\catcode`@=\other
-\def\endofsentencespacefactor{3000}% default
-
-\def\t#1{%
-  {\tt \rawbackslash \plainfrenchspacing #1}%
-  \null
-}
-\def\samp#1{`\tclose{#1}'\null}
-\setfont\keyrm\rmshape{8}{1000}{OT1}
-\font\keysy=cmsy9
-\def\key#1{{\keyrm\textfont2=\keysy \leavevmode\hbox{%
-  \raise0.4pt\hbox{\angleleft}\kern-.08em\vtop{%
-    \vbox{\hrule\kern-0.4pt
-     \hbox{\raise0.4pt\hbox{\vphantom{\angleleft}}#1}}%
-    \kern-0.4pt\hrule}%
-  \kern-.06em\raise0.4pt\hbox{\angleright}}}}
-\def\key #1{{\nohyphenation \uppercase{#1}}\null}
-% The old definition, with no lozenge:
-%\def\key #1{{\ttsl \nohyphenation \uppercase{#1}}\null}
-\def\ctrl #1{{\tt \rawbackslash \hat}#1}
-
-% @file, @option are the same as @samp.
-\let\file=\samp
-\let\option=\samp
-
-% @code is a modification of @t,
-% which makes spaces the same size as normal in the surrounding text.
-\def\tclose#1{%
-  {%
-    % Change normal interword space to be same as for the current font.
-    \spaceskip = \fontdimen2\font
-    %
-    % Switch to typewriter.
-    \tt
-    %
-    % But `\ ' produces the large typewriter interword space.
-    \def\ {{\spaceskip = 0pt{} }}%
-    %
-    % Turn off hyphenation.
-    \nohyphenation
-    %
-    \rawbackslash
-    \plainfrenchspacing
-    #1%
-  }%
-  \null
-}
-
-% We *must* turn on hyphenation at `-' and `_' in @code.
-% Otherwise, it is too hard to avoid overfull hboxes
-% in the Emacs manual, the Library manual, etc.
-
-% Unfortunately, TeX uses one parameter (\hyphenchar) to control
-% both hyphenation at - and hyphenation within words.
-% We must therefore turn them both off (\tclose does that)
-% and arrange explicitly to hyphenate at a dash.
-%  -- rms.
-{
-  \catcode`\-=\active \catcode`\_=\active
-  \catcode`\'=\active \catcode`\`=\active
-  %
-  \global\def\code{\begingroup
-    \catcode\rquoteChar=\active \catcode\lquoteChar=\active
-    \let'\codequoteright \let`\codequoteleft
-    %
-    \catcode\dashChar=\active  \catcode\underChar=\active
-    \ifallowcodebreaks
-     \let-\codedash
-     \let_\codeunder
-    \else
-     \let-\realdash
-     \let_\realunder
-    \fi
-    \codex
-  }
-}
-
-\def\realdash{-}
-\def\codedash{-\discretionary{}{}{}}
-\def\codeunder{%
-  % this is all so @math{@code{var_name}+1} can work.  In math mode, _
-  % is "active" (mathcode"8000) and \normalunderscore (or \char95, etc.)
-  % will therefore expand the active definition of _, which is us
-  % (inside @code that is), therefore an endless loop.
-  \ifusingtt{\ifmmode
-               \mathchar"075F % class 0=ordinary, family 7=ttfam, pos 0x5F=_.
-             \else\normalunderscore \fi
-             \discretionary{}{}{}}%
-            {\_}%
-}
-\def\codex #1{\tclose{#1}\endgroup}
-
-% An additional complication: the above will allow breaks after, e.g.,
-% each of the four underscores in __typeof__.  This is undesirable in
-% some manuals, especially if they don't have long identifiers in
-% general.  @allowcodebreaks provides a way to control this.
-% 
-\newif\ifallowcodebreaks  \allowcodebreakstrue
-
-\def\keywordtrue{true}
-\def\keywordfalse{false}
-
-\parseargdef\allowcodebreaks{%
-  \def\txiarg{#1}%
-  \ifx\txiarg\keywordtrue
-    \allowcodebreakstrue
-  \else\ifx\txiarg\keywordfalse
-    \allowcodebreaksfalse
-  \else
-    \errhelp = \EMsimple
-    \errmessage{Unknown @allowcodebreaks option `\txiarg'}%
-  \fi\fi
-}
-
-% @kbd is like @code, except that if the argument is just one @key command,
-% then @kbd has no effect.
-
-% @kbdinputstyle -- arg is `distinct' (@kbd uses slanted tty font always),
-%   `example' (@kbd uses ttsl only inside of @example and friends),
-%   or `code' (@kbd uses normal tty font always).
-\parseargdef\kbdinputstyle{%
-  \def\txiarg{#1}%
-  \ifx\txiarg\worddistinct
-    \gdef\kbdexamplefont{\ttsl}\gdef\kbdfont{\ttsl}%
-  \else\ifx\txiarg\wordexample
-    \gdef\kbdexamplefont{\ttsl}\gdef\kbdfont{\tt}%
-  \else\ifx\txiarg\wordcode
-    \gdef\kbdexamplefont{\tt}\gdef\kbdfont{\tt}%
-  \else
-    \errhelp = \EMsimple
-    \errmessage{Unknown @kbdinputstyle option `\txiarg'}%
-  \fi\fi\fi
-}
-\def\worddistinct{distinct}
-\def\wordexample{example}
-\def\wordcode{code}
-
-% Default is `distinct.'
-\kbdinputstyle distinct
-
-\def\xkey{\key}
-\def\kbdfoo#1#2#3\par{\def\one{#1}\def\three{#3}\def\threex{??}%
-\ifx\one\xkey\ifx\threex\three \key{#2}%
-\else{\tclose{\kbdfont\look}}\fi
-\else{\tclose{\kbdfont\look}}\fi}
-
-% For @indicateurl, @env, @command quotes seem unnecessary, so use \code.
-\let\indicateurl=\code
-\let\env=\code
-\let\command=\code
-
-% @uref (abbreviation for `urlref') takes an optional (comma-separated)
-% second argument specifying the text to display and an optional third
-% arg as text to display instead of (rather than in addition to) the url
-% itself.  First (mandatory) arg is the url.  Perhaps eventually put in
-% a hypertex \special here.
-%
-\def\uref#1{\douref #1,,,\finish}
-\def\douref#1,#2,#3,#4\finish{\begingroup
-  \unsepspaces
-  \pdfurl{#1}%
-  \setbox0 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #3}%
-  \ifdim\wd0 > 0pt
-    \unhbox0 % third arg given, show only that
-  \else
-    \setbox0 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #2}%
-    \ifdim\wd0 > 0pt
-      \ifpdf
-        \unhbox0             % PDF: 2nd arg given, show only it
-      \else
-        \unhbox0\ (\code{#1})% DVI: 2nd arg given, show both it and url
-      \fi
-    \else
-      \code{#1}% only url given, so show it
-    \fi
-  \fi
-  \endlink
-\endgroup}
-
-% @url synonym for @uref, since that's how everyone uses it.
-%
-\let\url=\uref
-
-% rms does not like angle brackets --karl, 17may97.
-% So now @email is just like @uref, unless we are pdf.
-%
-%\def\email#1{\angleleft{\tt #1}\angleright}
-\ifpdf
-  \def\email#1{\doemail#1,,\finish}
-  \def\doemail#1,#2,#3\finish{\begingroup
-    \unsepspaces
-    \pdfurl{mailto:#1}%
-    \setbox0 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #2}%
-    \ifdim\wd0>0pt\unhbox0\else\code{#1}\fi
-    \endlink
-  \endgroup}
-\else
-  \let\email=\uref
-\fi
-
-% Check if we are currently using a typewriter font.  Since all the
-% Computer Modern typewriter fonts have zero interword stretch (and
-% shrink), and it is reasonable to expect all typewriter fonts to have
-% this property, we can check that font parameter.
-%
-\def\ifmonospace{\ifdim\fontdimen3\font=0pt }
-
-% Typeset a dimension, e.g., `in' or `pt'.  The only reason for the
-% argument is to make the input look right: @dmn{pt} instead of @dmn{}pt.
-%
-\def\dmn#1{\thinspace #1}
-
-\def\kbd#1{\def\look{#1}\expandafter\kbdfoo\look??\par}
-
-% @l was never documented to mean ``switch to the Lisp font'',
-% and it is not used as such in any manual I can find.  We need it for
-% Polish suppressed-l.  --karl, 22sep96.
-%\def\l#1{{\li #1}\null}
-
-% Explicit font changes: @r, @sc, undocumented @ii.
-\def\r#1{{\rm #1}}              % roman font
-\def\sc#1{{\smallcaps#1}}       % smallcaps font
-\def\ii#1{{\it #1}}             % italic font
-
-% @acronym for "FBI", "NATO", and the like.
-% We print this one point size smaller, since it's intended for
-% all-uppercase.
-% 
-\def\acronym#1{\doacronym #1,,\finish}
-\def\doacronym#1,#2,#3\finish{%
-  {\selectfonts\lsize #1}%
-  \def\temp{#2}%
-  \ifx\temp\empty \else
-    \space ({\unsepspaces \ignorespaces \temp \unskip})%
-  \fi
-}
-
-% @abbr for "Comput. J." and the like.
-% No font change, but don't do end-of-sentence spacing.
-% 
-\def\abbr#1{\doabbr #1,,\finish}
-\def\doabbr#1,#2,#3\finish{%
-  {\plainfrenchspacing #1}%
-  \def\temp{#2}%
-  \ifx\temp\empty \else
-    \space ({\unsepspaces \ignorespaces \temp \unskip})%
-  \fi
-}
-
-% @pounds{} is a sterling sign, which Knuth put in the CM italic font.
-%
-\def\pounds{{\it\$}}
-
-% @euro{} comes from a separate font, depending on the current style.
-% We use the free feym* fonts from the eurosym package by Henrik
-% Theiling, which support regular, slanted, bold and bold slanted (and
-% "outlined" (blackboard board, sort of) versions, which we don't need).
-% It is available from https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/fonts/eurosym.
-% 
-% Although only regular is the truly official Euro symbol, we ignore
-% that.  The Euro is designed to be slightly taller than the regular
-% font height.
-% 
-% feymr - regular
-% feymo - slanted
-% feybr - bold
-% feybo - bold slanted
-% 
-% There is no good (free) typewriter version, to my knowledge.
-% A feymr10 euro is ~7.3pt wide, while a normal cmtt10 char is ~5.25pt wide.
-% Hmm.
-% 
-% Also doesn't work in math.  Do we need to do math with euro symbols?
-% Hope not.
-% 
-% 
-\def\euro{{\eurofont e}}
-\def\eurofont{%
-  % We set the font at each command, rather than predefining it in
-  % \textfonts and the other font-switching commands, so that
-  % installations which never need the symbol don't have to have the
-  % font installed.
-  % 
-  % There is only one designed size (nominal 10pt), so we always scale
-  % that to the current nominal size.
-  % 
-  % By the way, simply using "at 1em" works for cmr10 and the like, but
-  % does not work for cmbx10 and other extended/shrunken fonts.
-  % 
-  \def\eurosize{\csname\curfontsize nominalsize\endcsname}%
-  %
-  \ifx\curfontstyle\bfstylename 
-    % bold:
-    \font\thiseurofont = \ifusingit{feybo10}{feybr10} at \eurosize
-  \else 
-    % regular:
-    \font\thiseurofont = \ifusingit{feymo10}{feymr10} at \eurosize
-  \fi
-  \thiseurofont
-}
-
-% @registeredsymbol - R in a circle.  The font for the R should really
-% be smaller yet, but lllsize is the best we can do for now.
-% Adapted from the plain.tex definition of \copyright.
-%
-\def\registeredsymbol{%
-  $^{{\ooalign{\hfil\raise.07ex\hbox{\selectfonts\lllsize R}%
-               \hfil\crcr\Orb}}%
-    }$%
-}
-
-% @textdegree - the normal degrees sign.
-%
-\def\textdegree{$^\circ$}
-
-% Laurent Siebenmann reports \Orb undefined with:
-%  Textures 1.7.7 (preloaded format=plain 93.10.14)  (68K)  16 APR 2004 02:38
-% so we'll define it if necessary.
-% 
-\ifx\Orb\undefined
-\def\Orb{\mathhexbox20D}
-\fi
-
-
-\message{page headings,}
-
-\newskip\titlepagetopglue \titlepagetopglue = 1.5in
-\newskip\titlepagebottomglue \titlepagebottomglue = 2pc
-
-% First the title page.  Must do @settitle before @titlepage.
-\newif\ifseenauthor
-\newif\iffinishedtitlepage
-
-% Do an implicit @contents or @shortcontents after @end titlepage if the
-% user says @setcontentsaftertitlepage or @setshortcontentsaftertitlepage.
-%
-\newif\ifsetcontentsaftertitlepage
- \let\setcontentsaftertitlepage = \setcontentsaftertitlepagetrue
-\newif\ifsetshortcontentsaftertitlepage
- \let\setshortcontentsaftertitlepage = \setshortcontentsaftertitlepagetrue
-
-\parseargdef\shorttitlepage{\begingroup\hbox{}\vskip 1.5in \chaprm \centerline{#1}%
-        \endgroup\page\hbox{}\page}
-
-\envdef\titlepage{%
-  % Open one extra group, as we want to close it in the middle of \Etitlepage.
-  \begingroup
-    \parindent=0pt \textfonts
-    % Leave some space at the very top of the page.
-    \vglue\titlepagetopglue
-    % No rule at page bottom unless we print one at the top with @title.
-    \finishedtitlepagetrue
-    %
-    % Most title ``pages'' are actually two pages long, with space
-    % at the top of the second.  We don't want the ragged left on the second.
-    \let\oldpage = \page
-    \def\page{%
-      \iffinishedtitlepage\else
-	 \finishtitlepage
-      \fi
-      \let\page = \oldpage
-      \page
-      \null
-    }%
-}
-
-\def\Etitlepage{%
-    \iffinishedtitlepage\else
-	\finishtitlepage
-    \fi
-    % It is important to do the page break before ending the group,
-    % because the headline and footline are only empty inside the group.
-    % If we use the new definition of \page, we always get a blank page
-    % after the title page, which we certainly don't want.
-    \oldpage
-  \endgroup
-  %
-  % Need this before the \...aftertitlepage checks so that if they are
-  % in effect the toc pages will come out with page numbers.
-  \HEADINGSon
-  %
-  % If they want short, they certainly want long too.
-  \ifsetshortcontentsaftertitlepage
-    \shortcontents
-    \contents
-    \global\let\shortcontents = \relax
-    \global\let\contents = \relax
-  \fi
-  %
-  \ifsetcontentsaftertitlepage
-    \contents
-    \global\let\contents = \relax
-    \global\let\shortcontents = \relax
-  \fi
-}
-
-\def\finishtitlepage{%
-  \vskip4pt \hrule height 2pt width \hsize
-  \vskip\titlepagebottomglue
-  \finishedtitlepagetrue
-}
-
-%%% Macros to be used within @titlepage:
-
-\let\subtitlerm=\tenrm
-\def\subtitlefont{\subtitlerm \normalbaselineskip = 13pt \normalbaselines}
-
-\def\authorfont{\authorrm \normalbaselineskip = 16pt \normalbaselines
-		\let\tt=\authortt}
-
-\parseargdef\title{%
-  \checkenv\titlepage
-  \leftline{\titlefonts\rm #1}
-  % print a rule at the page bottom also.
-  \finishedtitlepagefalse
-  \vskip4pt \hrule height 4pt width \hsize \vskip4pt
-}
-
-\parseargdef\subtitle{%
-  \checkenv\titlepage
-  {\subtitlefont \rightline{#1}}%
-}
-
-% @author should come last, but may come many times.
-% It can also be used inside @quotation.
-%
-\parseargdef\author{%
-  \def\temp{\quotation}%
-  \ifx\thisenv\temp
-    \def\quotationauthor{#1}% printed in \Equotation.
-  \else
-    \checkenv\titlepage
-    \ifseenauthor\else \vskip 0pt plus 1filll \seenauthortrue \fi
-    {\authorfont \leftline{#1}}%
-  \fi
-}
-
-
-%%% Set up page headings and footings.
-
-\let\thispage=\folio
-
-\newtoks\evenheadline    % headline on even pages
-\newtoks\oddheadline     % headline on odd pages
-\newtoks\evenfootline    % footline on even pages
-\newtoks\oddfootline     % footline on odd pages
-
-% Now make TeX use those variables
-\headline={{\textfonts\rm \ifodd\pageno \the\oddheadline
-                            \else \the\evenheadline \fi}}
-\footline={{\textfonts\rm \ifodd\pageno \the\oddfootline
-                            \else \the\evenfootline \fi}\HEADINGShook}
-\let\HEADINGShook=\relax
-
-% Commands to set those variables.
-% For example, this is what  @headings on  does
-% @evenheading @thistitle|@thispage|@thischapter
-% @oddheading @thischapter|@thispage|@thistitle
-% @evenfooting @thisfile||
-% @oddfooting ||@thisfile
-
-
-\def\evenheading{\parsearg\evenheadingxxx}
-\def\evenheadingxxx #1{\evenheadingyyy #1\|\|\|\|\finish}
-\def\evenheadingyyy #1\|#2\|#3\|#4\finish{%
-\global\evenheadline={\rlap{\centerline{#2}}\line{#1\hfil#3}}}
-
-\def\oddheading{\parsearg\oddheadingxxx}
-\def\oddheadingxxx #1{\oddheadingyyy #1\|\|\|\|\finish}
-\def\oddheadingyyy #1\|#2\|#3\|#4\finish{%
-\global\oddheadline={\rlap{\centerline{#2}}\line{#1\hfil#3}}}
-
-\parseargdef\everyheading{\oddheadingxxx{#1}\evenheadingxxx{#1}}%
-
-\def\evenfooting{\parsearg\evenfootingxxx}
-\def\evenfootingxxx #1{\evenfootingyyy #1\|\|\|\|\finish}
-\def\evenfootingyyy #1\|#2\|#3\|#4\finish{%
-\global\evenfootline={\rlap{\centerline{#2}}\line{#1\hfil#3}}}
-
-\def\oddfooting{\parsearg\oddfootingxxx}
-\def\oddfootingxxx #1{\oddfootingyyy #1\|\|\|\|\finish}
-\def\oddfootingyyy #1\|#2\|#3\|#4\finish{%
-  \global\oddfootline = {\rlap{\centerline{#2}}\line{#1\hfil#3}}%
-  %
-  % Leave some space for the footline.  Hopefully ok to assume
-  % @evenfooting will not be used by itself.
-  \global\advance\pageheight by -12pt
-  \global\advance\vsize by -12pt
-}
-
-\parseargdef\everyfooting{\oddfootingxxx{#1}\evenfootingxxx{#1}}
-
-
-% @headings double      turns headings on for double-sided printing.
-% @headings single      turns headings on for single-sided printing.
-% @headings off         turns them off.
-% @headings on          same as @headings double, retained for compatibility.
-% @headings after       turns on double-sided headings after this page.
-% @headings doubleafter turns on double-sided headings after this page.
-% @headings singleafter turns on single-sided headings after this page.
-% By default, they are off at the start of a document,
-% and turned `on' after @end titlepage.
-
-\def\headings #1 {\csname HEADINGS#1\endcsname}
-
-\def\HEADINGSoff{%
-\global\evenheadline={\hfil} \global\evenfootline={\hfil}
-\global\oddheadline={\hfil} \global\oddfootline={\hfil}}
-\HEADINGSoff
-% When we turn headings on, set the page number to 1.
-% For double-sided printing, put current file name in lower left corner,
-% chapter name on inside top of right hand pages, document
-% title on inside top of left hand pages, and page numbers on outside top
-% edge of all pages.
-\def\HEADINGSdouble{%
-\global\pageno=1
-\global\evenfootline={\hfil}
-\global\oddfootline={\hfil}
-\global\evenheadline={\line{\folio\hfil\thistitle}}
-\global\oddheadline={\line{\thischapter\hfil\folio}}
-\global\let\contentsalignmacro = \chapoddpage
-}
-\let\contentsalignmacro = \chappager
-
-% For single-sided printing, chapter title goes across top left of page,
-% page number on top right.
-\def\HEADINGSsingle{%
-\global\pageno=1
-\global\evenfootline={\hfil}
-\global\oddfootline={\hfil}
-\global\evenheadline={\line{\thischapter\hfil\folio}}
-\global\oddheadline={\line{\thischapter\hfil\folio}}
-\global\let\contentsalignmacro = \chappager
-}
-\def\HEADINGSon{\HEADINGSdouble}
-
-\def\HEADINGSafter{\let\HEADINGShook=\HEADINGSdoublex}
-\let\HEADINGSdoubleafter=\HEADINGSafter
-\def\HEADINGSdoublex{%
-\global\evenfootline={\hfil}
-\global\oddfootline={\hfil}
-\global\evenheadline={\line{\folio\hfil\thistitle}}
-\global\oddheadline={\line{\thischapter\hfil\folio}}
-\global\let\contentsalignmacro = \chapoddpage
-}
-
-\def\HEADINGSsingleafter{\let\HEADINGShook=\HEADINGSsinglex}
-\def\HEADINGSsinglex{%
-\global\evenfootline={\hfil}
-\global\oddfootline={\hfil}
-\global\evenheadline={\line{\thischapter\hfil\folio}}
-\global\oddheadline={\line{\thischapter\hfil\folio}}
-\global\let\contentsalignmacro = \chappager
-}
-
-% Subroutines used in generating headings
-% This produces Day Month Year style of output.
-% Only define if not already defined, in case a txi-??.tex file has set
-% up a different format (e.g., txi-cs.tex does this).
-\ifx\today\undefined
-\def\today{%
-  \number\day\space
-  \ifcase\month
-  \or\putwordMJan\or\putwordMFeb\or\putwordMMar\or\putwordMApr
-  \or\putwordMMay\or\putwordMJun\or\putwordMJul\or\putwordMAug
-  \or\putwordMSep\or\putwordMOct\or\putwordMNov\or\putwordMDec
-  \fi
-  \space\number\year}
-\fi
-
-% @settitle line...  specifies the title of the document, for headings.
-% It generates no output of its own.
-\def\thistitle{\putwordNoTitle}
-\def\settitle{\parsearg{\gdef\thistitle}}
-
-
-\message{tables,}
-% Tables -- @table, @ftable, @vtable, @item(x).
-
-% default indentation of table text
-\newdimen\tableindent \tableindent=.8in
-% default indentation of @itemize and @enumerate text
-\newdimen\itemindent  \itemindent=.3in
-% margin between end of table item and start of table text.
-\newdimen\itemmargin  \itemmargin=.1in
-
-% used internally for \itemindent minus \itemmargin
-\newdimen\itemmax
-
-% Note @table, @ftable, and @vtable define @item, @itemx, etc., with
-% these defs.
-% They also define \itemindex
-% to index the item name in whatever manner is desired (perhaps none).
-
-\newif\ifitemxneedsnegativevskip
-
-\def\itemxpar{\par\ifitemxneedsnegativevskip\nobreak\vskip-\parskip\nobreak\fi}
-
-\def\internalBitem{\smallbreak \parsearg\itemzzz}
-\def\internalBitemx{\itemxpar \parsearg\itemzzz}
-
-\def\itemzzz #1{\begingroup %
-  \advance\hsize by -\rightskip
-  \advance\hsize by -\tableindent
-  \setbox0=\hbox{\itemindicate{#1}}%
-  \itemindex{#1}%
-  \nobreak % This prevents a break before @itemx.
-  %
-  % If the item text does not fit in the space we have, put it on a line
-  % by itself, and do not allow a page break either before or after that
-  % line.  We do not start a paragraph here because then if the next
-  % command is, e.g., @kindex, the whatsit would get put into the
-  % horizontal list on a line by itself, resulting in extra blank space.
-  \ifdim \wd0>\itemmax
-    %
-    % Make this a paragraph so we get the \parskip glue and wrapping,
-    % but leave it ragged-right.
-    \begingroup
-      \advance\leftskip by-\tableindent
-      \advance\hsize by\tableindent
-      \advance\rightskip by0pt plus1fil
-      \leavevmode\unhbox0\par
-    \endgroup
-    %
-    % We're going to be starting a paragraph, but we don't want the
-    % \parskip glue -- logically it's part of the @item we just started.
-    \nobreak \vskip-\parskip
-    %
-    % Stop a page break at the \parskip glue coming up.  However, if
-    % what follows is an environment such as @example, there will be no
-    % \parskip glue; then the negative vskip we just inserted would
-    % cause the example and the item to crash together.  So we use this
-    % bizarre value of 10001 as a signal to \aboveenvbreak to insert
-    % \parskip glue after all.  Section titles are handled this way also.
-    % 
-    \penalty 10001
-    \endgroup
-    \itemxneedsnegativevskipfalse
-  \else
-    % The item text fits into the space.  Start a paragraph, so that the
-    % following text (if any) will end up on the same line.
-    \noindent
-    % Do this with kerns and \unhbox so that if there is a footnote in
-    % the item text, it can migrate to the main vertical list and
-    % eventually be printed.
-    \nobreak\kern-\tableindent
-    \dimen0 = \itemmax  \advance\dimen0 by \itemmargin \advance\dimen0 by -\wd0
-    \unhbox0
-    \nobreak\kern\dimen0
-    \endgroup
-    \itemxneedsnegativevskiptrue
-  \fi
-}
-
-\def\item{\errmessage{@item while not in a list environment}}
-\def\itemx{\errmessage{@itemx while not in a list environment}}
-
-% @table, @ftable, @vtable.
-\envdef\table{%
-  \let\itemindex\gobble
-  \tablecheck{table}%
-}
-\envdef\ftable{%
-  \def\itemindex ##1{\doind {fn}{\code{##1}}}%
-  \tablecheck{ftable}%
-}
-\envdef\vtable{%
-  \def\itemindex ##1{\doind {vr}{\code{##1}}}%
-  \tablecheck{vtable}%
-}
-\def\tablecheck#1{%
-  \ifnum \the\catcode`\^^M=\active
-    \endgroup
-    \errmessage{This command won't work in this context; perhaps the problem is
-      that we are \inenvironment\thisenv}%
-    \def\next{\doignore{#1}}%
-  \else
-    \let\next\tablex
-  \fi
-  \next
-}
-\def\tablex#1{%
-  \def\itemindicate{#1}%
-  \parsearg\tabley
-}
-\def\tabley#1{%
-  {%
-    \makevalueexpandable
-    \edef\temp{\noexpand\tablez #1\space\space\space}%
-    \expandafter
-  }\temp \endtablez
-}
-\def\tablez #1 #2 #3 #4\endtablez{%
-  \aboveenvbreak
-  \ifnum 0#1>0 \advance \leftskip by #1\mil \fi
-  \ifnum 0#2>0 \tableindent=#2\mil \fi
-  \ifnum 0#3>0 \advance \rightskip by #3\mil \fi
-  \itemmax=\tableindent
-  \advance \itemmax by -\itemmargin
-  \advance \leftskip by \tableindent
-  \exdentamount=\tableindent
-  \parindent = 0pt
-  \parskip = \smallskipamount
-  \ifdim \parskip=0pt \parskip=2pt \fi
-  \let\item = \internalBitem
-  \let\itemx = \internalBitemx
-}
-\def\Etable{\endgraf\afterenvbreak}
-\let\Eftable\Etable
-\let\Evtable\Etable
-\let\Eitemize\Etable
-\let\Eenumerate\Etable
-
-% This is the counter used by @enumerate, which is really @itemize
-
-\newcount \itemno
-
-\envdef\itemize{\parsearg\doitemize}
-
-\def\doitemize#1{%
-  \aboveenvbreak
-  \itemmax=\itemindent
-  \advance\itemmax by -\itemmargin
-  \advance\leftskip by \itemindent
-  \exdentamount=\itemindent
-  \parindent=0pt
-  \parskip=\smallskipamount
-  \ifdim\parskip=0pt \parskip=2pt \fi
-  \def\itemcontents{#1}%
-  % @itemize with no arg is equivalent to @itemize @bullet.
-  \ifx\itemcontents\empty\def\itemcontents{\bullet}\fi
-  \let\item=\itemizeitem
-}
-
-% Definition of @item while inside @itemize and @enumerate.
-%
-\def\itemizeitem{%
-  \advance\itemno by 1  % for enumerations
-  {\let\par=\endgraf \smallbreak}% reasonable place to break
-  {%
-   % If the document has an @itemize directly after a section title, a
-   % \nobreak will be last on the list, and \sectionheading will have
-   % done a \vskip-\parskip.  In that case, we don't want to zero
-   % parskip, or the item text will crash with the heading.  On the
-   % other hand, when there is normal text preceding the item (as there
-   % usually is), we do want to zero parskip, or there would be too much
-   % space.  In that case, we won't have a \nobreak before.  At least
-   % that's the theory.
-   \ifnum\lastpenalty<10000 \parskip=0in \fi
-   \noindent
-   \hbox to 0pt{\hss \itemcontents \kern\itemmargin}%
-   \vadjust{\penalty 1200}}% not good to break after first line of item.
-  \flushcr
-}
-
-% \splitoff TOKENS\endmark defines \first to be the first token in
-% TOKENS, and \rest to be the remainder.
-%
-\def\splitoff#1#2\endmark{\def\first{#1}\def\rest{#2}}%
-
-% Allow an optional argument of an uppercase letter, lowercase letter,
-% or number, to specify the first label in the enumerated list.  No
-% argument is the same as `1'.
-%
-\envparseargdef\enumerate{\enumeratey #1  \endenumeratey}
-\def\enumeratey #1 #2\endenumeratey{%
-  % If we were given no argument, pretend we were given `1'.
-  \def\thearg{#1}%
-  \ifx\thearg\empty \def\thearg{1}\fi
-  %
-  % Detect if the argument is a single token.  If so, it might be a
-  % letter.  Otherwise, the only valid thing it can be is a number.
-  % (We will always have one token, because of the test we just made.
-  % This is a good thing, since \splitoff doesn't work given nothing at
-  % all -- the first parameter is undelimited.)
-  \expandafter\splitoff\thearg\endmark
-  \ifx\rest\empty
-    % Only one token in the argument.  It could still be anything.
-    % A ``lowercase letter'' is one whose \lccode is nonzero.
-    % An ``uppercase letter'' is one whose \lccode is both nonzero, and
-    %   not equal to itself.
-    % Otherwise, we assume it's a number.
-    %
-    % We need the \relax at the end of the \ifnum lines to stop TeX from
-    % continuing to look for a <number>.
-    %
-    \ifnum\lccode\expandafter`\thearg=0\relax
-      \numericenumerate % a number (we hope)
-    \else
-      % It's a letter.
-      \ifnum\lccode\expandafter`\thearg=\expandafter`\thearg\relax
-        \lowercaseenumerate % lowercase letter
-      \else
-        \uppercaseenumerate % uppercase letter
-      \fi
-    \fi
-  \else
-    % Multiple tokens in the argument.  We hope it's a number.
-    \numericenumerate
-  \fi
-}
-
-% An @enumerate whose labels are integers.  The starting integer is
-% given in \thearg.
-%
-\def\numericenumerate{%
-  \itemno = \thearg
-  \startenumeration{\the\itemno}%
-}
-
-% The starting (lowercase) letter is in \thearg.
-\def\lowercaseenumerate{%
-  \itemno = \expandafter`\thearg
-  \startenumeration{%
-    % Be sure we're not beyond the end of the alphabet.
-    \ifnum\itemno=0
-      \errmessage{No more lowercase letters in @enumerate; get a bigger
-                  alphabet}%
-    \fi
-    \char\lccode\itemno
-  }%
-}
-
-% The starting (uppercase) letter is in \thearg.
-\def\uppercaseenumerate{%
-  \itemno = \expandafter`\thearg
-  \startenumeration{%
-    % Be sure we're not beyond the end of the alphabet.
-    \ifnum\itemno=0
-      \errmessage{No more uppercase letters in @enumerate; get a bigger
-                  alphabet}
-    \fi
-    \char\uccode\itemno
-  }%
-}
-
-% Call \doitemize, adding a period to the first argument and supplying the
-% common last two arguments.  Also subtract one from the initial value in
-% \itemno, since @item increments \itemno.
-%
-\def\startenumeration#1{%
-  \advance\itemno by -1
-  \doitemize{#1.}\flushcr
-}
-
-% @alphaenumerate and @capsenumerate are abbreviations for giving an arg
-% to @enumerate.
-%
-\def\alphaenumerate{\enumerate{a}}
-\def\capsenumerate{\enumerate{A}}
-\def\Ealphaenumerate{\Eenumerate}
-\def\Ecapsenumerate{\Eenumerate}
-
-
-% @multitable macros
-% Amy Hendrickson, 8/18/94, 3/6/96
-%
-% @multitable ... @end multitable will make as many columns as desired.
-% Contents of each column will wrap at width given in preamble.  Width
-% can be specified either with sample text given in a template line,
-% or in percent of \hsize, the current width of text on page.
-
-% Table can continue over pages but will only break between lines.
-
-% To make preamble:
-%
-% Either define widths of columns in terms of percent of \hsize:
-%   @multitable @columnfractions .25 .3 .45
-%   @item ...
-%
-%   Numbers following @columnfractions are the percent of the total
-%   current hsize to be used for each column. You may use as many
-%   columns as desired.
-
-
-% Or use a template:
-%   @multitable {Column 1 template} {Column 2 template} {Column 3 template}
-%   @item ...
-%   using the widest term desired in each column.
-
-% Each new table line starts with @item, each subsequent new column
-% starts with @tab. Empty columns may be produced by supplying @tab's
-% with nothing between them for as many times as empty columns are needed,
-% ie, @tab@tab@tab will produce two empty columns.
-
-% @item, @tab do not need to be on their own lines, but it will not hurt
-% if they are.
-
-% Sample multitable:
-
-%   @multitable {Column 1 template} {Column 2 template} {Column 3 template}
-%   @item first col stuff @tab second col stuff @tab third col
-%   @item
-%   first col stuff
-%   @tab
-%   second col stuff
-%   @tab
-%   third col
-%   @item first col stuff @tab second col stuff
-%   @tab Many paragraphs of text may be used in any column.
-%
-%         They will wrap at the width determined by the template.
-%   @item@tab@tab This will be in third column.
-%   @end multitable
-
-% Default dimensions may be reset by user.
-% @multitableparskip is vertical space between paragraphs in table.
-% @multitableparindent is paragraph indent in table.
-% @multitablecolmargin is horizontal space to be left between columns.
-% @multitablelinespace is space to leave between table items, baseline
-%                                                            to baseline.
-%   0pt means it depends on current normal line spacing.
-%
-\newskip\multitableparskip
-\newskip\multitableparindent
-\newdimen\multitablecolspace
-\newskip\multitablelinespace
-\multitableparskip=0pt
-\multitableparindent=6pt
-\multitablecolspace=12pt
-\multitablelinespace=0pt
-
-% Macros used to set up halign preamble:
-%
-\let\endsetuptable\relax
-\def\xendsetuptable{\endsetuptable}
-\let\columnfractions\relax
-\def\xcolumnfractions{\columnfractions}
-\newif\ifsetpercent
-
-% #1 is the @columnfraction, usually a decimal number like .5, but might
-% be just 1.  We just use it, whatever it is.
-%
-\def\pickupwholefraction#1 {%
-  \global\advance\colcount by 1
-  \expandafter\xdef\csname col\the\colcount\endcsname{#1\hsize}%
-  \setuptable
-}
-
-\newcount\colcount
-\def\setuptable#1{%
-  \def\firstarg{#1}%
-  \ifx\firstarg\xendsetuptable
-    \let\go = \relax
-  \else
-    \ifx\firstarg\xcolumnfractions
-      \global\setpercenttrue
-    \else
-      \ifsetpercent
-         \let\go\pickupwholefraction
-      \else
-         \global\advance\colcount by 1
-         \setbox0=\hbox{#1\unskip\space}% Add a normal word space as a
-                   % separator; typically that is always in the input, anyway.
-         \expandafter\xdef\csname col\the\colcount\endcsname{\the\wd0}%
-      \fi
-    \fi
-    \ifx\go\pickupwholefraction
-      % Put the argument back for the \pickupwholefraction call, so
-      % we'll always have a period there to be parsed.
-      \def\go{\pickupwholefraction#1}%
-    \else
-      \let\go = \setuptable
-    \fi%
-  \fi
-  \go
-}
-
-% multitable-only commands.
-%
-% @headitem starts a heading row, which we typeset in bold.
-% Assignments have to be global since we are inside the implicit group
-% of an alignment entry.  Note that \everycr resets \everytab.
-\def\headitem{\checkenv\multitable \crcr \global\everytab={\bf}\the\everytab}%
-%
-% A \tab used to include \hskip1sp.  But then the space in a template
-% line is not enough.  That is bad.  So let's go back to just `&' until
-% we encounter the problem it was intended to solve again.
-%					--karl, nathan@acm.org, 20apr99.
-\def\tab{\checkenv\multitable &\the\everytab}%
-
-% @multitable ... @end multitable definitions:
-%
-\newtoks\everytab  % insert after every tab.
-%
-\envdef\multitable{%
-  \vskip\parskip
-  \startsavinginserts
-  %
-  % @item within a multitable starts a normal row.
-  % We use \def instead of \let so that if one of the multitable entries
-  % contains an @itemize, we don't choke on the \item (seen as \crcr aka
-  % \endtemplate) expanding \doitemize.
-  \def\item{\crcr}%
-  %
-  \tolerance=9500
-  \hbadness=9500
-  \setmultitablespacing
-  \parskip=\multitableparskip
-  \parindent=\multitableparindent
-  \overfullrule=0pt
-  \global\colcount=0
-  %
-  \everycr = {%
-    \noalign{%
-      \global\everytab={}%
-      \global\colcount=0 % Reset the column counter.
-      % Check for saved footnotes, etc.
-      \checkinserts
-      % Keeps underfull box messages off when table breaks over pages.
-      %\filbreak
-	% Maybe so, but it also creates really weird page breaks when the
-	% table breaks over pages. Wouldn't \vfil be better?  Wait until the
-	% problem manifests itself, so it can be fixed for real --karl.
-    }%
-  }%
-  %
-  \parsearg\domultitable
-}
-\def\domultitable#1{%
-  % To parse everything between @multitable and @item:
-  \setuptable#1 \endsetuptable
-  %
-  % This preamble sets up a generic column definition, which will
-  % be used as many times as user calls for columns.
-  % \vtop will set a single line and will also let text wrap and
-  % continue for many paragraphs if desired.
-  \halign\bgroup &%
-    \global\advance\colcount by 1
-    \multistrut
-    \vtop{%
-      % Use the current \colcount to find the correct column width:
-      \hsize=\expandafter\csname col\the\colcount\endcsname
-      %
-      % In order to keep entries from bumping into each other
-      % we will add a \leftskip of \multitablecolspace to all columns after
-      % the first one.
-      %
-      % If a template has been used, we will add \multitablecolspace
-      % to the width of each template entry.
-      %
-      % If the user has set preamble in terms of percent of \hsize we will
-      % use that dimension as the width of the column, and the \leftskip
-      % will keep entries from bumping into each other.  Table will start at
-      % left margin and final column will justify at right margin.
-      %
-      % Make sure we don't inherit \rightskip from the outer environment.
-      \rightskip=0pt
-      \ifnum\colcount=1
-	% The first column will be indented with the surrounding text.
-	\advance\hsize by\leftskip
-      \else
-	\ifsetpercent \else
-	  % If user has not set preamble in terms of percent of \hsize
-	  % we will advance \hsize by \multitablecolspace.
-	  \advance\hsize by \multitablecolspace
-	\fi
-       % In either case we will make \leftskip=\multitablecolspace:
-      \leftskip=\multitablecolspace
-      \fi
-      % Ignoring space at the beginning and end avoids an occasional spurious
-      % blank line, when TeX decides to break the line at the space before the
-      % box from the multistrut, so the strut ends up on a line by itself.
-      % For example:
-      % @multitable @columnfractions .11 .89
-      % @item @code{#}
-      % @tab Legal holiday which is valid in major parts of the whole country.
-      % Is automatically provided with highlighting sequences respectively
-      % marking characters.
-      \noindent\ignorespaces##\unskip\multistrut
-    }\cr
-}
-\def\Emultitable{%
-  \crcr
-  \egroup % end the \halign
-  \global\setpercentfalse
-}
-
-\def\setmultitablespacing{%
-  \def\multistrut{\strut}% just use the standard line spacing
-  %
-  % Compute \multitablelinespace (if not defined by user) for use in
-  % \multitableparskip calculation.  We used define \multistrut based on
-  % this, but (ironically) that caused the spacing to be off.
-  % See bug-texinfo report from Werner Lemberg, 31 Oct 2004 12:52:20 +0100.
-\ifdim\multitablelinespace=0pt
-\setbox0=\vbox{X}\global\multitablelinespace=\the\baselineskip
-\global\advance\multitablelinespace by-\ht0
-\fi
-%% Test to see if parskip is larger than space between lines of
-%% table. If not, do nothing.
-%%        If so, set to same dimension as multitablelinespace.
-\ifdim\multitableparskip>\multitablelinespace
-\global\multitableparskip=\multitablelinespace
-\global\advance\multitableparskip-7pt %% to keep parskip somewhat smaller
-                                      %% than skip between lines in the table.
-\fi%
-\ifdim\multitableparskip=0pt
-\global\multitableparskip=\multitablelinespace
-\global\advance\multitableparskip-7pt %% to keep parskip somewhat smaller
-                                      %% than skip between lines in the table.
-\fi}
-
-
-\message{conditionals,}
-
-% @iftex, @ifnotdocbook, @ifnothtml, @ifnotinfo, @ifnotplaintext,
-% @ifnotxml always succeed.  They currently do nothing; we don't
-% attempt to check whether the conditionals are properly nested.  But we
-% have to remember that they are conditionals, so that @end doesn't
-% attempt to close an environment group.
-%
-\def\makecond#1{%
-  \expandafter\let\csname #1\endcsname = \relax
-  \expandafter\let\csname iscond.#1\endcsname = 1
-}
-\makecond{iftex}
-\makecond{ifnotdocbook}
-\makecond{ifnothtml}
-\makecond{ifnotinfo}
-\makecond{ifnotplaintext}
-\makecond{ifnotxml}
-
-% Ignore @ignore, @ifhtml, @ifinfo, and the like.
-%
-\def\direntry{\doignore{direntry}}
-\def\documentdescription{\doignore{documentdescription}}
-\def\docbook{\doignore{docbook}}
-\def\html{\doignore{html}}
-\def\ifdocbook{\doignore{ifdocbook}}
-\def\ifhtml{\doignore{ifhtml}}
-\def\ifinfo{\doignore{ifinfo}}
-\def\ifnottex{\doignore{ifnottex}}
-\def\ifplaintext{\doignore{ifplaintext}}
-\def\ifxml{\doignore{ifxml}}
-\def\ignore{\doignore{ignore}}
-\def\menu{\doignore{menu}}
-\def\xml{\doignore{xml}}
-
-% Ignore text until a line `@end #1', keeping track of nested conditionals.
-%
-% A count to remember the depth of nesting.
-\newcount\doignorecount
-
-\def\doignore#1{\begingroup
-  % Scan in ``verbatim'' mode:
-  \obeylines
-  \catcode`\@ = \other
-  \catcode`\{ = \other
-  \catcode`\} = \other
-  %
-  % Make sure that spaces turn into tokens that match what \doignoretext wants.
-  \spaceisspace
-  %
-  % Count number of #1's that we've seen.
-  \doignorecount = 0
-  %
-  % Swallow text until we reach the matching `@end #1'.
-  \dodoignore{#1}%
-}
-
-{ \catcode`_=11 % We want to use \_STOP_ which cannot appear in texinfo source.
-  \obeylines %
-  %
-  \gdef\dodoignore#1{%
-    % #1 contains the command name as a string, e.g., `ifinfo'.
-    %
-    % Define a command to find the next `@end #1'.
-    \long\def\doignoretext##1^^M@end #1{%
-      \doignoretextyyy##1^^M@#1\_STOP_}%
-    %
-    % And this command to find another #1 command, at the beginning of a
-    % line.  (Otherwise, we would consider a line `@c @ifset', for
-    % example, to count as an @ifset for nesting.)
-    \long\def\doignoretextyyy##1^^M@#1##2\_STOP_{\doignoreyyy{##2}\_STOP_}%
-    %
-    % And now expand that command.
-    \doignoretext ^^M%
-  }%
-}
-
-\def\doignoreyyy#1{%
-  \def\temp{#1}%
-  \ifx\temp\empty			% Nothing found.
-    \let\next\doignoretextzzz
-  \else					% Found a nested condition, ...
-    \advance\doignorecount by 1
-    \let\next\doignoretextyyy		% ..., look for another.
-    % If we're here, #1 ends with ^^M\ifinfo (for example).
-  \fi
-  \next #1% the token \_STOP_ is present just after this macro.
-}
-
-% We have to swallow the remaining "\_STOP_".
-%
-\def\doignoretextzzz#1{%
-  \ifnum\doignorecount = 0	% We have just found the outermost @end.
-    \let\next\enddoignore
-  \else				% Still inside a nested condition.
-    \advance\doignorecount by -1
-    \let\next\doignoretext      % Look for the next @end.
-  \fi
-  \next
-}
-
-% Finish off ignored text.
-{ \obeylines%
-  % Ignore anything after the last `@end #1'; this matters in verbatim
-  % environments, where otherwise the newline after an ignored conditional
-  % would result in a blank line in the output.
-  \gdef\enddoignore#1^^M{\endgroup\ignorespaces}%
-}
-
-
-% @set VAR sets the variable VAR to an empty value.
-% @set VAR REST-OF-LINE sets VAR to the value REST-OF-LINE.
-%
-% Since we want to separate VAR from REST-OF-LINE (which might be
-% empty), we can't just use \parsearg; we have to insert a space of our
-% own to delimit the rest of the line, and then take it out again if we
-% didn't need it.
-% We rely on the fact that \parsearg sets \catcode`\ =10.
-%
-\parseargdef\set{\setyyy#1 \endsetyyy}
-\def\setyyy#1 #2\endsetyyy{%
-  {%
-    \makevalueexpandable
-    \def\temp{#2}%
-    \edef\next{\gdef\makecsname{SET#1}}%
-    \ifx\temp\empty
-      \next{}%
-    \else
-      \setzzz#2\endsetzzz
-    \fi
-  }%
-}
-% Remove the trailing space \setxxx inserted.
-\def\setzzz#1 \endsetzzz{\next{#1}}
-
-% @clear VAR clears (i.e., unsets) the variable VAR.
-%
-\parseargdef\clear{%
-  {%
-    \makevalueexpandable
-    \global\expandafter\let\csname SET#1\endcsname=\relax
-  }%
-}
-
-% @value{foo} gets the text saved in variable foo.
-\def\value{\begingroup\makevalueexpandable\valuexxx}
-\def\valuexxx#1{\expandablevalue{#1}\endgroup}
-{
-  \catcode`\- = \active \catcode`\_ = \active
-  %
-  \gdef\makevalueexpandable{%
-    \let\value = \expandablevalue
-    % We don't want these characters active, ...
-    \catcode`\-=\other \catcode`\_=\other
-    % ..., but we might end up with active ones in the argument if
-    % we're called from @code, as @code{@value{foo-bar_}}, though.
-    % So \let them to their normal equivalents.
-    \let-\realdash \let_\normalunderscore
-  }
-}
-
-% We have this subroutine so that we can handle at least some @value's
-% properly in indexes (we call \makevalueexpandable in \indexdummies).
-% The command has to be fully expandable (if the variable is set), since
-% the result winds up in the index file.  This means that if the
-% variable's value contains other Texinfo commands, it's almost certain
-% it will fail (although perhaps we could fix that with sufficient work
-% to do a one-level expansion on the result, instead of complete).
-%
-\def\expandablevalue#1{%
-  \expandafter\ifx\csname SET#1\endcsname\relax
-    {[No value for ``#1'']}%
-    \message{Variable `#1', used in @value, is not set.}%
-  \else
-    \csname SET#1\endcsname
-  \fi
-}
-
-% @ifset VAR ... @end ifset reads the `...' iff VAR has been defined
-% with @set.
-%
-% To get special treatment of `@end ifset,' call \makeond and the redefine.
-%
-\makecond{ifset}
-\def\ifset{\parsearg{\doifset{\let\next=\ifsetfail}}}
-\def\doifset#1#2{%
-  {%
-    \makevalueexpandable
-    \let\next=\empty
-    \expandafter\ifx\csname SET#2\endcsname\relax
-      #1% If not set, redefine \next.
-    \fi
-    \expandafter
-  }\next
-}
-\def\ifsetfail{\doignore{ifset}}
-
-% @ifclear VAR ... @end ifclear reads the `...' iff VAR has never been
-% defined with @set, or has been undefined with @clear.
-%
-% The `\else' inside the `\doifset' parameter is a trick to reuse the
-% above code: if the variable is not set, do nothing, if it is set,
-% then redefine \next to \ifclearfail.
-%
-\makecond{ifclear}
-\def\ifclear{\parsearg{\doifset{\else \let\next=\ifclearfail}}}
-\def\ifclearfail{\doignore{ifclear}}
-
-% @dircategory CATEGORY  -- specify a category of the dir file
-% which this file should belong to.  Ignore this in TeX.
-\let\dircategory=\comment
-
-% @defininfoenclose.
-\let\definfoenclose=\comment
-
-
-\message{indexing,}
-% Index generation facilities
-
-% Define \newwrite to be identical to plain tex's \newwrite
-% except not \outer, so it can be used within macros and \if's.
-\edef\newwrite{\makecsname{ptexnewwrite}}
-
-% \newindex {foo} defines an index named foo.
-% It automatically defines \fooindex such that
-% \fooindex ...rest of line... puts an entry in the index foo.
-% It also defines \fooindfile to be the number of the output channel for
-% the file that accumulates this index.  The file's extension is foo.
-% The name of an index should be no more than 2 characters long
-% for the sake of vms.
-%
-\def\newindex#1{%
-  \iflinks
-    \expandafter\newwrite \csname#1indfile\endcsname
-    \openout \csname#1indfile\endcsname \jobname.#1 % Open the file
-  \fi
-  \expandafter\xdef\csname#1index\endcsname{%     % Define @#1index
-    \noexpand\doindex{#1}}
-}
-
-% @defindex foo  ==  \newindex{foo}
-%
-\def\defindex{\parsearg\newindex}
-
-% Define @defcodeindex, like @defindex except put all entries in @code.
-%
-\def\defcodeindex{\parsearg\newcodeindex}
-%
-\def\newcodeindex#1{%
-  \iflinks
-    \expandafter\newwrite \csname#1indfile\endcsname
-    \openout \csname#1indfile\endcsname \jobname.#1
-  \fi
-  \expandafter\xdef\csname#1index\endcsname{%
-    \noexpand\docodeindex{#1}}%
-}
-
-
-% @synindex foo bar    makes index foo feed into index bar.
-% Do this instead of @defindex foo if you don't want it as a separate index.
-%
-% @syncodeindex foo bar   similar, but put all entries made for index foo
-% inside @code.
-%
-\def\synindex#1 #2 {\dosynindex\doindex{#1}{#2}}
-\def\syncodeindex#1 #2 {\dosynindex\docodeindex{#1}{#2}}
-
-% #1 is \doindex or \docodeindex, #2 the index getting redefined (foo),
-% #3 the target index (bar).
-\def\dosynindex#1#2#3{%
-  % Only do \closeout if we haven't already done it, else we'll end up
-  % closing the target index.
-  \expandafter \ifx\csname donesynindex#2\endcsname \undefined
-    % The \closeout helps reduce unnecessary open files; the limit on the
-    % Acorn RISC OS is a mere 16 files.
-    \expandafter\closeout\csname#2indfile\endcsname
-    \expandafter\let\csname\donesynindex#2\endcsname = 1
-  \fi
-  % redefine \fooindfile:
-  \expandafter\let\expandafter\temp\expandafter=\csname#3indfile\endcsname
-  \expandafter\let\csname#2indfile\endcsname=\temp
-  % redefine \fooindex:
-  \expandafter\xdef\csname#2index\endcsname{\noexpand#1{#3}}%
-}
-
-% Define \doindex, the driver for all \fooindex macros.
-% Argument #1 is generated by the calling \fooindex macro,
-%  and it is "foo", the name of the index.
-
-% \doindex just uses \parsearg; it calls \doind for the actual work.
-% This is because \doind is more useful to call from other macros.
-
-% There is also \dosubind {index}{topic}{subtopic}
-% which makes an entry in a two-level index such as the operation index.
-
-\def\doindex#1{\edef\indexname{#1}\parsearg\singleindexer}
-\def\singleindexer #1{\doind{\indexname}{#1}}
-
-% like the previous two, but they put @code around the argument.
-\def\docodeindex#1{\edef\indexname{#1}\parsearg\singlecodeindexer}
-\def\singlecodeindexer #1{\doind{\indexname}{\code{#1}}}
-
-% Take care of Texinfo commands that can appear in an index entry.
-% Since there are some commands we want to expand, and others we don't,
-% we have to laboriously prevent expansion for those that we don't.
-%
-\def\indexdummies{%
-  \escapechar = `\\     % use backslash in output files.
-  \def\@{@}% change to @@ when we switch to @ as escape char in index files.
-  \def\ {\realbackslash\space }%
-  %
-  % Need these in case \tex is in effect and \{ is a \delimiter again.
-  % But can't use \lbracecmd and \rbracecmd because texindex assumes
-  % braces and backslashes are used only as delimiters.
-  \let\{ = \mylbrace
-  \let\} = \myrbrace
-  %
-  % I don't entirely understand this, but when an index entry is
-  % generated from a macro call, the \endinput which \scanmacro inserts
-  % causes processing to be prematurely terminated.  This is,
-  % apparently, because \indexsorttmp is fully expanded, and \endinput
-  % is an expandable command.  The redefinition below makes \endinput
-  % disappear altogether for that purpose -- although logging shows that
-  % processing continues to some further point.  On the other hand, it
-  % seems \endinput does not hurt in the printed index arg, since that
-  % is still getting written without apparent harm.
-  % 
-  % Sample source (mac-idx3.tex, reported by Graham Percival to
-  % help-texinfo, 22may06):
-  % @macro funindex {WORD}
-  % @findex xyz
-  % @end macro
-  % ...
-  % @funindex commtest
-  % 
-  % The above is not enough to reproduce the bug, but it gives the flavor.
-  % 
-  % Sample whatsit resulting:
-  % .@write3{\entry{xyz}{@folio }{@code {xyz@endinput }}}
-  % 
-  % So:
-  \let\endinput = \empty
-  %
-  % Do the redefinitions.
-  \commondummies
-}
-
-% For the aux and toc files, @ is the escape character.  So we want to
-% redefine everything using @ as the escape character (instead of
-% \realbackslash, still used for index files).  When everything uses @,
-% this will be simpler.
-%
-\def\atdummies{%
-  \def\@{@@}%
-  \def\ {@ }%
-  \let\{ = \lbraceatcmd
-  \let\} = \rbraceatcmd
-  %
-  % Do the redefinitions.
-  \commondummies
-  \otherbackslash
-}
-
-% Called from \indexdummies and \atdummies.
-%
-\def\commondummies{%
-  %
-  % \definedummyword defines \#1 as \string\#1\space, thus effectively
-  % preventing its expansion.  This is used only for control% words,
-  % not control letters, because the \space would be incorrect for
-  % control characters, but is needed to separate the control word
-  % from whatever follows.
-  %
-  % For control letters, we have \definedummyletter, which omits the
-  % space.
-  %
-  % These can be used both for control words that take an argument and
-  % those that do not.  If it is followed by {arg} in the input, then
-  % that will dutifully get written to the index (or wherever).
-  %
-  \def\definedummyword  ##1{\def##1{\string##1\space}}%
-  \def\definedummyletter##1{\def##1{\string##1}}%
-  \let\definedummyaccent\definedummyletter
-  %
-  \commondummiesnofonts
-  %
-  \definedummyletter\_%
-  %
-  % Non-English letters.
-  \definedummyword\AA
-  \definedummyword\AE
-  \definedummyword\L
-  \definedummyword\OE
-  \definedummyword\O
-  \definedummyword\aa
-  \definedummyword\ae
-  \definedummyword\l
-  \definedummyword\oe
-  \definedummyword\o
-  \definedummyword\ss
-  \definedummyword\exclamdown
-  \definedummyword\questiondown
-  \definedummyword\ordf
-  \definedummyword\ordm
-  %
-  % Although these internal commands shouldn't show up, sometimes they do.
-  \definedummyword\bf
-  \definedummyword\gtr
-  \definedummyword\hat
-  \definedummyword\less
-  \definedummyword\sf
-  \definedummyword\sl
-  \definedummyword\tclose
-  \definedummyword\tt
-  %
-  \definedummyword\LaTeX
-  \definedummyword\TeX
-  %
-  % Assorted special characters.
-  \definedummyword\bullet
-  \definedummyword\comma
-  \definedummyword\copyright
-  \definedummyword\registeredsymbol
-  \definedummyword\dots
-  \definedummyword\enddots
-  \definedummyword\equiv
-  \definedummyword\error
-  \definedummyword\euro
-  \definedummyword\expansion
-  \definedummyword\minus
-  \definedummyword\pounds
-  \definedummyword\point
-  \definedummyword\print
-  \definedummyword\result
-  \definedummyword\textdegree
-  %
-  % We want to disable all macros so that they are not expanded by \write.
-  \macrolist
-  %
-  \normalturnoffactive
-  %
-  % Handle some cases of @value -- where it does not contain any
-  % (non-fully-expandable) commands.
-  \makevalueexpandable
-}
-
-% \commondummiesnofonts: common to \commondummies and \indexnofonts.
-%
-\def\commondummiesnofonts{%
-  % Control letters and accents.
-  \definedummyletter\!%
-  \definedummyaccent\"%
-  \definedummyaccent\'%
-  \definedummyletter\*%
-  \definedummyaccent\,%
-  \definedummyletter\.%
-  \definedummyletter\/%
-  \definedummyletter\:%
-  \definedummyaccent\=%
-  \definedummyletter\?%
-  \definedummyaccent\^%
-  \definedummyaccent\`%
-  \definedummyaccent\~%
-  \definedummyword\u
-  \definedummyword\v
-  \definedummyword\H
-  \definedummyword\dotaccent
-  \definedummyword\ringaccent
-  \definedummyword\tieaccent
-  \definedummyword\ubaraccent
-  \definedummyword\udotaccent
-  \definedummyword\dotless
-  %
-  % Texinfo font commands.
-  \definedummyword\b
-  \definedummyword\i
-  \definedummyword\r
-  \definedummyword\sc
-  \definedummyword\t
-  %
-  % Commands that take arguments.
-  \definedummyword\acronym
-  \definedummyword\cite
-  \definedummyword\code
-  \definedummyword\command
-  \definedummyword\dfn
-  \definedummyword\emph
-  \definedummyword\env
-  \definedummyword\file
-  \definedummyword\kbd
-  \definedummyword\key
-  \definedummyword\math
-  \definedummyword\option
-  \definedummyword\pxref
-  \definedummyword\ref
-  \definedummyword\samp
-  \definedummyword\strong
-  \definedummyword\tie
-  \definedummyword\uref
-  \definedummyword\url
-  \definedummyword\var
-  \definedummyword\verb
-  \definedummyword\w
-  \definedummyword\xref
-}
-
-% \indexnofonts is used when outputting the strings to sort the index
-% by, and when constructing control sequence names.  It eliminates all
-% control sequences and just writes whatever the best ASCII sort string
-% would be for a given command (usually its argument).
-%
-\def\indexnofonts{%
-  % Accent commands should become @asis.
-  \def\definedummyaccent##1{\let##1\asis}%
-  % We can just ignore other control letters.
-  \def\definedummyletter##1{\let##1\empty}%
-  % Hopefully, all control words can become @asis.
-  \let\definedummyword\definedummyaccent
-  %
-  \commondummiesnofonts
-  %
-  % Don't no-op \tt, since it isn't a user-level command
-  % and is used in the definitions of the active chars like <, >, |, etc.
-  % Likewise with the other plain tex font commands.
-  %\let\tt=\asis
-  %
-  \def\ { }%
-  \def\@{@}%
-  % how to handle braces?
-  \def\_{\normalunderscore}%
-  %
-  % Non-English letters.
-  \def\AA{AA}%
-  \def\AE{AE}%
-  \def\L{L}%
-  \def\OE{OE}%
-  \def\O{O}%
-  \def\aa{aa}%
-  \def\ae{ae}%
-  \def\l{l}%
-  \def\oe{oe}%
-  \def\o{o}%
-  \def\ss{ss}%
-  \def\exclamdown{!}%
-  \def\questiondown{?}%
-  \def\ordf{a}%
-  \def\ordm{o}%
-  %
-  \def\LaTeX{LaTeX}%
-  \def\TeX{TeX}%
-  %
-  % Assorted special characters.
-  % (The following {} will end up in the sort string, but that's ok.)
-  \def\bullet{bullet}%
-  \def\comma{,}%
-  \def\copyright{copyright}%
-  \def\registeredsymbol{R}%
-  \def\dots{...}%
-  \def\enddots{...}%
-  \def\equiv{==}%
-  \def\error{error}%
-  \def\euro{euro}%
-  \def\expansion{==>}%
-  \def\minus{-}%
-  \def\pounds{pounds}%
-  \def\point{.}%
-  \def\print{-|}%
-  \def\result{=>}%
-  \def\textdegree{degrees}%
-  %
-  % We need to get rid of all macros, leaving only the arguments (if present).
-  % Of course this is not nearly correct, but it is the best we can do for now.
-  % makeinfo does not expand macros in the argument to @deffn, which ends up
-  % writing an index entry, and texindex isn't prepared for an index sort entry
-  % that starts with \.
-  % 
-  % Since macro invocations are followed by braces, we can just redefine them
-  % to take a single TeX argument.  The case of a macro invocation that
-  % goes to end-of-line is not handled.
-  % 
-  \macrolist
-}
-
-\let\indexbackslash=0  %overridden during \printindex.
-\let\SETmarginindex=\relax % put index entries in margin (undocumented)?
-
-% Most index entries go through here, but \dosubind is the general case.
-% #1 is the index name, #2 is the entry text.
-\def\doind#1#2{\dosubind{#1}{#2}{}}
-
-% Workhorse for all \fooindexes.
-% #1 is name of index, #2 is stuff to put there, #3 is subentry --
-% empty if called from \doind, as we usually are (the main exception
-% is with most defuns, which call us directly).
-%
-\def\dosubind#1#2#3{%
-  \iflinks
-  {%
-    % Store the main index entry text (including the third arg).
-    \toks0 = {#2}%
-    % If third arg is present, precede it with a space.
-    \def\thirdarg{#3}%
-    \ifx\thirdarg\empty \else
-      \toks0 = \expandafter{\the\toks0 \space #3}%
-    \fi
-    %
-    \edef\writeto{\csname#1indfile\endcsname}%
-    %
-    \safewhatsit\dosubindwrite
-  }%
-  \fi
-}
-
-% Write the entry in \toks0 to the index file:
-%
-\def\dosubindwrite{%
-  % Put the index entry in the margin if desired.
-  \ifx\SETmarginindex\relax\else
-    \insert\margin{\hbox{\vrule height8pt depth3pt width0pt \the\toks0}}%
-  \fi
-  %
-  % Remember, we are within a group.
-  \indexdummies % Must do this here, since \bf, etc expand at this stage
-  \def\backslashcurfont{\indexbackslash}% \indexbackslash isn't defined now
-      % so it will be output as is; and it will print as backslash.
-  %
-  % Process the index entry with all font commands turned off, to
-  % get the string to sort by.
-  {\indexnofonts
-   \edef\temp{\the\toks0}% need full expansion
-   \xdef\indexsorttmp{\temp}%
-  }%
-  %
-  % Set up the complete index entry, with both the sort key and
-  % the original text, including any font commands.  We write
-  % three arguments to \entry to the .?? file (four in the
-  % subentry case), texindex reduces to two when writing the .??s
-  % sorted result.
-  \edef\temp{%
-    \write\writeto{%
-      \string\entry{\indexsorttmp}{\noexpand\folio}{\the\toks0}}%
-  }%
-  \temp
-}
-
-% Take care of unwanted page breaks/skips around a whatsit:
-%
-% If a skip is the last thing on the list now, preserve it
-% by backing up by \lastskip, doing the \write, then inserting
-% the skip again.  Otherwise, the whatsit generated by the
-% \write or \pdfdest will make \lastskip zero.  The result is that
-% sequences like this:
-% @end defun
-% @tindex whatever
-% @defun ...
-% will have extra space inserted, because the \medbreak in the
-% start of the @defun won't see the skip inserted by the @end of
-% the previous defun.
-%
-% But don't do any of this if we're not in vertical mode.  We
-% don't want to do a \vskip and prematurely end a paragraph.
-%
-% Avoid page breaks due to these extra skips, too.
-%
-% But wait, there is a catch there:
-% We'll have to check whether \lastskip is zero skip.  \ifdim is not
-% sufficient for this purpose, as it ignores stretch and shrink parts
-% of the skip.  The only way seems to be to check the textual
-% representation of the skip.
-%
-% The following is almost like \def\zeroskipmacro{0.0pt} except that
-% the ``p'' and ``t'' characters have catcode \other, not 11 (letter).
-%
-\edef\zeroskipmacro{\expandafter\the\csname z@skip\endcsname}
-%
-\newskip\whatsitskip
-\newcount\whatsitpenalty
-%
-% ..., ready, GO:
-%
-\def\safewhatsit#1{%
-\ifhmode
-  #1%
-\else
-  % \lastskip and \lastpenalty cannot both be nonzero simultaneously.
-  \whatsitskip = \lastskip
-  \edef\lastskipmacro{\the\lastskip}%
-  \whatsitpenalty = \lastpenalty
-  %
-  % If \lastskip is nonzero, that means the last item was a
-  % skip.  And since a skip is discardable, that means this
-  % -\skip0 glue we're inserting is preceded by a
-  % non-discardable item, therefore it is not a potential
-  % breakpoint, therefore no \nobreak needed.
-  \ifx\lastskipmacro\zeroskipmacro
-  \else
-    \vskip-\whatsitskip
-  \fi
-  %
-  #1%
-  %
-  \ifx\lastskipmacro\zeroskipmacro
-    % If \lastskip was zero, perhaps the last item was a penalty, and
-    % perhaps it was >=10000, e.g., a \nobreak.  In that case, we want
-    % to re-insert the same penalty (values >10000 are used for various
-    % signals); since we just inserted a non-discardable item, any
-    % following glue (such as a \parskip) would be a breakpoint.  For example:
-    % 
-    %   @deffn deffn-whatever
-    %   @vindex index-whatever
-    %   Description.
-    % would allow a break between the index-whatever whatsit
-    % and the "Description." paragraph.
-    \ifnum\whatsitpenalty>9999 \penalty\whatsitpenalty \fi
-  \else
-    % On the other hand, if we had a nonzero \lastskip,
-    % this make-up glue would be preceded by a non-discardable item
-    % (the whatsit from the \write), so we must insert a \nobreak.
-    \nobreak\vskip\whatsitskip
-  \fi
-\fi
-}
-
-% The index entry written in the file actually looks like
-%  \entry {sortstring}{page}{topic}
-% or
-%  \entry {sortstring}{page}{topic}{subtopic}
-% The texindex program reads in these files and writes files
-% containing these kinds of lines:
-%  \initial {c}
-%     before the first topic whose initial is c
-%  \entry {topic}{pagelist}
-%     for a topic that is used without subtopics
-%  \primary {topic}
-%     for the beginning of a topic that is used with subtopics
-%  \secondary {subtopic}{pagelist}
-%     for each subtopic.
-
-% Define the user-accessible indexing commands
-% @findex, @vindex, @kindex, @cindex.
-
-\def\findex {\fnindex}
-\def\kindex {\kyindex}
-\def\cindex {\cpindex}
-\def\vindex {\vrindex}
-\def\tindex {\tpindex}
-\def\pindex {\pgindex}
-
-\def\cindexsub {\begingroup\obeylines\cindexsub}
-{\obeylines %
-\gdef\cindexsub "#1" #2^^M{\endgroup %
-\dosubind{cp}{#2}{#1}}}
-
-% Define the macros used in formatting output of the sorted index material.
-
-% @printindex causes a particular index (the ??s file) to get printed.
-% It does not print any chapter heading (usually an @unnumbered).
-%
-\parseargdef\printindex{\begingroup
-  \dobreak \chapheadingskip{10000}%
-  %
-  \smallfonts \rm
-  \tolerance = 9500
-  \plainfrenchspacing
-  \everypar = {}% don't want the \kern\-parindent from indentation suppression.
-  %
-  % See if the index file exists and is nonempty.
-  % Change catcode of @ here so that if the index file contains
-  % \initial {@}
-  % as its first line, TeX doesn't complain about mismatched braces
-  % (because it thinks @} is a control sequence).
-  \catcode`\@ = 11
-  \openin 1 \jobname.#1s
-  \ifeof 1
-    % \enddoublecolumns gets confused if there is no text in the index,
-    % and it loses the chapter title and the aux file entries for the
-    % index.  The easiest way to prevent this problem is to make sure
-    % there is some text.
-    \putwordIndexNonexistent
-  \else
-    %
-    % If the index file exists but is empty, then \openin leaves \ifeof
-    % false.  We have to make TeX try to read something from the file, so
-    % it can discover if there is anything in it.
-    \read 1 to \temp
-    \ifeof 1
-      \putwordIndexIsEmpty
-    \else
-      % Index files are almost Texinfo source, but we use \ as the escape
-      % character.  It would be better to use @, but that's too big a change
-      % to make right now.
-      \def\indexbackslash{\backslashcurfont}%
-      \catcode`\\ = 0
-      \escapechar = `\\
-      \begindoublecolumns
-      \input \jobname.#1s
-      \enddoublecolumns
-    \fi
-  \fi
-  \closein 1
-\endgroup}
-
-% These macros are used by the sorted index file itself.
-% Change them to control the appearance of the index.
-
-\def\initial#1{{%
-  % Some minor font changes for the special characters.
-  \let\tentt=\sectt \let\tt=\sectt \let\sf=\sectt
-  %
-  % Remove any glue we may have, we'll be inserting our own.
-  \removelastskip
-  %
-  % We like breaks before the index initials, so insert a bonus.
-  \nobreak
-  \vskip 0pt plus 3\baselineskip
-  \penalty 0
-  \vskip 0pt plus -3\baselineskip
-  %
-  % Typeset the initial.  Making this add up to a whole number of
-  % baselineskips increases the chance of the dots lining up from column
-  % to column.  It still won't often be perfect, because of the stretch
-  % we need before each entry, but it's better.
-  %
-  % No shrink because it confuses \balancecolumns.
-  \vskip 1.67\baselineskip plus .5\baselineskip
-  \leftline{\secbf #1}%
-  % Do our best not to break after the initial.
-  \nobreak
-  \vskip .33\baselineskip plus .1\baselineskip
-}}
-
-% \entry typesets a paragraph consisting of the text (#1), dot leaders, and
-% then page number (#2) flushed to the right margin.  It is used for index
-% and table of contents entries.  The paragraph is indented by \leftskip.
-%
-% A straightforward implementation would start like this:
-%	\def\entry#1#2{...
-% But this frozes the catcodes in the argument, and can cause problems to
-% @code, which sets - active.  This problem was fixed by a kludge---
-% ``-'' was active throughout whole index, but this isn't really right.
-%
-% The right solution is to prevent \entry from swallowing the whole text.
-%                                 --kasal, 21nov03
-\def\entry{%
-  \begingroup
-    %
-    % Start a new paragraph if necessary, so our assignments below can't
-    % affect previous text.
-    \par
-    %
-    % Do not fill out the last line with white space.
-    \parfillskip = 0in
-    %
-    % No extra space above this paragraph.
-    \parskip = 0in
-    %
-    % Do not prefer a separate line ending with a hyphen to fewer lines.
-    \finalhyphendemerits = 0
-    %
-    % \hangindent is only relevant when the entry text and page number
-    % don't both fit on one line.  In that case, bob suggests starting the
-    % dots pretty far over on the line.  Unfortunately, a large
-    % indentation looks wrong when the entry text itself is broken across
-    % lines.  So we use a small indentation and put up with long leaders.
-    %
-    % \hangafter is reset to 1 (which is the value we want) at the start
-    % of each paragraph, so we need not do anything with that.
-    \hangindent = 2em
-    %
-    % When the entry text needs to be broken, just fill out the first line
-    % with blank space.
-    \rightskip = 0pt plus1fil
-    %
-    % A bit of stretch before each entry for the benefit of balancing
-    % columns.
-    \vskip 0pt plus1pt
-    %
-    % Swallow the left brace of the text (first parameter):
-    \afterassignment\doentry
-    \let\temp =
-}
-\def\doentry{%
-    \bgroup % Instead of the swallowed brace.
-      \noindent
-      \aftergroup\finishentry
-      % And now comes the text of the entry.
-}
-\def\finishentry#1{%
-    % #1 is the page number.
-    %
-    % The following is kludged to not output a line of dots in the index if
-    % there are no page numbers.  The next person who breaks this will be
-    % cursed by a Unix daemon.
-    \def\tempa{{\rm }}%
-    \def\tempb{#1}%
-    \edef\tempc{\tempa}%
-    \edef\tempd{\tempb}%
-    \ifx\tempc\tempd
-      \ %
-    \else
-      %
-      % If we must, put the page number on a line of its own, and fill out
-      % this line with blank space.  (The \hfil is overwhelmed with the
-      % fill leaders glue in \indexdotfill if the page number does fit.)
-      \hfil\penalty50
-      \null\nobreak\indexdotfill % Have leaders before the page number.
-      %
-      % The `\ ' here is removed by the implicit \unskip that TeX does as
-      % part of (the primitive) \par.  Without it, a spurious underfull
-      % \hbox ensues.
-      \ifpdf
-	\pdfgettoks#1.%
-	\ \the\toksA
-      \else
-	\ #1%
-      \fi
-    \fi
-    \par
-  \endgroup
-}
-
-% Like plain.tex's \dotfill, except uses up at least 1 em.
-\def\indexdotfill{\cleaders
-  \hbox{$\mathsurround=0pt \mkern1.5mu.\mkern1.5mu$}\hskip 1em plus 1fill}
-
-\def\primary #1{\line{#1\hfil}}
-
-\newskip\secondaryindent \secondaryindent=0.5cm
-\def\secondary#1#2{{%
-  \parfillskip=0in
-  \parskip=0in
-  \hangindent=1in
-  \hangafter=1
-  \noindent\hskip\secondaryindent\hbox{#1}\indexdotfill
-  \ifpdf
-    \pdfgettoks#2.\ \the\toksA % The page number ends the paragraph.
-  \else
-    #2
-  \fi
-  \par
-}}
-
-% Define two-column mode, which we use to typeset indexes.
-% Adapted from the TeXbook, page 416, which is to say,
-% the manmac.tex format used to print the TeXbook itself.
-\catcode`\@=11
-
-\newbox\partialpage
-\newdimen\doublecolumnhsize
-
-\def\begindoublecolumns{\begingroup % ended by \enddoublecolumns
-  % Grab any single-column material above us.
-  \output = {%
-    %
-    % Here is a possibility not foreseen in manmac: if we accumulate a
-    % whole lot of material, we might end up calling this \output
-    % routine twice in a row (see the doublecol-lose test, which is
-    % essentially a couple of indexes with @setchapternewpage off).  In
-    % that case we just ship out what is in \partialpage with the normal
-    % output routine.  Generally, \partialpage will be empty when this
-    % runs and this will be a no-op.  See the indexspread.tex test case.
-    \ifvoid\partialpage \else
-      \onepageout{\pagecontents\partialpage}%
-    \fi
-    %
-    \global\setbox\partialpage = \vbox{%
-      % Unvbox the main output page.
-      \unvbox\PAGE
-      \kern-\topskip \kern\baselineskip
-    }%
-  }%
-  \eject % run that output routine to set \partialpage
-  %
-  % Use the double-column output routine for subsequent pages.
-  \output = {\doublecolumnout}%
-  %
-  % Change the page size parameters.  We could do this once outside this
-  % routine, in each of @smallbook, @afourpaper, and the default 8.5x11
-  % format, but then we repeat the same computation.  Repeating a couple
-  % of assignments once per index is clearly meaningless for the
-  % execution time, so we may as well do it in one place.
-  %
-  % First we halve the line length, less a little for the gutter between
-  % the columns.  We compute the gutter based on the line length, so it
-  % changes automatically with the paper format.  The magic constant
-  % below is chosen so that the gutter has the same value (well, +-<1pt)
-  % as it did when we hard-coded it.
-  %
-  % We put the result in a separate register, \doublecolumhsize, so we
-  % can restore it in \pagesofar, after \hsize itself has (potentially)
-  % been clobbered.
-  %
-  \doublecolumnhsize = \hsize
-    \advance\doublecolumnhsize by -.04154\hsize
-    \divide\doublecolumnhsize by 2
-  \hsize = \doublecolumnhsize
-  %
-  % Double the \vsize as well.  (We don't need a separate register here,
-  % since nobody clobbers \vsize.)
-  \vsize = 2\vsize
-}
-
-% The double-column output routine for all double-column pages except
-% the last.
-%
-\def\doublecolumnout{%
-  \splittopskip=\topskip \splitmaxdepth=\maxdepth
-  % Get the available space for the double columns -- the normal
-  % (undoubled) page height minus any material left over from the
-  % previous page.
-  \dimen@ = \vsize
-  \divide\dimen@ by 2
-  \advance\dimen@ by -\ht\partialpage
-  %
-  % box0 will be the left-hand column, box2 the right.
-  \setbox0=\vsplit255 to\dimen@ \setbox2=\vsplit255 to\dimen@
-  \onepageout\pagesofar
-  \unvbox255
-  \penalty\outputpenalty
-}
-%
-% Re-output the contents of the output page -- any previous material,
-% followed by the two boxes we just split, in box0 and box2.
-\def\pagesofar{%
-  \unvbox\partialpage
-  %
-  \hsize = \doublecolumnhsize
-  \wd0=\hsize \wd2=\hsize
-  \hbox to\pagewidth{\box0\hfil\box2}%
-}
-%
-% All done with double columns.
-\def\enddoublecolumns{%
-  % The following penalty ensures that the page builder is exercised
-  % _before_ we change the output routine.  This is necessary in the
-  % following situation:
-  %
-  % The last section of the index consists only of a single entry.
-  % Before this section, \pagetotal is less than \pagegoal, so no
-  % break occurs before the last section starts.  However, the last
-  % section, consisting of \initial and the single \entry, does not
-  % fit on the page and has to be broken off.  Without the following
-  % penalty the page builder will not be exercised until \eject
-  % below, and by that time we'll already have changed the output
-  % routine to the \balancecolumns version, so the next-to-last
-  % double-column page will be processed with \balancecolumns, which
-  % is wrong:  The two columns will go to the main vertical list, with
-  % the broken-off section in the recent contributions.  As soon as
-  % the output routine finishes, TeX starts reconsidering the page
-  % break.  The two columns and the broken-off section both fit on the
-  % page, because the two columns now take up only half of the page
-  % goal.  When TeX sees \eject from below which follows the final
-  % section, it invokes the new output routine that we've set after
-  % \balancecolumns below; \onepageout will try to fit the two columns
-  % and the final section into the vbox of \pageheight (see
-  % \pagebody), causing an overfull box.
-  %
-  % Note that glue won't work here, because glue does not exercise the
-  % page builder, unlike penalties (see The TeXbook, pp. 280-281).
-  \penalty0
-  %
-  \output = {%
-    % Split the last of the double-column material.  Leave it on the
-    % current page, no automatic page break.
-    \balancecolumns
-    %
-    % If we end up splitting too much material for the current page,
-    % though, there will be another page break right after this \output
-    % invocation ends.  Having called \balancecolumns once, we do not
-    % want to call it again.  Therefore, reset \output to its normal
-    % definition right away.  (We hope \balancecolumns will never be
-    % called on to balance too much material, but if it is, this makes
-    % the output somewhat more palatable.)
-    \global\output = {\onepageout{\pagecontents\PAGE}}%
-  }%
-  \eject
-  \endgroup % started in \begindoublecolumns
-  %
-  % \pagegoal was set to the doubled \vsize above, since we restarted
-  % the current page.  We're now back to normal single-column
-  % typesetting, so reset \pagegoal to the normal \vsize (after the
-  % \endgroup where \vsize got restored).
-  \pagegoal = \vsize
-}
-%
-% Called at the end of the double column material.
-\def\balancecolumns{%
-  \setbox0 = \vbox{\unvbox255}% like \box255 but more efficient, see p.120.
-  \dimen@ = \ht0
-  \advance\dimen@ by \topskip
-  \advance\dimen@ by-\baselineskip
-  \divide\dimen@ by 2 % target to split to
-  %debug\message{final 2-column material height=\the\ht0, target=\the\dimen@.}%
-  \splittopskip = \topskip
-  % Loop until we get a decent breakpoint.
-  {%
-    \vbadness = 10000
-    \loop
-      \global\setbox3 = \copy0
-      \global\setbox1 = \vsplit3 to \dimen@
-    \ifdim\ht3>\dimen@
-      \global\advance\dimen@ by 1pt
-    \repeat
-  }%
-  %debug\message{split to \the\dimen@, column heights: \the\ht1, \the\ht3.}%
-  \setbox0=\vbox to\dimen@{\unvbox1}%
-  \setbox2=\vbox to\dimen@{\unvbox3}%
-  %
-  \pagesofar
-}
-\catcode`\@ = \other
-
-
-\message{sectioning,}
-% Chapters, sections, etc.
-
-% \unnumberedno is an oxymoron, of course.  But we count the unnumbered
-% sections so that we can refer to them unambiguously in the pdf
-% outlines by their "section number".  We avoid collisions with chapter
-% numbers by starting them at 10000.  (If a document ever has 10000
-% chapters, we're in trouble anyway, I'm sure.)
-\newcount\unnumberedno \unnumberedno = 10000
-\newcount\chapno
-\newcount\secno        \secno=0
-\newcount\subsecno     \subsecno=0
-\newcount\subsubsecno  \subsubsecno=0
-
-% This counter is funny since it counts through charcodes of letters A, B, ...
-\newcount\appendixno  \appendixno = `\@
-%
-% \def\appendixletter{\char\the\appendixno}
-% We do the following ugly conditional instead of the above simple
-% construct for the sake of pdftex, which needs the actual
-% letter in the expansion, not just typeset.
-%
-\def\appendixletter{%
-  \ifnum\appendixno=`A A%
-  \else\ifnum\appendixno=`B B%
-  \else\ifnum\appendixno=`C C%
-  \else\ifnum\appendixno=`D D%
-  \else\ifnum\appendixno=`E E%
-  \else\ifnum\appendixno=`F F%
-  \else\ifnum\appendixno=`G G%
-  \else\ifnum\appendixno=`H H%
-  \else\ifnum\appendixno=`I I%
-  \else\ifnum\appendixno=`J J%
-  \else\ifnum\appendixno=`K K%
-  \else\ifnum\appendixno=`L L%
-  \else\ifnum\appendixno=`M M%
-  \else\ifnum\appendixno=`N N%
-  \else\ifnum\appendixno=`O O%
-  \else\ifnum\appendixno=`P P%
-  \else\ifnum\appendixno=`Q Q%
-  \else\ifnum\appendixno=`R R%
-  \else\ifnum\appendixno=`S S%
-  \else\ifnum\appendixno=`T T%
-  \else\ifnum\appendixno=`U U%
-  \else\ifnum\appendixno=`V V%
-  \else\ifnum\appendixno=`W W%
-  \else\ifnum\appendixno=`X X%
-  \else\ifnum\appendixno=`Y Y%
-  \else\ifnum\appendixno=`Z Z%
-  % The \the is necessary, despite appearances, because \appendixletter is
-  % expanded while writing the .toc file.  \char\appendixno is not
-  % expandable, thus it is written literally, thus all appendixes come out
-  % with the same letter (or @) in the toc without it.
-  \else\char\the\appendixno
-  \fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi
-  \fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi}
-
-% Each @chapter defines this as the name of the chapter.
-% page headings and footings can use it.  @section does likewise.
-% However, they are not reliable, because we don't use marks.
-\def\thischapter{}
-\def\thissection{}
-
-\newcount\absseclevel % used to calculate proper heading level
-\newcount\secbase\secbase=0 % @raisesections/@lowersections modify this count
-
-% @raisesections: treat @section as chapter, @subsection as section, etc.
-\def\raisesections{\global\advance\secbase by -1}
-\let\up=\raisesections % original BFox name
-
-% @lowersections: treat @chapter as section, @section as subsection, etc.
-\def\lowersections{\global\advance\secbase by 1}
-\let\down=\lowersections % original BFox name
-
-% we only have subsub.
-\chardef\maxseclevel = 3
-%
-% A numbered section within an unnumbered changes to unnumbered too.
-% To achieve this, remember the "biggest" unnum. sec. we are currently in:
-\chardef\unmlevel = \maxseclevel
-%
-% Trace whether the current chapter is an appendix or not:
-% \chapheadtype is "N" or "A", unnumbered chapters are ignored.
-\def\chapheadtype{N}
-
-% Choose a heading macro
-% #1 is heading type
-% #2 is heading level
-% #3 is text for heading
-\def\genhead#1#2#3{%
-  % Compute the abs. sec. level:
-  \absseclevel=#2
-  \advance\absseclevel by \secbase
-  % Make sure \absseclevel doesn't fall outside the range:
-  \ifnum \absseclevel < 0
-    \absseclevel = 0
-  \else
-    \ifnum \absseclevel > 3
-      \absseclevel = 3
-    \fi
-  \fi
-  % The heading type:
-  \def\headtype{#1}%
-  \if \headtype U%
-    \ifnum \absseclevel < \unmlevel
-      \chardef\unmlevel = \absseclevel
-    \fi
-  \else
-    % Check for appendix sections:
-    \ifnum \absseclevel = 0
-      \edef\chapheadtype{\headtype}%
-    \else
-      \if \headtype A\if \chapheadtype N%
-	\errmessage{@appendix... within a non-appendix chapter}%
-      \fi\fi
-    \fi
-    % Check for numbered within unnumbered:
-    \ifnum \absseclevel > \unmlevel
-      \def\headtype{U}%
-    \else
-      \chardef\unmlevel = 3
-    \fi
-  \fi
-  % Now print the heading:
-  \if \headtype U%
-    \ifcase\absseclevel
-	\unnumberedzzz{#3}%
-    \or \unnumberedseczzz{#3}%
-    \or \unnumberedsubseczzz{#3}%
-    \or \unnumberedsubsubseczzz{#3}%
-    \fi
-  \else
-    \if \headtype A%
-      \ifcase\absseclevel
-	  \appendixzzz{#3}%
-      \or \appendixsectionzzz{#3}%
-      \or \appendixsubseczzz{#3}%
-      \or \appendixsubsubseczzz{#3}%
-      \fi
-    \else
-      \ifcase\absseclevel
-	  \chapterzzz{#3}%
-      \or \seczzz{#3}%
-      \or \numberedsubseczzz{#3}%
-      \or \numberedsubsubseczzz{#3}%
-      \fi
-    \fi
-  \fi
-  \suppressfirstparagraphindent
-}
-
-% an interface:
-\def\numhead{\genhead N}
-\def\apphead{\genhead A}
-\def\unnmhead{\genhead U}
-
-% @chapter, @appendix, @unnumbered.  Increment top-level counter, reset
-% all lower-level sectioning counters to zero.
-%
-% Also set \chaplevelprefix, which we prepend to @float sequence numbers
-% (e.g., figures), q.v.  By default (before any chapter), that is empty.
-\let\chaplevelprefix = \empty
-%
-\outer\parseargdef\chapter{\numhead0{#1}} % normally numhead0 calls chapterzzz
-\def\chapterzzz#1{%
-  % section resetting is \global in case the chapter is in a group, such
-  % as an @include file.
-  \global\secno=0 \global\subsecno=0 \global\subsubsecno=0
-    \global\advance\chapno by 1
-  %
-  % Used for \float.
-  \gdef\chaplevelprefix{\the\chapno.}%
-  \resetallfloatnos
-  %
-  \message{\putwordChapter\space \the\chapno}%
-  %
-  % Write the actual heading.
-  \chapmacro{#1}{Ynumbered}{\the\chapno}%
-  %
-  % So @section and the like are numbered underneath this chapter.
-  \global\let\section = \numberedsec
-  \global\let\subsection = \numberedsubsec
-  \global\let\subsubsection = \numberedsubsubsec
-}
-
-\outer\parseargdef\appendix{\apphead0{#1}} % normally apphead0 calls appendixzzz
-\def\appendixzzz#1{%
-  \global\secno=0 \global\subsecno=0 \global\subsubsecno=0
-    \global\advance\appendixno by 1
-  \gdef\chaplevelprefix{\appendixletter.}%
-  \resetallfloatnos
-  %
-  \def\appendixnum{\putwordAppendix\space \appendixletter}%
-  \message{\appendixnum}%
-  %
-  \chapmacro{#1}{Yappendix}{\appendixletter}%
-  %
-  \global\let\section = \appendixsec
-  \global\let\subsection = \appendixsubsec
-  \global\let\subsubsection = \appendixsubsubsec
-}
-
-\outer\parseargdef\unnumbered{\unnmhead0{#1}} % normally unnmhead0 calls unnumberedzzz
-\def\unnumberedzzz#1{%
-  \global\secno=0 \global\subsecno=0 \global\subsubsecno=0
-    \global\advance\unnumberedno by 1
-  %
-  % Since an unnumbered has no number, no prefix for figures.
-  \global\let\chaplevelprefix = \empty
-  \resetallfloatnos
-  %
-  % This used to be simply \message{#1}, but TeX fully expands the
-  % argument to \message.  Therefore, if #1 contained @-commands, TeX
-  % expanded them.  For example, in `@unnumbered The @cite{Book}', TeX
-  % expanded @cite (which turns out to cause errors because \cite is meant
-  % to be executed, not expanded).
-  %
-  % Anyway, we don't want the fully-expanded definition of @cite to appear
-  % as a result of the \message, we just want `@cite' itself.  We use
-  % \the<toks register> to achieve this: TeX expands \the<toks> only once,
-  % simply yielding the contents of <toks register>.  (We also do this for
-  % the toc entries.)
-  \toks0 = {#1}%
-  \message{(\the\toks0)}%
-  %
-  \chapmacro{#1}{Ynothing}{\the\unnumberedno}%
-  %
-  \global\let\section = \unnumberedsec
-  \global\let\subsection = \unnumberedsubsec
-  \global\let\subsubsection = \unnumberedsubsubsec
-}
-
-% @centerchap is like @unnumbered, but the heading is centered.
-\outer\parseargdef\centerchap{%
-  % Well, we could do the following in a group, but that would break
-  % an assumption that \chapmacro is called at the outermost level.
-  % Thus we are safer this way:		--kasal, 24feb04
-  \let\centerparametersmaybe = \centerparameters
-  \unnmhead0{#1}%
-  \let\centerparametersmaybe = \relax
-}
-
-% @top is like @unnumbered.
-\let\top\unnumbered
-
-% Sections.
-\outer\parseargdef\numberedsec{\numhead1{#1}} % normally calls seczzz
-\def\seczzz#1{%
-  \global\subsecno=0 \global\subsubsecno=0  \global\advance\secno by 1
-  \sectionheading{#1}{sec}{Ynumbered}{\the\chapno.\the\secno}%
-}
-
-\outer\parseargdef\appendixsection{\apphead1{#1}} % normally calls appendixsectionzzz
-\def\appendixsectionzzz#1{%
-  \global\subsecno=0 \global\subsubsecno=0  \global\advance\secno by 1
-  \sectionheading{#1}{sec}{Yappendix}{\appendixletter.\the\secno}%
-}
-\let\appendixsec\appendixsection
-
-\outer\parseargdef\unnumberedsec{\unnmhead1{#1}} % normally calls unnumberedseczzz
-\def\unnumberedseczzz#1{%
-  \global\subsecno=0 \global\subsubsecno=0  \global\advance\secno by 1
-  \sectionheading{#1}{sec}{Ynothing}{\the\unnumberedno.\the\secno}%
-}
-
-% Subsections.
-\outer\parseargdef\numberedsubsec{\numhead2{#1}} % normally calls numberedsubseczzz
-\def\numberedsubseczzz#1{%
-  \global\subsubsecno=0  \global\advance\subsecno by 1
-  \sectionheading{#1}{subsec}{Ynumbered}{\the\chapno.\the\secno.\the\subsecno}%
-}
-
-\outer\parseargdef\appendixsubsec{\apphead2{#1}} % normally calls appendixsubseczzz
-\def\appendixsubseczzz#1{%
-  \global\subsubsecno=0  \global\advance\subsecno by 1
-  \sectionheading{#1}{subsec}{Yappendix}%
-                 {\appendixletter.\the\secno.\the\subsecno}%
-}
-
-\outer\parseargdef\unnumberedsubsec{\unnmhead2{#1}} %normally calls unnumberedsubseczzz
-\def\unnumberedsubseczzz#1{%
-  \global\subsubsecno=0  \global\advance\subsecno by 1
-  \sectionheading{#1}{subsec}{Ynothing}%
-                 {\the\unnumberedno.\the\secno.\the\subsecno}%
-}
-
-% Subsubsections.
-\outer\parseargdef\numberedsubsubsec{\numhead3{#1}} % normally numberedsubsubseczzz
-\def\numberedsubsubseczzz#1{%
-  \global\advance\subsubsecno by 1
-  \sectionheading{#1}{subsubsec}{Ynumbered}%
-                 {\the\chapno.\the\secno.\the\subsecno.\the\subsubsecno}%
-}
-
-\outer\parseargdef\appendixsubsubsec{\apphead3{#1}} % normally appendixsubsubseczzz
-\def\appendixsubsubseczzz#1{%
-  \global\advance\subsubsecno by 1
-  \sectionheading{#1}{subsubsec}{Yappendix}%
-                 {\appendixletter.\the\secno.\the\subsecno.\the\subsubsecno}%
-}
-
-\outer\parseargdef\unnumberedsubsubsec{\unnmhead3{#1}} %normally unnumberedsubsubseczzz
-\def\unnumberedsubsubseczzz#1{%
-  \global\advance\subsubsecno by 1
-  \sectionheading{#1}{subsubsec}{Ynothing}%
-                 {\the\unnumberedno.\the\secno.\the\subsecno.\the\subsubsecno}%
-}
-
-% These macros control what the section commands do, according
-% to what kind of chapter we are in (ordinary, appendix, or unnumbered).
-% Define them by default for a numbered chapter.
-\let\section = \numberedsec
-\let\subsection = \numberedsubsec
-\let\subsubsection = \numberedsubsubsec
-
-% Define @majorheading, @heading and @subheading
-
-% NOTE on use of \vbox for chapter headings, section headings, and such:
-%       1) We use \vbox rather than the earlier \line to permit
-%          overlong headings to fold.
-%       2) \hyphenpenalty is set to 10000 because hyphenation in a
-%          heading is obnoxious; this forbids it.
-%       3) Likewise, headings look best if no \parindent is used, and
-%          if justification is not attempted.  Hence \raggedright.
-
-
-\def\majorheading{%
-  {\advance\chapheadingskip by 10pt \chapbreak }%
-  \parsearg\chapheadingzzz
-}
-
-\def\chapheading{\chapbreak \parsearg\chapheadingzzz}
-\def\chapheadingzzz#1{%
-  {\chapfonts \vbox{\hyphenpenalty=10000\tolerance=5000
-                    \parindent=0pt\raggedright
-                    \rm #1\hfill}}%
-  \bigskip \par\penalty 200\relax
-  \suppressfirstparagraphindent
-}
-
-% @heading, @subheading, @subsubheading.
-\parseargdef\heading{\sectionheading{#1}{sec}{Yomitfromtoc}{}
-  \suppressfirstparagraphindent}
-\parseargdef\subheading{\sectionheading{#1}{subsec}{Yomitfromtoc}{}
-  \suppressfirstparagraphindent}
-\parseargdef\subsubheading{\sectionheading{#1}{subsubsec}{Yomitfromtoc}{}
-  \suppressfirstparagraphindent}
-
-% These macros generate a chapter, section, etc. heading only
-% (including whitespace, linebreaking, etc. around it),
-% given all the information in convenient, parsed form.
-
-%%% Args are the skip and penalty (usually negative)
-\def\dobreak#1#2{\par\ifdim\lastskip<#1\removelastskip\penalty#2\vskip#1\fi}
-
-%%% Define plain chapter starts, and page on/off switching for it
-% Parameter controlling skip before chapter headings (if needed)
-
-\newskip\chapheadingskip
-
-\def\chapbreak{\dobreak \chapheadingskip {-4000}}
-\def\chappager{\par\vfill\supereject}
-\def\chapoddpage{\chappager \ifodd\pageno \else \hbox to 0pt{} \chappager\fi}
-
-\def\setchapternewpage #1 {\csname CHAPPAG#1\endcsname}
-
-\def\CHAPPAGoff{%
-\global\let\contentsalignmacro = \chappager
-\global\let\pchapsepmacro=\chapbreak
-\global\let\pagealignmacro=\chappager}
-
-\def\CHAPPAGon{%
-\global\let\contentsalignmacro = \chappager
-\global\let\pchapsepmacro=\chappager
-\global\let\pagealignmacro=\chappager
-\global\def\HEADINGSon{\HEADINGSsingle}}
-
-\def\CHAPPAGodd{%
-\global\let\contentsalignmacro = \chapoddpage
-\global\let\pchapsepmacro=\chapoddpage
-\global\let\pagealignmacro=\chapoddpage
-\global\def\HEADINGSon{\HEADINGSdouble}}
-
-\CHAPPAGon
-
-% Chapter opening.
-%
-% #1 is the text, #2 is the section type (Ynumbered, Ynothing,
-% Yappendix, Yomitfromtoc), #3 the chapter number.
-%
-% To test against our argument.
-\def\Ynothingkeyword{Ynothing}
-\def\Yomitfromtockeyword{Yomitfromtoc}
-\def\Yappendixkeyword{Yappendix}
-%
-\def\chapmacro#1#2#3{%
-  \pchapsepmacro
-  {%
-    \chapfonts \rm
-    %
-    % Have to define \thissection before calling \donoderef, because the
-    % xref code eventually uses it.  On the other hand, it has to be called
-    % after \pchapsepmacro, or the headline will change too soon.
-    \gdef\thissection{#1}%
-    \gdef\thischaptername{#1}%
-    %
-    % Only insert the separating space if we have a chapter/appendix
-    % number, and don't print the unnumbered ``number''.
-    \def\temptype{#2}%
-    \ifx\temptype\Ynothingkeyword
-      \setbox0 = \hbox{}%
-      \def\toctype{unnchap}%
-      \gdef\thischapternum{}%
-      \gdef\thischapter{#1}%
-    \else\ifx\temptype\Yomitfromtockeyword
-      \setbox0 = \hbox{}% contents like unnumbered, but no toc entry
-      \def\toctype{omit}%
-      \gdef\thischapternum{}%
-      \gdef\thischapter{}%
-    \else\ifx\temptype\Yappendixkeyword
-      \setbox0 = \hbox{\putwordAppendix{} #3\enspace}%
-      \def\toctype{app}%
-      \xdef\thischapternum{\appendixletter}%
-      % We don't substitute the actual chapter name into \thischapter
-      % because we don't want its macros evaluated now.  And we don't
-      % use \thissection because that changes with each section.
-      %
-      \xdef\thischapter{\putwordAppendix{} \appendixletter:
-                        \noexpand\thischaptername}%
-    \else
-      \setbox0 = \hbox{#3\enspace}%
-      \def\toctype{numchap}%
-      \xdef\thischapternum{\the\chapno}%
-      \xdef\thischapter{\putwordChapter{} \the\chapno:
-                        \noexpand\thischaptername}%
-    \fi\fi\fi
-    %
-    % Write the toc entry for this chapter.  Must come before the
-    % \donoderef, because we include the current node name in the toc
-    % entry, and \donoderef resets it to empty.
-    \writetocentry{\toctype}{#1}{#3}%
-    %
-    % For pdftex, we have to write out the node definition (aka, make
-    % the pdfdest) after any page break, but before the actual text has
-    % been typeset.  If the destination for the pdf outline is after the
-    % text, then jumping from the outline may wind up with the text not
-    % being visible, for instance under high magnification.
-    \donoderef{#2}%
-    %
-    % Typeset the actual heading.
-    \vbox{\hyphenpenalty=10000 \tolerance=5000 \parindent=0pt \raggedright
-          \hangindent=\wd0 \centerparametersmaybe
-          \unhbox0 #1\par}%
-  }%
-  \nobreak\bigskip % no page break after a chapter title
-  \nobreak
-}
-
-% @centerchap -- centered and unnumbered.
-\let\centerparametersmaybe = \relax
-\def\centerparameters{%
-  \advance\rightskip by 3\rightskip
-  \leftskip = \rightskip
-  \parfillskip = 0pt
-}
-
-
-% I don't think this chapter style is supported any more, so I'm not
-% updating it with the new noderef stuff.  We'll see.  --karl, 11aug03.
-%
-\def\setchapterstyle #1 {\csname CHAPF#1\endcsname}
-%
-\def\unnchfopen #1{%
-\chapoddpage {\chapfonts \vbox{\hyphenpenalty=10000\tolerance=5000
-                       \parindent=0pt\raggedright
-                       \rm #1\hfill}}\bigskip \par\nobreak
-}
-\def\chfopen #1#2{\chapoddpage {\chapfonts
-\vbox to 3in{\vfil \hbox to\hsize{\hfil #2} \hbox to\hsize{\hfil #1} \vfil}}%
-\par\penalty 5000 %
-}
-\def\centerchfopen #1{%
-\chapoddpage {\chapfonts \vbox{\hyphenpenalty=10000\tolerance=5000
-                       \parindent=0pt
-                       \hfill {\rm #1}\hfill}}\bigskip \par\nobreak
-}
-\def\CHAPFopen{%
-  \global\let\chapmacro=\chfopen
-  \global\let\centerchapmacro=\centerchfopen}
-
-
-% Section titles.  These macros combine the section number parts and
-% call the generic \sectionheading to do the printing.
-%
-\newskip\secheadingskip
-\def\secheadingbreak{\dobreak \secheadingskip{-1000}}
-
-% Subsection titles.
-\newskip\subsecheadingskip
-\def\subsecheadingbreak{\dobreak \subsecheadingskip{-500}}
-
-% Subsubsection titles.
-\def\subsubsecheadingskip{\subsecheadingskip}
-\def\subsubsecheadingbreak{\subsecheadingbreak}
-
-
-% Print any size, any type, section title.
-%
-% #1 is the text, #2 is the section level (sec/subsec/subsubsec), #3 is
-% the section type for xrefs (Ynumbered, Ynothing, Yappendix), #4 is the
-% section number.
-%
-\def\sectionheading#1#2#3#4{%
-  {%
-    % Switch to the right set of fonts.
-    \csname #2fonts\endcsname \rm
-    %
-    % Insert space above the heading.
-    \csname #2headingbreak\endcsname
-    %
-    % Only insert the space after the number if we have a section number.
-    \def\sectionlevel{#2}%
-    \def\temptype{#3}%
-    %
-    \ifx\temptype\Ynothingkeyword
-      \setbox0 = \hbox{}%
-      \def\toctype{unn}%
-      \gdef\thissection{#1}%
-    \else\ifx\temptype\Yomitfromtockeyword
-      % for @headings -- no section number, don't include in toc,
-      % and don't redefine \thissection.
-      \setbox0 = \hbox{}%
-      \def\toctype{omit}%
-      \let\sectionlevel=\empty
-    \else\ifx\temptype\Yappendixkeyword
-      \setbox0 = \hbox{#4\enspace}%
-      \def\toctype{app}%
-      \gdef\thissection{#1}%
-    \else
-      \setbox0 = \hbox{#4\enspace}%
-      \def\toctype{num}%
-      \gdef\thissection{#1}%
-    \fi\fi\fi
-    %
-    % Write the toc entry (before \donoderef).  See comments in \chapmacro.
-    \writetocentry{\toctype\sectionlevel}{#1}{#4}%
-    %
-    % Write the node reference (= pdf destination for pdftex).
-    % Again, see comments in \chapmacro.
-    \donoderef{#3}%
-    %
-    % Interline glue will be inserted when the vbox is completed.
-    % That glue will be a valid breakpoint for the page, since it'll be
-    % preceded by a whatsit (usually from the \donoderef, or from the
-    % \writetocentry if there was no node).  We don't want to allow that
-    % break, since then the whatsits could end up on page n while the
-    % section is on page n+1, thus toc/etc. are wrong.  Debian bug 276000.
-    \nobreak
-    %
-    % Output the actual section heading.
-    \vbox{\hyphenpenalty=10000 \tolerance=5000 \parindent=0pt \raggedright
-          \hangindent=\wd0  % zero if no section number
-          \unhbox0 #1}%
-  }%
-  % Add extra space after the heading -- half of whatever came above it.
-  % Don't allow stretch, though.
-  \kern .5 \csname #2headingskip\endcsname
-  %
-  % Do not let the kern be a potential breakpoint, as it would be if it
-  % was followed by glue.
-  \nobreak
-  %
-  % We'll almost certainly start a paragraph next, so don't let that
-  % glue accumulate.  (Not a breakpoint because it's preceded by a
-  % discardable item.)
-  \vskip-\parskip
-  % 
-  % This is purely so the last item on the list is a known \penalty >
-  % 10000.  This is so \startdefun can avoid allowing breakpoints after
-  % section headings.  Otherwise, it would insert a valid breakpoint between:
-  % 
-  %   @section sec-whatever
-  %   @deffn def-whatever
-  \penalty 10001
-}
-
-
-\message{toc,}
-% Table of contents.
-\newwrite\tocfile
-
-% Write an entry to the toc file, opening it if necessary.
-% Called from @chapter, etc.
-%
-% Example usage: \writetocentry{sec}{Section Name}{\the\chapno.\the\secno}
-% We append the current node name (if any) and page number as additional
-% arguments for the \{chap,sec,...}entry macros which will eventually
-% read this.  The node name is used in the pdf outlines as the
-% destination to jump to.
-%
-% We open the .toc file for writing here instead of at @setfilename (or
-% any other fixed time) so that @contents can be anywhere in the document.
-% But if #1 is `omit', then we don't do anything.  This is used for the
-% table of contents chapter openings themselves.
-%
-\newif\iftocfileopened
-\def\omitkeyword{omit}%
-%
-\def\writetocentry#1#2#3{%
-  \edef\writetoctype{#1}%
-  \ifx\writetoctype\omitkeyword \else
-    \iftocfileopened\else
-      \immediate\openout\tocfile = \jobname.toc
-      \global\tocfileopenedtrue
-    \fi
-    %
-    \iflinks
-      {\atdummies
-       \edef\temp{%
-         \write\tocfile{@#1entry{#2}{#3}{\lastnode}{\noexpand\folio}}}%
-       \temp
-      }%
-    \fi
-  \fi
-  %
-  % Tell \shipout to create a pdf destination on each page, if we're
-  % writing pdf.  These are used in the table of contents.  We can't
-  % just write one on every page because the title pages are numbered
-  % 1 and 2 (the page numbers aren't printed), and so are the first
-  % two pages of the document.  Thus, we'd have two destinations named
-  % `1', and two named `2'.
-  \ifpdf \global\pdfmakepagedesttrue \fi
-}
-
-
-% These characters do not print properly in the Computer Modern roman
-% fonts, so we must take special care.  This is more or less redundant
-% with the Texinfo input format setup at the end of this file.
-% 
-\def\activecatcodes{%
-  \catcode`\"=\active
-  \catcode`\$=\active
-  \catcode`\<=\active
-  \catcode`\>=\active
-  \catcode`\\=\active
-  \catcode`\^=\active
-  \catcode`\_=\active
-  \catcode`\|=\active
-  \catcode`\~=\active
-}
-
-
-% Read the toc file, which is essentially Texinfo input.
-\def\readtocfile{%
-  \setupdatafile
-  \activecatcodes
-  \input \jobname.toc
-}
-
-\newskip\contentsrightmargin \contentsrightmargin=1in
-\newcount\savepageno
-\newcount\lastnegativepageno \lastnegativepageno = -1
-
-% Prepare to read what we've written to \tocfile.
-%
-\def\startcontents#1{%
-  % If @setchapternewpage on, and @headings double, the contents should
-  % start on an odd page, unlike chapters.  Thus, we maintain
-  % \contentsalignmacro in parallel with \pagealignmacro.
-  % From: Torbjorn Granlund <tege@matematik.su.se>
-  \contentsalignmacro
-  \immediate\closeout\tocfile
-  %
-  % Don't need to put `Contents' or `Short Contents' in the headline.
-  % It is abundantly clear what they are.
-  \def\thischapter{}%
-  \chapmacro{#1}{Yomitfromtoc}{}%
-  %
-  \savepageno = \pageno
-  \begingroup                  % Set up to handle contents files properly.
-    \raggedbottom              % Worry more about breakpoints than the bottom.
-    \advance\hsize by -\contentsrightmargin % Don't use the full line length.
-    %
-    % Roman numerals for page numbers.
-    \ifnum \pageno>0 \global\pageno = \lastnegativepageno \fi
-}
-
-
-% Normal (long) toc.
-\def\contents{%
-  \startcontents{\putwordTOC}%
-    \openin 1 \jobname.toc
-    \ifeof 1 \else
-      \readtocfile
-    \fi
-    \vfill \eject
-    \contentsalignmacro % in case @setchapternewpage odd is in effect
-    \ifeof 1 \else
-      \pdfmakeoutlines
-    \fi
-    \closein 1
-  \endgroup
-  \lastnegativepageno = \pageno
-  \global\pageno = \savepageno
-}
-
-% And just the chapters.
-\def\summarycontents{%
-  \startcontents{\putwordShortTOC}%
-    %
-    \let\numchapentry = \shortchapentry
-    \let\appentry = \shortchapentry
-    \let\unnchapentry = \shortunnchapentry
-    % We want a true roman here for the page numbers.
-    \secfonts
-    \let\rm=\shortcontrm \let\bf=\shortcontbf
-    \let\sl=\shortcontsl \let\tt=\shortconttt
-    \rm
-    \hyphenpenalty = 10000
-    \advance\baselineskip by 1pt % Open it up a little.
-    \def\numsecentry##1##2##3##4{}
-    \let\appsecentry = \numsecentry
-    \let\unnsecentry = \numsecentry
-    \let\numsubsecentry = \numsecentry
-    \let\appsubsecentry = \numsecentry
-    \let\unnsubsecentry = \numsecentry
-    \let\numsubsubsecentry = \numsecentry
-    \let\appsubsubsecentry = \numsecentry
-    \let\unnsubsubsecentry = \numsecentry
-    \openin 1 \jobname.toc
-    \ifeof 1 \else
-      \readtocfile
-    \fi
-    \closein 1
-    \vfill \eject
-    \contentsalignmacro % in case @setchapternewpage odd is in effect
-  \endgroup
-  \lastnegativepageno = \pageno
-  \global\pageno = \savepageno
-}
-\let\shortcontents = \summarycontents
-
-% Typeset the label for a chapter or appendix for the short contents.
-% The arg is, e.g., `A' for an appendix, or `3' for a chapter.
-%
-\def\shortchaplabel#1{%
-  % This space should be enough, since a single number is .5em, and the
-  % widest letter (M) is 1em, at least in the Computer Modern fonts.
-  % But use \hss just in case.
-  % (This space doesn't include the extra space that gets added after
-  % the label; that gets put in by \shortchapentry above.)
-  %
-  % We'd like to right-justify chapter numbers, but that looks strange
-  % with appendix letters.  And right-justifying numbers and
-  % left-justifying letters looks strange when there is less than 10
-  % chapters.  Have to read the whole toc once to know how many chapters
-  % there are before deciding ...
-  \hbox to 1em{#1\hss}%
-}
-
-% These macros generate individual entries in the table of contents.
-% The first argument is the chapter or section name.
-% The last argument is the page number.
-% The arguments in between are the chapter number, section number, ...
-
-% Chapters, in the main contents.
-\def\numchapentry#1#2#3#4{\dochapentry{#2\labelspace#1}{#4}}
-%
-% Chapters, in the short toc.
-% See comments in \dochapentry re vbox and related settings.
-\def\shortchapentry#1#2#3#4{%
-  \tocentry{\shortchaplabel{#2}\labelspace #1}{\doshortpageno\bgroup#4\egroup}%
-}
-
-% Appendices, in the main contents.
-% Need the word Appendix, and a fixed-size box.
-%
-\def\appendixbox#1{%
-  % We use M since it's probably the widest letter.
-  \setbox0 = \hbox{\putwordAppendix{} M}%
-  \hbox to \wd0{\putwordAppendix{} #1\hss}}
-%
-\def\appentry#1#2#3#4{\dochapentry{\appendixbox{#2}\labelspace#1}{#4}}
-
-% Unnumbered chapters.
-\def\unnchapentry#1#2#3#4{\dochapentry{#1}{#4}}
-\def\shortunnchapentry#1#2#3#4{\tocentry{#1}{\doshortpageno\bgroup#4\egroup}}
-
-% Sections.
-\def\numsecentry#1#2#3#4{\dosecentry{#2\labelspace#1}{#4}}
-\let\appsecentry=\numsecentry
-\def\unnsecentry#1#2#3#4{\dosecentry{#1}{#4}}
-
-% Subsections.
-\def\numsubsecentry#1#2#3#4{\dosubsecentry{#2\labelspace#1}{#4}}
-\let\appsubsecentry=\numsubsecentry
-\def\unnsubsecentry#1#2#3#4{\dosubsecentry{#1}{#4}}
-
-% And subsubsections.
-\def\numsubsubsecentry#1#2#3#4{\dosubsubsecentry{#2\labelspace#1}{#4}}
-\let\appsubsubsecentry=\numsubsubsecentry
-\def\unnsubsubsecentry#1#2#3#4{\dosubsubsecentry{#1}{#4}}
-
-% This parameter controls the indentation of the various levels.
-% Same as \defaultparindent.
-\newdimen\tocindent \tocindent = 15pt
-
-% Now for the actual typesetting. In all these, #1 is the text and #2 is the
-% page number.
-%
-% If the toc has to be broken over pages, we want it to be at chapters
-% if at all possible; hence the \penalty.
-\def\dochapentry#1#2{%
-   \penalty-300 \vskip1\baselineskip plus.33\baselineskip minus.25\baselineskip
-   \begingroup
-     \chapentryfonts
-     \tocentry{#1}{\dopageno\bgroup#2\egroup}%
-   \endgroup
-   \nobreak\vskip .25\baselineskip plus.1\baselineskip
-}
-
-\def\dosecentry#1#2{\begingroup
-  \secentryfonts \leftskip=\tocindent
-  \tocentry{#1}{\dopageno\bgroup#2\egroup}%
-\endgroup}
-
-\def\dosubsecentry#1#2{\begingroup
-  \subsecentryfonts \leftskip=2\tocindent
-  \tocentry{#1}{\dopageno\bgroup#2\egroup}%
-\endgroup}
-
-\def\dosubsubsecentry#1#2{\begingroup
-  \subsubsecentryfonts \leftskip=3\tocindent
-  \tocentry{#1}{\dopageno\bgroup#2\egroup}%
-\endgroup}
-
-% We use the same \entry macro as for the index entries.
-\let\tocentry = \entry
-
-% Space between chapter (or whatever) number and the title.
-\def\labelspace{\hskip1em \relax}
-
-\def\dopageno#1{{\rm #1}}
-\def\doshortpageno#1{{\rm #1}}
-
-\def\chapentryfonts{\secfonts \rm}
-\def\secentryfonts{\textfonts}
-\def\subsecentryfonts{\textfonts}
-\def\subsubsecentryfonts{\textfonts}
-
-
-\message{environments,}
-% @foo ... @end foo.
-
-% @point{}, @result{}, @expansion{}, @print{}, @equiv{}.
-%
-% Since these characters are used in examples, it should be an even number of
-% \tt widths. Each \tt character is 1en, so two makes it 1em.
-%
-\def\point{$\star$}
-\def\result{\leavevmode\raise.15ex\hbox to 1em{\hfil$\Rightarrow$\hfil}}
-\def\expansion{\leavevmode\raise.1ex\hbox to 1em{\hfil$\mapsto$\hfil}}
-\def\print{\leavevmode\lower.1ex\hbox to 1em{\hfil$\dashv$\hfil}}
-\def\equiv{\leavevmode\lower.1ex\hbox to 1em{\hfil$\ptexequiv$\hfil}}
-
-% The @error{} command.
-% Adapted from the TeXbook's \boxit.
-%
-\newbox\errorbox
-%
-{\tentt \global\dimen0 = 3em}% Width of the box.
-\dimen2 = .55pt % Thickness of rules
-% The text. (`r' is open on the right, `e' somewhat less so on the left.)
-\setbox0 = \hbox{\kern-.75pt \reducedsf error\kern-1.5pt}
-%
-\setbox\errorbox=\hbox to \dimen0{\hfil
-   \hsize = \dimen0 \advance\hsize by -5.8pt % Space to left+right.
-   \advance\hsize by -2\dimen2 % Rules.
-   \vbox{%
-      \hrule height\dimen2
-      \hbox{\vrule width\dimen2 \kern3pt          % Space to left of text.
-         \vtop{\kern2.4pt \box0 \kern2.4pt}% Space above/below.
-         \kern3pt\vrule width\dimen2}% Space to right.
-      \hrule height\dimen2}
-    \hfil}
-%
-\def\error{\leavevmode\lower.7ex\copy\errorbox}
-
-% @tex ... @end tex    escapes into raw Tex temporarily.
-% One exception: @ is still an escape character, so that @end tex works.
-% But \@ or @@ will get a plain tex @ character.
-
-\envdef\tex{%
-  \catcode `\\=0 \catcode `\{=1 \catcode `\}=2
-  \catcode `\$=3 \catcode `\&=4 \catcode `\#=6
-  \catcode `\^=7 \catcode `\_=8 \catcode `\~=\active \let~=\tie
-  \catcode `\%=14
-  \catcode `\+=\other
-  \catcode `\"=\other
-  \catcode `\|=\other
-  \catcode `\<=\other
-  \catcode `\>=\other
-  \escapechar=`\\
-  %
-  \let\b=\ptexb
-  \let\bullet=\ptexbullet
-  \let\c=\ptexc
-  \let\,=\ptexcomma
-  \let\.=\ptexdot
-  \let\dots=\ptexdots
-  \let\equiv=\ptexequiv
-  \let\!=\ptexexclam
-  \let\i=\ptexi
-  \let\indent=\ptexindent
-  \let\noindent=\ptexnoindent
-  \let\{=\ptexlbrace
-  \let\+=\tabalign
-  \let\}=\ptexrbrace
-  \let\/=\ptexslash
-  \let\*=\ptexstar
-  \let\t=\ptext
-  \let\frenchspacing=\plainfrenchspacing
-  %
-  \def\endldots{\mathinner{\ldots\ldots\ldots\ldots}}%
-  \def\enddots{\relax\ifmmode\endldots\else$\mathsurround=0pt \endldots\,$\fi}%
-  \def\@{@}%
-}
-% There is no need to define \Etex.
-
-% Define @lisp ... @end lisp.
-% @lisp environment forms a group so it can rebind things,
-% including the definition of @end lisp (which normally is erroneous).
-
-% Amount to narrow the margins by for @lisp.
-\newskip\lispnarrowing \lispnarrowing=0.4in
-
-% This is the definition that ^^M gets inside @lisp, @example, and other
-% such environments.  \null is better than a space, since it doesn't
-% have any width.
-\def\lisppar{\null\endgraf}
-
-% This space is always present above and below environments.
-\newskip\envskipamount \envskipamount = 0pt
-
-% Make spacing and below environment symmetrical.  We use \parskip here
-% to help in doing that, since in @example-like environments \parskip
-% is reset to zero; thus the \afterenvbreak inserts no space -- but the
-% start of the next paragraph will insert \parskip.
-%
-\def\aboveenvbreak{{%
-  % =10000 instead of <10000 because of a special case in \itemzzz and
-  % \sectionheading, q.v.
-  \ifnum \lastpenalty=10000 \else
-    \advance\envskipamount by \parskip
-    \endgraf
-    \ifdim\lastskip<\envskipamount
-      \removelastskip
-      % it's not a good place to break if the last penalty was \nobreak
-      % or better ...
-      \ifnum\lastpenalty<10000 \penalty-50 \fi
-      \vskip\envskipamount
-    \fi
-  \fi
-}}
-
-\let\afterenvbreak = \aboveenvbreak
-
-% \nonarrowing is a flag.  If "set", @lisp etc don't narrow margins; it will
-% also clear it, so that its embedded environments do the narrowing again.
-\let\nonarrowing=\relax
-
-% @cartouche ... @end cartouche: draw rectangle w/rounded corners around
-% environment contents.
-\font\circle=lcircle10
-\newdimen\circthick
-\newdimen\cartouter\newdimen\cartinner
-\newskip\normbskip\newskip\normpskip\newskip\normlskip
-\circthick=\fontdimen8\circle
-%
-\def\ctl{{\circle\char'013\hskip -6pt}}% 6pt from pl file: 1/2charwidth
-\def\ctr{{\hskip 6pt\circle\char'010}}
-\def\cbl{{\circle\char'012\hskip -6pt}}
-\def\cbr{{\hskip 6pt\circle\char'011}}
-\def\carttop{\hbox to \cartouter{\hskip\lskip
-        \ctl\leaders\hrule height\circthick\hfil\ctr
-        \hskip\rskip}}
-\def\cartbot{\hbox to \cartouter{\hskip\lskip
-        \cbl\leaders\hrule height\circthick\hfil\cbr
-        \hskip\rskip}}
-%
-\newskip\lskip\newskip\rskip
-
-\envdef\cartouche{%
-  \ifhmode\par\fi  % can't be in the midst of a paragraph.
-  \startsavinginserts
-  \lskip=\leftskip \rskip=\rightskip
-  \leftskip=0pt\rightskip=0pt % we want these *outside*.
-  \cartinner=\hsize \advance\cartinner by-\lskip
-  \advance\cartinner by-\rskip
-  \cartouter=\hsize
-  \advance\cartouter by 18.4pt	% allow for 3pt kerns on either
-				% side, and for 6pt waste from
-				% each corner char, and rule thickness
-  \normbskip=\baselineskip \normpskip=\parskip \normlskip=\lineskip
-  % Flag to tell @lisp, etc., not to narrow margin.
-  \let\nonarrowing = t%
-  \vbox\bgroup
-      \baselineskip=0pt\parskip=0pt\lineskip=0pt
-      \carttop
-      \hbox\bgroup
-	  \hskip\lskip
-	  \vrule\kern3pt
-	  \vbox\bgroup
-	      \kern3pt
-	      \hsize=\cartinner
-	      \baselineskip=\normbskip
-	      \lineskip=\normlskip
-	      \parskip=\normpskip
-	      \vskip -\parskip
-	      \comment % For explanation, see the end of \def\group.
-}
-\def\Ecartouche{%
-              \ifhmode\par\fi
-	      \kern3pt
-	  \egroup
-	  \kern3pt\vrule
-	  \hskip\rskip
-      \egroup
-      \cartbot
-  \egroup
-  \checkinserts
-}
-
-
-% This macro is called at the beginning of all the @example variants,
-% inside a group.
-\def\nonfillstart{%
-  \aboveenvbreak
-  \hfuzz = 12pt % Don't be fussy
-  \sepspaces % Make spaces be word-separators rather than space tokens.
-  \let\par = \lisppar % don't ignore blank lines
-  \obeylines % each line of input is a line of output
-  \parskip = 0pt
-  \parindent = 0pt
-  \emergencystretch = 0pt % don't try to avoid overfull boxes
-  \ifx\nonarrowing\relax
-    \advance \leftskip by \lispnarrowing
-    \exdentamount=\lispnarrowing
-  \else
-    \let\nonarrowing = \relax
-  \fi
-  \let\exdent=\nofillexdent
-}
-
-% If you want all examples etc. small: @set dispenvsize small.
-% If you want even small examples the full size: @set dispenvsize nosmall.
-% This affects the following displayed environments:
-%    @example, @display, @format, @lisp
-%
-\def\smallword{small}
-\def\nosmallword{nosmall}
-\let\SETdispenvsize\relax
-\def\setnormaldispenv{%
-  \ifx\SETdispenvsize\smallword
-    % end paragraph for sake of leading, in case document has no blank
-    % line.  This is redundant with what happens in \aboveenvbreak, but
-    % we need to do it before changing the fonts, and it's inconvenient
-    % to change the fonts afterward.
-    \ifnum \lastpenalty=10000 \else \endgraf \fi
-    \smallexamplefonts \rm
-  \fi
-}
-\def\setsmalldispenv{%
-  \ifx\SETdispenvsize\nosmallword
-  \else
-    \ifnum \lastpenalty=10000 \else \endgraf \fi
-    \smallexamplefonts \rm
-  \fi
-}
-
-% We often define two environments, @foo and @smallfoo.
-% Let's do it by one command:
-\def\makedispenv #1#2{
-  \expandafter\envdef\csname#1\endcsname {\setnormaldispenv #2}
-  \expandafter\envdef\csname small#1\endcsname {\setsmalldispenv #2}
-  \expandafter\let\csname E#1\endcsname \afterenvbreak
-  \expandafter\let\csname Esmall#1\endcsname \afterenvbreak
-}
-
-% Define two synonyms:
-\def\maketwodispenvs #1#2#3{
-  \makedispenv{#1}{#3}
-  \makedispenv{#2}{#3}
-}
-
-% @lisp: indented, narrowed, typewriter font; @example: same as @lisp.
-%
-% @smallexample and @smalllisp: use smaller fonts.
-% Originally contributed by Pavel@xerox.
-%
-\maketwodispenvs {lisp}{example}{%
-  \nonfillstart
-  \tt\quoteexpand
-  \let\kbdfont = \kbdexamplefont % Allow @kbd to do something special.
-  \gobble       % eat return
-}
-% @display/@smalldisplay: same as @lisp except keep current font.
-%
-\makedispenv {display}{%
-  \nonfillstart
-  \gobble
-}
-
-% @format/@smallformat: same as @display except don't narrow margins.
-%
-\makedispenv{format}{%
-  \let\nonarrowing = t%
-  \nonfillstart
-  \gobble
-}
-
-% @flushleft: same as @format, but doesn't obey \SETdispenvsize.
-\envdef\flushleft{%
-  \let\nonarrowing = t%
-  \nonfillstart
-  \gobble
-}
-\let\Eflushleft = \afterenvbreak
-
-% @flushright.
-%
-\envdef\flushright{%
-  \let\nonarrowing = t%
-  \nonfillstart
-  \advance\leftskip by 0pt plus 1fill
-  \gobble
-}
-\let\Eflushright = \afterenvbreak
-
-
-% @quotation does normal linebreaking (hence we can't use \nonfillstart)
-% and narrows the margins.  We keep \parskip nonzero in general, since
-% we're doing normal filling.  So, when using \aboveenvbreak and
-% \afterenvbreak, temporarily make \parskip 0.
-%
-\envdef\quotation{%
-  {\parskip=0pt \aboveenvbreak}% because \aboveenvbreak inserts \parskip
-  \parindent=0pt
-  %
-  % @cartouche defines \nonarrowing to inhibit narrowing at next level down.
-  \ifx\nonarrowing\relax
-    \advance\leftskip by \lispnarrowing
-    \advance\rightskip by \lispnarrowing
-    \exdentamount = \lispnarrowing
-  \else
-    \let\nonarrowing = \relax
-  \fi
-  \parsearg\quotationlabel
-}
-
-% We have retained a nonzero parskip for the environment, since we're
-% doing normal filling.
-%
-\def\Equotation{%
-  \par
-  \ifx\quotationauthor\undefined\else
-    % indent a bit.
-    \leftline{\kern 2\leftskip \sl ---\quotationauthor}%
-  \fi
-  {\parskip=0pt \afterenvbreak}%
-}
-
-% If we're given an argument, typeset it in bold with a colon after.
-\def\quotationlabel#1{%
-  \def\temp{#1}%
-  \ifx\temp\empty \else
-    {\bf #1: }%
-  \fi
-}
-
-
-% LaTeX-like @verbatim...@end verbatim and @verb{<char>...<char>}
-% If we want to allow any <char> as delimiter,
-% we need the curly braces so that makeinfo sees the @verb command, eg:
-% `@verbx...x' would look like the '@verbx' command.  --janneke@gnu.org
-%
-% [Knuth]: Donald Ervin Knuth, 1996.  The TeXbook.
-%
-% [Knuth] p.344; only we need to do the other characters Texinfo sets
-% active too.  Otherwise, they get lost as the first character on a
-% verbatim line.
-\def\dospecials{%
-  \do\ \do\\\do\{\do\}\do\$\do\&%
-  \do\#\do\^\do\^^K\do\_\do\^^A\do\%\do\~%
-  \do\<\do\>\do\|\do\@\do+\do\"%
-}
-%
-% [Knuth] p. 380
-\def\uncatcodespecials{%
-  \def\do##1{\catcode`##1=\other}\dospecials}
-%
-% [Knuth] pp. 380,381,391
-% Disable Spanish ligatures ?` and !` of \tt font
-\begingroup
-  \catcode`\`=\active\gdef`{\relax\lq}
-\endgroup
-%
-% Setup for the @verb command.
-%
-% Eight spaces for a tab
-\begingroup
-  \catcode`\^^I=\active
-  \gdef\tabeightspaces{\catcode`\^^I=\active\def^^I{\ \ \ \ \ \ \ \ }}
-\endgroup
-%
-\def\setupverb{%
-  \tt  % easiest (and conventionally used) font for verbatim
-  \def\par{\leavevmode\endgraf}%
-  \catcode`\`=\active
-  \tabeightspaces
-  % Respect line breaks,
-  % print special symbols as themselves, and
-  % make each space count
-  % must do in this order:
-  \obeylines \uncatcodespecials \sepspaces
-}
-
-% Setup for the @verbatim environment
-%
-% Real tab expansion
-\newdimen\tabw \setbox0=\hbox{\tt\space} \tabw=8\wd0 % tab amount
-%
-\def\starttabbox{\setbox0=\hbox\bgroup}
-
-% Allow an option to not replace quotes with a regular directed right
-% quote/apostrophe (char 0x27), but instead use the undirected quote
-% from cmtt (char 0x0d).  The undirected quote is ugly, so don't make it
-% the default, but it works for pasting with more pdf viewers (at least
-% evince), the lilypond developers report.  xpdf does work with the
-% regular 0x27.  
-% 
-\def\codequoteright{%
-  \expandafter\ifx\csname SETcodequoteundirected\endcsname\relax
-    '%
-  \else
-    \char'15
-  \fi
-}
-%
-% and a similar option for the left quote char vs. a grave accent.
-% Modern fonts display ASCII 0x60 as a grave accent, so some people like
-% the code environments to do likewise.
-% 
-\def\codequoteleft{%
-  \expandafter\ifx\csname SETcodequotebacktick\endcsname\relax
-    `%
-  \else
-    \char'22
-  \fi
-}
-%
-\begingroup
-  \catcode`\^^I=\active
-  \gdef\tabexpand{%
-    \catcode`\^^I=\active
-    \def^^I{\leavevmode\egroup
-      \dimen0=\wd0 % the width so far, or since the previous tab
-      \divide\dimen0 by\tabw
-      \multiply\dimen0 by\tabw % compute previous multiple of \tabw
-      \advance\dimen0 by\tabw  % advance to next multiple of \tabw
-      \wd0=\dimen0 \box0 \starttabbox
-    }%
-  }
-  \catcode`\'=\active
-  \gdef\rquoteexpand{\catcode\rquoteChar=\active \def'{\codequoteright}}%
-  %
-  \catcode`\`=\active
-  \gdef\lquoteexpand{\catcode\lquoteChar=\active \def`{\codequoteleft}}%
-  %
-  \gdef\quoteexpand{\rquoteexpand \lquoteexpand}%
-\endgroup
-
-% start the verbatim environment.
-\def\setupverbatim{%
-  \let\nonarrowing = t%
-  \nonfillstart
-  % Easiest (and conventionally used) font for verbatim
-  \tt
-  \def\par{\leavevmode\egroup\box0\endgraf}%
-  \catcode`\`=\active
-  \tabexpand
-  \quoteexpand
-  % Respect line breaks,
-  % print special symbols as themselves, and
-  % make each space count
-  % must do in this order:
-  \obeylines \uncatcodespecials \sepspaces
-  \everypar{\starttabbox}%
-}
-
-% Do the @verb magic: verbatim text is quoted by unique
-% delimiter characters.  Before first delimiter expect a
-% right brace, after last delimiter expect closing brace:
-%
-%    \def\doverb'{'<char>#1<char>'}'{#1}
-%
-% [Knuth] p. 382; only eat outer {}
-\begingroup
-  \catcode`[=1\catcode`]=2\catcode`\{=\other\catcode`\}=\other
-  \gdef\doverb{#1[\def\next##1#1}[##1\endgroup]\next]
-\endgroup
-%
-\def\verb{\begingroup\setupverb\doverb}
-%
-%
-% Do the @verbatim magic: define the macro \doverbatim so that
-% the (first) argument ends when '@end verbatim' is reached, ie:
-%
-%     \def\doverbatim#1@end verbatim{#1}
-%
-% For Texinfo it's a lot easier than for LaTeX,
-% because texinfo's \verbatim doesn't stop at '\end{verbatim}':
-% we need not redefine '\', '{' and '}'.
-%
-% Inspired by LaTeX's verbatim command set [latex.ltx]
-%
-\begingroup
-  \catcode`\ =\active
-  \obeylines %
-  % ignore everything up to the first ^^M, that's the newline at the end
-  % of the @verbatim input line itself.  Otherwise we get an extra blank
-  % line in the output.
-  \xdef\doverbatim#1^^M#2@end verbatim{#2\noexpand\end\gobble verbatim}%
-  % We really want {...\end verbatim} in the body of the macro, but
-  % without the active space; thus we have to use \xdef and \gobble.
-\endgroup
-%
-\envdef\verbatim{%
-    \setupverbatim\doverbatim
-}
-\let\Everbatim = \afterenvbreak
-
-
-% @verbatiminclude FILE - insert text of file in verbatim environment.
-%
-\def\verbatiminclude{\parseargusing\filenamecatcodes\doverbatiminclude}
-%
-\def\doverbatiminclude#1{%
-  {%
-    \makevalueexpandable
-    \setupverbatim
-    \input #1
-    \afterenvbreak
-  }%
-}
-
-% @copying ... @end copying.
-% Save the text away for @insertcopying later.
-%
-% We save the uninterpreted tokens, rather than creating a box.
-% Saving the text in a box would be much easier, but then all the
-% typesetting commands (@smallbook, font changes, etc.) have to be done
-% beforehand -- and a) we want @copying to be done first in the source
-% file; b) letting users define the frontmatter in as flexible order as
-% possible is very desirable.
-%
-\def\copying{\checkenv{}\begingroup\scanargctxt\docopying}
-\def\docopying#1@end copying{\endgroup\def\copyingtext{#1}}
-%
-\def\insertcopying{%
-  \begingroup
-    \parindent = 0pt  % paragraph indentation looks wrong on title page
-    \scanexp\copyingtext
-  \endgroup
-}
-
-
-\message{defuns,}
-% @defun etc.
-
-\newskip\defbodyindent \defbodyindent=.4in
-\newskip\defargsindent \defargsindent=50pt
-\newskip\deflastargmargin \deflastargmargin=18pt
-\newcount\defunpenalty
-
-% Start the processing of @deffn:
-\def\startdefun{%
-  \ifnum\lastpenalty<10000
-    \medbreak
-    \defunpenalty=10003 % Will keep this @deffn together with the
-                        % following @def command, see below.
-  \else
-    % If there are two @def commands in a row, we'll have a \nobreak,
-    % which is there to keep the function description together with its
-    % header.  But if there's nothing but headers, we need to allow a
-    % break somewhere.  Check specifically for penalty 10002, inserted
-    % by \printdefunline, instead of 10000, since the sectioning
-    % commands also insert a nobreak penalty, and we don't want to allow
-    % a break between a section heading and a defun.
-    %
-    % As a minor refinement, we avoid "club" headers by signalling
-    % with penalty of 10003 after the very first @deffn in the
-    % sequence (see above), and penalty of 10002 after any following
-    % @def command.
-    \ifnum\lastpenalty=10002 \penalty2000 \else \defunpenalty=10002 \fi
-    %
-    % Similarly, after a section heading, do not allow a break.
-    % But do insert the glue.
-    \medskip  % preceded by discardable penalty, so not a breakpoint
-  \fi
-  %
-  \parindent=0in
-  \advance\leftskip by \defbodyindent
-  \exdentamount=\defbodyindent
-}
-
-\def\dodefunx#1{%
-  % First, check whether we are in the right environment:
-  \checkenv#1%
-  %
-  % As above, allow line break if we have multiple x headers in a row.
-  % It's not a great place, though.
-  \ifnum\lastpenalty=10002 \penalty3000 \else \defunpenalty=10002 \fi
-  %
-  % And now, it's time to reuse the body of the original defun:
-  \expandafter\gobbledefun#1%
-}
-\def\gobbledefun#1\startdefun{}
-
-% \printdefunline \deffnheader{text}
-%
-\def\printdefunline#1#2{%
-  \begingroup
-    % call \deffnheader:
-    #1#2 \endheader
-    % common ending:
-    \interlinepenalty = 10000
-    \advance\rightskip by 0pt plus 1fil
-    \endgraf
-    \nobreak\vskip -\parskip
-    \penalty\defunpenalty  % signal to \startdefun and \dodefunx
-    % Some of the @defun-type tags do not enable magic parentheses,
-    % rendering the following check redundant.  But we don't optimize.
-    \checkparencounts
-  \endgroup
-}
-
-\def\Edefun{\endgraf\medbreak}
-
-% \makedefun{deffn} creates \deffn, \deffnx and \Edeffn;
-% the only thing remainnig is to define \deffnheader.
-%
-\def\makedefun#1{%
-  \expandafter\let\csname E#1\endcsname = \Edefun
-  \edef\temp{\noexpand\domakedefun
-    \makecsname{#1}\makecsname{#1x}\makecsname{#1header}}%
-  \temp
-}
-
-% \domakedefun \deffn \deffnx \deffnheader
-%
-% Define \deffn and \deffnx, without parameters.
-% \deffnheader has to be defined explicitly.
-%
-\def\domakedefun#1#2#3{%
-  \envdef#1{%
-    \startdefun
-    \parseargusing\activeparens{\printdefunline#3}%
-  }%
-  \def#2{\dodefunx#1}%
-  \def#3%
-}
-
-%%% Untyped functions:
-
-% @deffn category name args
-\makedefun{deffn}{\deffngeneral{}}
-
-% @deffn category class name args
-\makedefun{defop}#1 {\defopon{#1\ \putwordon}}
-
-% \defopon {category on}class name args
-\def\defopon#1#2 {\deffngeneral{\putwordon\ \code{#2}}{#1\ \code{#2}} }
-
-% \deffngeneral {subind}category name args
-%
-\def\deffngeneral#1#2 #3 #4\endheader{%
-  % Remember that \dosubind{fn}{foo}{} is equivalent to \doind{fn}{foo}.
-  \dosubind{fn}{\code{#3}}{#1}%
-  \defname{#2}{}{#3}\magicamp\defunargs{#4\unskip}%
-}
-
-%%% Typed functions:
-
-% @deftypefn category type name args
-\makedefun{deftypefn}{\deftypefngeneral{}}
-
-% @deftypeop category class type name args
-\makedefun{deftypeop}#1 {\deftypeopon{#1\ \putwordon}}
-
-% \deftypeopon {category on}class type name args
-\def\deftypeopon#1#2 {\deftypefngeneral{\putwordon\ \code{#2}}{#1\ \code{#2}} }
-
-% \deftypefngeneral {subind}category type name args
-%
-\def\deftypefngeneral#1#2 #3 #4 #5\endheader{%
-  \dosubind{fn}{\code{#4}}{#1}%
-  \defname{#2}{#3}{#4}\defunargs{#5\unskip}%
-}
-
-%%% Typed variables:
-
-% @deftypevr category type var args
-\makedefun{deftypevr}{\deftypecvgeneral{}}
-
-% @deftypecv category class type var args
-\makedefun{deftypecv}#1 {\deftypecvof{#1\ \putwordof}}
-
-% \deftypecvof {category of}class type var args
-\def\deftypecvof#1#2 {\deftypecvgeneral{\putwordof\ \code{#2}}{#1\ \code{#2}} }
-
-% \deftypecvgeneral {subind}category type var args
-%
-\def\deftypecvgeneral#1#2 #3 #4 #5\endheader{%
-  \dosubind{vr}{\code{#4}}{#1}%
-  \defname{#2}{#3}{#4}\defunargs{#5\unskip}%
-}
-
-%%% Untyped variables:
-
-% @defvr category var args
-\makedefun{defvr}#1 {\deftypevrheader{#1} {} }
-
-% @defcv category class var args
-\makedefun{defcv}#1 {\defcvof{#1\ \putwordof}}
-
-% \defcvof {category of}class var args
-\def\defcvof#1#2 {\deftypecvof{#1}#2 {} }
-
-%%% Type:
-% @deftp category name args
-\makedefun{deftp}#1 #2 #3\endheader{%
-  \doind{tp}{\code{#2}}%
-  \defname{#1}{}{#2}\defunargs{#3\unskip}%
-}
-
-% Remaining @defun-like shortcuts:
-\makedefun{defun}{\deffnheader{\putwordDeffunc} }
-\makedefun{defmac}{\deffnheader{\putwordDefmac} }
-\makedefun{defspec}{\deffnheader{\putwordDefspec} }
-\makedefun{deftypefun}{\deftypefnheader{\putwordDeffunc} }
-\makedefun{defvar}{\defvrheader{\putwordDefvar} }
-\makedefun{defopt}{\defvrheader{\putwordDefopt} }
-\makedefun{deftypevar}{\deftypevrheader{\putwordDefvar} }
-\makedefun{defmethod}{\defopon\putwordMethodon}
-\makedefun{deftypemethod}{\deftypeopon\putwordMethodon}
-\makedefun{defivar}{\defcvof\putwordInstanceVariableof}
-\makedefun{deftypeivar}{\deftypecvof\putwordInstanceVariableof}
-
-% \defname, which formats the name of the @def (not the args).
-% #1 is the category, such as "Function".
-% #2 is the return type, if any.
-% #3 is the function name.
-%
-% We are followed by (but not passed) the arguments, if any.
-%
-\def\defname#1#2#3{%
-  % Get the values of \leftskip and \rightskip as they were outside the @def...
-  \advance\leftskip by -\defbodyindent
-  %
-  % How we'll format the type name.  Putting it in brackets helps
-  % distinguish it from the body text that may end up on the next line
-  % just below it.
-  \def\temp{#1}%
-  \setbox0=\hbox{\kern\deflastargmargin \ifx\temp\empty\else [\rm\temp]\fi}
-  %
-  % Figure out line sizes for the paragraph shape.
-  % The first line needs space for \box0; but if \rightskip is nonzero,
-  % we need only space for the part of \box0 which exceeds it:
-  \dimen0=\hsize  \advance\dimen0 by -\wd0  \advance\dimen0 by \rightskip
-  % The continuations:
-  \dimen2=\hsize  \advance\dimen2 by -\defargsindent
-  % (plain.tex says that \dimen1 should be used only as global.)
-  \parshape 2 0in \dimen0 \defargsindent \dimen2
-  %
-  % Put the type name to the right margin.
-  \noindent
-  \hbox to 0pt{%
-    \hfil\box0 \kern-\hsize
-    % \hsize has to be shortened this way:
-    \kern\leftskip
-    % Intentionally do not respect \rightskip, since we need the space.
-  }%
-  %
-  % Allow all lines to be underfull without complaint:
-  \tolerance=10000 \hbadness=10000
-  \exdentamount=\defbodyindent
-  {%
-    % defun fonts. We use typewriter by default (used to be bold) because:
-    % . we're printing identifiers, they should be in tt in principle.
-    % . in languages with many accents, such as Czech or French, it's
-    %   common to leave accents off identifiers.  The result looks ok in
-    %   tt, but exceedingly strange in rm.
-    % . we don't want -- and --- to be treated as ligatures.
-    % . this still does not fix the ?` and !` ligatures, but so far no
-    %   one has made identifiers using them :).
-    \df \tt
-    \def\temp{#2}% return value type
-    \ifx\temp\empty\else \tclose{\temp} \fi
-    #3% output function name
-  }%
-  {\rm\enskip}% hskip 0.5 em of \tenrm
-  %
-  \boldbrax
-  % arguments will be output next, if any.
-}
-
-% Print arguments in slanted roman (not ttsl), inconsistently with using
-% tt for the name.  This is because literal text is sometimes needed in
-% the argument list (groff manual), and ttsl and tt are not very
-% distinguishable.  Prevent hyphenation at `-' chars.
-%
-\def\defunargs#1{%
-  % use sl by default (not ttsl),
-  % tt for the names.
-  \df \sl \hyphenchar\font=0
-  %
-  % On the other hand, if an argument has two dashes (for instance), we
-  % want a way to get ttsl.  Let's try @var for that.
-  \let\var=\ttslanted
-  #1%
-  \sl\hyphenchar\font=45
-}
-
-% We want ()&[] to print specially on the defun line.
-%
-\def\activeparens{%
-  \catcode`\(=\active \catcode`\)=\active
-  \catcode`\[=\active \catcode`\]=\active
-  \catcode`\&=\active
-}
-
-% Make control sequences which act like normal parenthesis chars.
-\let\lparen = ( \let\rparen = )
-
-% Be sure that we always have a definition for `(', etc.  For example,
-% if the fn name has parens in it, \boldbrax will not be in effect yet,
-% so TeX would otherwise complain about undefined control sequence.
-{
-  \activeparens
-  \global\let(=\lparen \global\let)=\rparen
-  \global\let[=\lbrack \global\let]=\rbrack
-  \global\let& = \&
-
-  \gdef\boldbrax{\let(=\opnr\let)=\clnr\let[=\lbrb\let]=\rbrb}
-  \gdef\magicamp{\let&=\amprm}
-}
-
-\newcount\parencount
-
-% If we encounter &foo, then turn on ()-hacking afterwards
-\newif\ifampseen
-\def\amprm#1 {\ampseentrue{\bf\&#1 }}
-
-\def\parenfont{%
-  \ifampseen
-    % At the first level, print parens in roman,
-    % otherwise use the default font.
-    \ifnum \parencount=1 \rm \fi
-  \else
-    % The \sf parens (in \boldbrax) actually are a little bolder than
-    % the contained text.  This is especially needed for [ and ] .
-    \sf
-  \fi
-}
-\def\infirstlevel#1{%
-  \ifampseen
-    \ifnum\parencount=1
-      #1%
-    \fi
-  \fi
-}
-\def\bfafterword#1 {#1 \bf}
-
-\def\opnr{%
-  \global\advance\parencount by 1
-  {\parenfont(}%
-  \infirstlevel \bfafterword
-}
-\def\clnr{%
-  {\parenfont)}%
-  \infirstlevel \sl
-  \global\advance\parencount by -1
-}
-
-\newcount\brackcount
-\def\lbrb{%
-  \global\advance\brackcount by 1
-  {\bf[}%
-}
-\def\rbrb{%
-  {\bf]}%
-  \global\advance\brackcount by -1
-}
-
-\def\checkparencounts{%
-  \ifnum\parencount=0 \else \badparencount \fi
-  \ifnum\brackcount=0 \else \badbrackcount \fi
-}
-\def\badparencount{%
-  \errmessage{Unbalanced parentheses in @def}%
-  \global\parencount=0
-}
-\def\badbrackcount{%
-  \errmessage{Unbalanced square braces in @def}%
-  \global\brackcount=0
-}
-
-
-\message{macros,}
-% @macro.
-
-% To do this right we need a feature of e-TeX, \scantokens,
-% which we arrange to emulate with a temporary file in ordinary TeX.
-\ifx\eTeXversion\undefined
-  \newwrite\macscribble
-  \def\scantokens#1{%
-    \toks0={#1}%
-    \immediate\openout\macscribble=\jobname.tmp
-    \immediate\write\macscribble{\the\toks0}%
-    \immediate\closeout\macscribble
-    \input \jobname.tmp
-  }
-\fi
-
-\def\scanmacro#1{%
-  \begingroup
-    \newlinechar`\^^M
-    \let\xeatspaces\eatspaces
-    % Undo catcode changes of \startcontents and \doprintindex
-    % When called from @insertcopying or (short)caption, we need active
-    % backslash to get it printed correctly.  Previously, we had
-    % \catcode`\\=\other instead.  We'll see whether a problem appears
-    % with macro expansion.				--kasal, 19aug04
-    \catcode`\@=0 \catcode`\\=\active \escapechar=`\@
-    % ... and \example
-    \spaceisspace
-    %
-    % Append \endinput to make sure that TeX does not see the ending newline.
-    % I've verified that it is necessary both for e-TeX and for ordinary TeX
-    %							--kasal, 29nov03
-    \scantokens{#1\endinput}%
-  \endgroup
-}
-
-\def\scanexp#1{%
-  \edef\temp{\noexpand\scanmacro{#1}}%
-  \temp
-}
-
-\newcount\paramno   % Count of parameters
-\newtoks\macname    % Macro name
-\newif\ifrecursive  % Is it recursive?
-
-% List of all defined macros in the form
-%    \definedummyword\macro1\definedummyword\macro2...
-% Currently is also contains all @aliases; the list can be split
-% if there is a need.
-\def\macrolist{}
-
-% Add the macro to \macrolist
-\def\addtomacrolist#1{\expandafter \addtomacrolistxxx \csname#1\endcsname}
-\def\addtomacrolistxxx#1{%
-     \toks0 = \expandafter{\macrolist\definedummyword#1}%
-     \xdef\macrolist{\the\toks0}%
-}
-
-% Utility routines.
-% This does \let #1 = #2, with \csnames; that is,
-%   \let \csname#1\endcsname = \csname#2\endcsname
-% (except of course we have to play expansion games).
-% 
-\def\cslet#1#2{%
-  \expandafter\let
-  \csname#1\expandafter\endcsname
-  \csname#2\endcsname
-}
-
-% Trim leading and trailing spaces off a string.
-% Concepts from aro-bend problem 15 (see CTAN).
-{\catcode`\@=11
-\gdef\eatspaces #1{\expandafter\trim@\expandafter{#1 }}
-\gdef\trim@ #1{\trim@@ @#1 @ #1 @ @@}
-\gdef\trim@@ #1@ #2@ #3@@{\trim@@@\empty #2 @}
-\def\unbrace#1{#1}
-\unbrace{\gdef\trim@@@ #1 } #2@{#1}
-}
-
-% Trim a single trailing ^^M off a string.
-{\catcode`\^^M=\other \catcode`\Q=3%
-\gdef\eatcr #1{\eatcra #1Q^^MQ}%
-\gdef\eatcra#1^^MQ{\eatcrb#1Q}%
-\gdef\eatcrb#1Q#2Q{#1}%
-}
-
-% Macro bodies are absorbed as an argument in a context where
-% all characters are catcode 10, 11 or 12, except \ which is active
-% (as in normal texinfo). It is necessary to change the definition of \.
-
-% It's necessary to have hard CRs when the macro is executed. This is
-% done by  making ^^M (\endlinechar) catcode 12 when reading the macro
-% body, and then making it the \newlinechar in \scanmacro.
-
-\def\scanctxt{%
-  \catcode`\"=\other
-  \catcode`\+=\other
-  \catcode`\<=\other
-  \catcode`\>=\other
-  \catcode`\@=\other
-  \catcode`\^=\other
-  \catcode`\_=\other
-  \catcode`\|=\other
-  \catcode`\~=\other
-}
-
-\def\scanargctxt{%
-  \scanctxt
-  \catcode`\\=\other
-  \catcode`\^^M=\other
-}
-
-\def\macrobodyctxt{%
-  \scanctxt
-  \catcode`\{=\other
-  \catcode`\}=\other
-  \catcode`\^^M=\other
-  \usembodybackslash
-}
-
-\def\macroargctxt{%
-  \scanctxt
-  \catcode`\\=\other
-}
-
-% \mbodybackslash is the definition of \ in @macro bodies.
-% It maps \foo\ => \csname macarg.foo\endcsname => #N
-% where N is the macro parameter number.
-% We define \csname macarg.\endcsname to be \realbackslash, so
-% \\ in macro replacement text gets you a backslash.
-
-{\catcode`@=0 @catcode`@\=@active
- @gdef@usembodybackslash{@let\=@mbodybackslash}
- @gdef@mbodybackslash#1\{@csname macarg.#1@endcsname}
-}
-\expandafter\def\csname macarg.\endcsname{\realbackslash}
-
-\def\macro{\recursivefalse\parsearg\macroxxx}
-\def\rmacro{\recursivetrue\parsearg\macroxxx}
-
-\def\macroxxx#1{%
-  \getargs{#1}%           now \macname is the macname and \argl the arglist
-  \ifx\argl\empty       % no arguments
-     \paramno=0%
-  \else
-     \expandafter\parsemargdef \argl;%
-  \fi
-  \if1\csname ismacro.\the\macname\endcsname
-     \message{Warning: redefining \the\macname}%
-  \else
-     \expandafter\ifx\csname \the\macname\endcsname \relax
-     \else \errmessage{Macro name \the\macname\space already defined}\fi
-     \global\cslet{macsave.\the\macname}{\the\macname}%
-     \global\expandafter\let\csname ismacro.\the\macname\endcsname=1%
-     \addtomacrolist{\the\macname}%
-  \fi
-  \begingroup \macrobodyctxt
-  \ifrecursive \expandafter\parsermacbody
-  \else \expandafter\parsemacbody
-  \fi}
-
-\parseargdef\unmacro{%
-  \if1\csname ismacro.#1\endcsname
-    \global\cslet{#1}{macsave.#1}%
-    \global\expandafter\let \csname ismacro.#1\endcsname=0%
-    % Remove the macro name from \macrolist:
-    \begingroup
-      \expandafter\let\csname#1\endcsname \relax
-      \let\definedummyword\unmacrodo
-      \xdef\macrolist{\macrolist}%
-    \endgroup
-  \else
-    \errmessage{Macro #1 not defined}%
-  \fi
-}
-
-% Called by \do from \dounmacro on each macro.  The idea is to omit any
-% macro definitions that have been changed to \relax.
-%
-\def\unmacrodo#1{%
-  \ifx #1\relax
-    % remove this
-  \else
-    \noexpand\definedummyword \noexpand#1%
-  \fi
-}
-
-% This makes use of the obscure feature that if the last token of a
-% <parameter list> is #, then the preceding argument is delimited by
-% an opening brace, and that opening brace is not consumed.
-\def\getargs#1{\getargsxxx#1{}}
-\def\getargsxxx#1#{\getmacname #1 \relax\getmacargs}
-\def\getmacname #1 #2\relax{\macname={#1}}
-\def\getmacargs#1{\def\argl{#1}}
-
-% Parse the optional {params} list.  Set up \paramno and \paramlist
-% so \defmacro knows what to do.  Define \macarg.blah for each blah
-% in the params list, to be ##N where N is the position in that list.
-% That gets used by \mbodybackslash (above).
-
-% We need to get `macro parameter char #' into several definitions.
-% The technique used is stolen from LaTeX:  let \hash be something
-% unexpandable, insert that wherever you need a #, and then redefine
-% it to # just before using the token list produced.
-%
-% The same technique is used to protect \eatspaces till just before
-% the macro is used.
-
-\def\parsemargdef#1;{\paramno=0\def\paramlist{}%
-        \let\hash\relax\let\xeatspaces\relax\parsemargdefxxx#1,;,}
-\def\parsemargdefxxx#1,{%
-  \if#1;\let\next=\relax
-  \else \let\next=\parsemargdefxxx
-    \advance\paramno by 1%
-    \expandafter\edef\csname macarg.\eatspaces{#1}\endcsname
-        {\xeatspaces{\hash\the\paramno}}%
-    \edef\paramlist{\paramlist\hash\the\paramno,}%
-  \fi\next}
-
-% These two commands read recursive and nonrecursive macro bodies.
-% (They're different since rec and nonrec macros end differently.)
-
-\long\def\parsemacbody#1@end macro%
-{\xdef\temp{\eatcr{#1}}\endgroup\defmacro}%
-\long\def\parsermacbody#1@end rmacro%
-{\xdef\temp{\eatcr{#1}}\endgroup\defmacro}%
-
-% This defines the macro itself. There are six cases: recursive and
-% nonrecursive macros of zero, one, and many arguments.
-% Much magic with \expandafter here.
-% \xdef is used so that macro definitions will survive the file
-% they're defined in; @include reads the file inside a group.
-\def\defmacro{%
-  \let\hash=##% convert placeholders to macro parameter chars
-  \ifrecursive
-    \ifcase\paramno
-    % 0
-      \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname\endcsname{%
-        \noexpand\scanmacro{\temp}}%
-    \or % 1
-      \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname\endcsname{%
-         \bgroup\noexpand\macroargctxt
-         \noexpand\braceorline
-         \expandafter\noexpand\csname\the\macname xxx\endcsname}%
-      \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname xxx\endcsname##1{%
-         \egroup\noexpand\scanmacro{\temp}}%
-    \else % many
-      \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname\endcsname{%
-         \bgroup\noexpand\macroargctxt
-         \noexpand\csname\the\macname xx\endcsname}%
-      \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname xx\endcsname##1{%
-          \expandafter\noexpand\csname\the\macname xxx\endcsname ##1,}%
-      \expandafter\expandafter
-      \expandafter\xdef
-      \expandafter\expandafter
-        \csname\the\macname xxx\endcsname
-          \paramlist{\egroup\noexpand\scanmacro{\temp}}%
-    \fi
-  \else
-    \ifcase\paramno
-    % 0
-      \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname\endcsname{%
-        \noexpand\norecurse{\the\macname}%
-        \noexpand\scanmacro{\temp}\egroup}%
-    \or % 1
-      \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname\endcsname{%
-         \bgroup\noexpand\macroargctxt
-         \noexpand\braceorline
-         \expandafter\noexpand\csname\the\macname xxx\endcsname}%
-      \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname xxx\endcsname##1{%
-        \egroup
-        \noexpand\norecurse{\the\macname}%
-        \noexpand\scanmacro{\temp}\egroup}%
-    \else % many
-      \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname\endcsname{%
-         \bgroup\noexpand\macroargctxt
-         \expandafter\noexpand\csname\the\macname xx\endcsname}%
-      \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname xx\endcsname##1{%
-          \expandafter\noexpand\csname\the\macname xxx\endcsname ##1,}%
-      \expandafter\expandafter
-      \expandafter\xdef
-      \expandafter\expandafter
-      \csname\the\macname xxx\endcsname
-      \paramlist{%
-          \egroup
-          \noexpand\norecurse{\the\macname}%
-          \noexpand\scanmacro{\temp}\egroup}%
-    \fi
-  \fi}
-
-\def\norecurse#1{\bgroup\cslet{#1}{macsave.#1}}
-
-% \braceorline decides whether the next nonwhitespace character is a
-% {.  If so it reads up to the closing }, if not, it reads the whole
-% line.  Whatever was read is then fed to the next control sequence
-% as an argument (by \parsebrace or \parsearg)
-\def\braceorline#1{\let\macnamexxx=#1\futurelet\nchar\braceorlinexxx}
-\def\braceorlinexxx{%
-  \ifx\nchar\bgroup\else
-    \expandafter\parsearg
-  \fi \macnamexxx}
-
-
-% @alias.
-% We need some trickery to remove the optional spaces around the equal
-% sign.  Just make them active and then expand them all to nothing.
-\def\alias{\parseargusing\obeyspaces\aliasxxx}
-\def\aliasxxx #1{\aliasyyy#1\relax}
-\def\aliasyyy #1=#2\relax{%
-  {%
-    \expandafter\let\obeyedspace=\empty
-    \addtomacrolist{#1}%
-    \xdef\next{\global\let\makecsname{#1}=\makecsname{#2}}%
-  }%
-  \next
-}
-
-
-\message{cross references,}
-
-\newwrite\auxfile
-\newif\ifhavexrefs    % True if xref values are known.
-\newif\ifwarnedxrefs  % True if we warned once that they aren't known.
-
-% @inforef is relatively simple.
-\def\inforef #1{\inforefzzz #1,,,,**}
-\def\inforefzzz #1,#2,#3,#4**{\putwordSee{} \putwordInfo{} \putwordfile{} \file{\ignorespaces #3{}},
-  node \samp{\ignorespaces#1{}}}
-
-% @node's only job in TeX is to define \lastnode, which is used in
-% cross-references.  The @node line might or might not have commas, and
-% might or might not have spaces before the first comma, like:
-% @node foo , bar , ...
-% We don't want such trailing spaces in the node name.
-%
-\parseargdef\node{\checkenv{}\donode #1 ,\finishnodeparse}
-%
-% also remove a trailing comma, in case of something like this:
-% @node Help-Cross,  ,  , Cross-refs
-\def\donode#1 ,#2\finishnodeparse{\dodonode #1,\finishnodeparse}
-\def\dodonode#1,#2\finishnodeparse{\gdef\lastnode{#1}}
-
-\let\nwnode=\node
-\let\lastnode=\empty
-
-% Write a cross-reference definition for the current node.  #1 is the
-% type (Ynumbered, Yappendix, Ynothing).
-%
-\def\donoderef#1{%
-  \ifx\lastnode\empty\else
-    \setref{\lastnode}{#1}%
-    \global\let\lastnode=\empty
-  \fi
-}
-
-% @anchor{NAME} -- define xref target at arbitrary point.
-%
-\newcount\savesfregister
-%
-\def\savesf{\relax \ifhmode \savesfregister=\spacefactor \fi}
-\def\restoresf{\relax \ifhmode \spacefactor=\savesfregister \fi}
-\def\anchor#1{\savesf \setref{#1}{Ynothing}\restoresf \ignorespaces}
-
-% \setref{NAME}{SNT} defines a cross-reference point NAME (a node or an
-% anchor), which consists of three parts:
-% 1) NAME-title - the current sectioning name taken from \thissection,
-%                 or the anchor name.
-% 2) NAME-snt   - section number and type, passed as the SNT arg, or
-%                 empty for anchors.
-% 3) NAME-pg    - the page number.
-%
-% This is called from \donoderef, \anchor, and \dofloat.  In the case of
-% floats, there is an additional part, which is not written here:
-% 4) NAME-lof   - the text as it should appear in a @listoffloats.
-%
-\def\setref#1#2{%
-  \pdfmkdest{#1}%
-  \iflinks
-    {%
-      \atdummies  % preserve commands, but don't expand them
-      \edef\writexrdef##1##2{%
-	\write\auxfile{@xrdef{#1-% #1 of \setref, expanded by the \edef
-	  ##1}{##2}}% these are parameters of \writexrdef
-      }%
-      \toks0 = \expandafter{\thissection}%
-      \immediate \writexrdef{title}{\the\toks0 }%
-      \immediate \writexrdef{snt}{\csname #2\endcsname}% \Ynumbered etc.
-      \safewhatsit{\writexrdef{pg}{\folio}}% will be written later, during \shipout
-    }%
-  \fi
-}
-
-% @xref, @pxref, and @ref generate cross-references.  For \xrefX, #1 is
-% the node name, #2 the name of the Info cross-reference, #3 the printed
-% node name, #4 the name of the Info file, #5 the name of the printed
-% manual.  All but the node name can be omitted.
-%
-\def\pxref#1{\putwordsee{} \xrefX[#1,,,,,,,]}
-\def\xref#1{\putwordSee{} \xrefX[#1,,,,,,,]}
-\def\ref#1{\xrefX[#1,,,,,,,]}
-\def\xrefX[#1,#2,#3,#4,#5,#6]{\begingroup
-  \unsepspaces
-  \def\printedmanual{\ignorespaces #5}%
-  \def\printedrefname{\ignorespaces #3}%
-  \setbox1=\hbox{\printedmanual\unskip}%
-  \setbox0=\hbox{\printedrefname\unskip}%
-  \ifdim \wd0 = 0pt
-    % No printed node name was explicitly given.
-    \expandafter\ifx\csname SETxref-automatic-section-title\endcsname\relax
-      % Use the node name inside the square brackets.
-      \def\printedrefname{\ignorespaces #1}%
-    \else
-      % Use the actual chapter/section title appear inside
-      % the square brackets.  Use the real section title if we have it.
-      \ifdim \wd1 > 0pt
-        % It is in another manual, so we don't have it.
-        \def\printedrefname{\ignorespaces #1}%
-      \else
-        \ifhavexrefs
-          % We know the real title if we have the xref values.
-          \def\printedrefname{\refx{#1-title}{}}%
-        \else
-          % Otherwise just copy the Info node name.
-          \def\printedrefname{\ignorespaces #1}%
-        \fi%
-      \fi
-    \fi
-  \fi
-  %
-  % Make link in pdf output.
-  \ifpdf
-    \leavevmode
-    \getfilename{#4}%
-    {\indexnofonts
-     \turnoffactive
-     % See comments at \activebackslashdouble.
-     {\activebackslashdouble \xdef\pdfxrefdest{#1}%
-      \backslashparens\pdfxrefdest}%
-     %
-     \ifnum\filenamelength>0
-       \startlink attr{/Border [0 0 0]}%
-         goto file{\the\filename.pdf} name{\pdfxrefdest}%
-     \else
-       \startlink attr{/Border [0 0 0]}%
-         goto name{\pdfmkpgn{\pdfxrefdest}}%
-     \fi
-    }%
-    \linkcolor
-  \fi
-  %
-  % Float references are printed completely differently: "Figure 1.2"
-  % instead of "[somenode], p.3".  We distinguish them by the
-  % LABEL-title being set to a magic string.
-  {%
-    % Have to otherify everything special to allow the \csname to
-    % include an _ in the xref name, etc.
-    \indexnofonts
-    \turnoffactive
-    \expandafter\global\expandafter\let\expandafter\Xthisreftitle
-      \csname XR#1-title\endcsname
-  }%
-  \iffloat\Xthisreftitle
-    % If the user specified the print name (third arg) to the ref,
-    % print it instead of our usual "Figure 1.2".
-    \ifdim\wd0 = 0pt
-      \refx{#1-snt}{}%
-    \else
-      \printedrefname
-    \fi
-    %
-    % if the user also gave the printed manual name (fifth arg), append
-    % "in MANUALNAME".
-    \ifdim \wd1 > 0pt
-      \space \putwordin{} \cite{\printedmanual}%
-    \fi
-  \else
-    % node/anchor (non-float) references.
-    %
-    % If we use \unhbox0 and \unhbox1 to print the node names, TeX does not
-    % insert empty discretionaries after hyphens, which means that it will
-    % not find a line break at a hyphen in a node names.  Since some manuals
-    % are best written with fairly long node names, containing hyphens, this
-    % is a loss.  Therefore, we give the text of the node name again, so it
-    % is as if TeX is seeing it for the first time.
-    \ifdim \wd1 > 0pt
-      \putwordsection{} ``\printedrefname'' \putwordin{} \cite{\printedmanual}%
-    \else
-      % _ (for example) has to be the character _ for the purposes of the
-      % control sequence corresponding to the node, but it has to expand
-      % into the usual \leavevmode...\vrule stuff for purposes of
-      % printing. So we \turnoffactive for the \refx-snt, back on for the
-      % printing, back off for the \refx-pg.
-      {\turnoffactive
-       % Only output a following space if the -snt ref is nonempty; for
-       % @unnumbered and @anchor, it won't be.
-       \setbox2 = \hbox{\ignorespaces \refx{#1-snt}{}}%
-       \ifdim \wd2 > 0pt \refx{#1-snt}\space\fi
-      }%
-      % output the `[mynode]' via a macro so it can be overridden.
-      \xrefprintnodename\printedrefname
-      %
-      % But we always want a comma and a space:
-      ,\space
-      %
-      % output the `page 3'.
-      \turnoffactive \putwordpage\tie\refx{#1-pg}{}%
-    \fi
-  \fi
-  \endlink
-\endgroup}
-
-% This macro is called from \xrefX for the `[nodename]' part of xref
-% output.  It's a separate macro only so it can be changed more easily,
-% since square brackets don't work well in some documents.  Particularly
-% one that Bob is working on :).
-%
-\def\xrefprintnodename#1{[#1]}
-
-% Things referred to by \setref.
-%
-\def\Ynothing{}
-\def\Yomitfromtoc{}
-\def\Ynumbered{%
-  \ifnum\secno=0
-    \putwordChapter@tie \the\chapno
-  \else \ifnum\subsecno=0
-    \putwordSection@tie \the\chapno.\the\secno
-  \else \ifnum\subsubsecno=0
-    \putwordSection@tie \the\chapno.\the\secno.\the\subsecno
-  \else
-    \putwordSection@tie \the\chapno.\the\secno.\the\subsecno.\the\subsubsecno
-  \fi\fi\fi
-}
-\def\Yappendix{%
-  \ifnum\secno=0
-     \putwordAppendix@tie @char\the\appendixno{}%
-  \else \ifnum\subsecno=0
-     \putwordSection@tie @char\the\appendixno.\the\secno
-  \else \ifnum\subsubsecno=0
-    \putwordSection@tie @char\the\appendixno.\the\secno.\the\subsecno
-  \else
-    \putwordSection@tie
-      @char\the\appendixno.\the\secno.\the\subsecno.\the\subsubsecno
-  \fi\fi\fi
-}
-
-% Define \refx{NAME}{SUFFIX} to reference a cross-reference string named NAME.
-% If its value is nonempty, SUFFIX is output afterward.
-%
-\def\refx#1#2{%
-  {%
-    \indexnofonts
-    \otherbackslash
-    \expandafter\global\expandafter\let\expandafter\thisrefX
-      \csname XR#1\endcsname
-  }%
-  \ifx\thisrefX\relax
-    % If not defined, say something at least.
-    \angleleft un\-de\-fined\angleright
-    \iflinks
-      \ifhavexrefs
-        \message{\linenumber Undefined cross reference `#1'.}%
-      \else
-        \ifwarnedxrefs\else
-          \global\warnedxrefstrue
-          \message{Cross reference values unknown; you must run TeX again.}%
-        \fi
-      \fi
-    \fi
-  \else
-    % It's defined, so just use it.
-    \thisrefX
-  \fi
-  #2% Output the suffix in any case.
-}
-
-% This is the macro invoked by entries in the aux file.  Usually it's
-% just a \def (we prepend XR to the control sequence name to avoid
-% collisions).  But if this is a float type, we have more work to do.
-%
-\def\xrdef#1#2{%
-  {% The node name might contain 8-bit characters, which in our current
-   % implementation are changed to commands like @'e.  Don't let these
-   % mess up the control sequence name.
-    \indexnofonts
-    \turnoffactive
-    \xdef\safexrefname{#1}%
-  }%
-  %
-  \expandafter\gdef\csname XR\safexrefname\endcsname{#2}% remember this xref
-  %
-  % Was that xref control sequence that we just defined for a float?
-  \expandafter\iffloat\csname XR\safexrefname\endcsname
-    % it was a float, and we have the (safe) float type in \iffloattype.
-    \expandafter\let\expandafter\floatlist
-      \csname floatlist\iffloattype\endcsname
-    %
-    % Is this the first time we've seen this float type?
-    \expandafter\ifx\floatlist\relax
-      \toks0 = {\do}% yes, so just \do
-    \else
-      % had it before, so preserve previous elements in list.
-      \toks0 = \expandafter{\floatlist\do}%
-    \fi
-    %
-    % Remember this xref in the control sequence \floatlistFLOATTYPE,
-    % for later use in \listoffloats.
-    \expandafter\xdef\csname floatlist\iffloattype\endcsname{\the\toks0
-      {\safexrefname}}%
-  \fi
-}
-
-% Read the last existing aux file, if any.  No error if none exists.
-%
-\def\tryauxfile{%
-  \openin 1 \jobname.aux
-  \ifeof 1 \else
-    \readdatafile{aux}%
-    \global\havexrefstrue
-  \fi
-  \closein 1
-}
-
-\def\setupdatafile{%
-  \catcode`\^^@=\other
-  \catcode`\^^A=\other
-  \catcode`\^^B=\other
-  \catcode`\^^C=\other
-  \catcode`\^^D=\other
-  \catcode`\^^E=\other
-  \catcode`\^^F=\other
-  \catcode`\^^G=\other
-  \catcode`\^^H=\other
-  \catcode`\^^K=\other
-  \catcode`\^^L=\other
-  \catcode`\^^N=\other
-  \catcode`\^^P=\other
-  \catcode`\^^Q=\other
-  \catcode`\^^R=\other
-  \catcode`\^^S=\other
-  \catcode`\^^T=\other
-  \catcode`\^^U=\other
-  \catcode`\^^V=\other
-  \catcode`\^^W=\other
-  \catcode`\^^X=\other
-  \catcode`\^^Z=\other
-  \catcode`\^^[=\other
-  \catcode`\^^\=\other
-  \catcode`\^^]=\other
-  \catcode`\^^^=\other
-  \catcode`\^^_=\other
-  % It was suggested to set the catcode of ^ to 7, which would allow ^^e4 etc.
-  % in xref tags, i.e., node names.  But since ^^e4 notation isn't
-  % supported in the main text, it doesn't seem desirable.  Furthermore,
-  % that is not enough: for node names that actually contain a ^
-  % character, we would end up writing a line like this: 'xrdef {'hat
-  % b-title}{'hat b} and \xrdef does a \csname...\endcsname on the first
-  % argument, and \hat is not an expandable control sequence.  It could
-  % all be worked out, but why?  Either we support ^^ or we don't.
-  %
-  % The other change necessary for this was to define \auxhat:
-  % \def\auxhat{\def^{'hat }}% extra space so ok if followed by letter
-  % and then to call \auxhat in \setq.
-  %
-  \catcode`\^=\other
-  %
-  % Special characters.  Should be turned off anyway, but...
-  \catcode`\~=\other
-  \catcode`\[=\other
-  \catcode`\]=\other
-  \catcode`\"=\other
-  \catcode`\_=\other
-  \catcode`\|=\other
-  \catcode`\<=\other
-  \catcode`\>=\other
-  \catcode`\$=\other
-  \catcode`\#=\other
-  \catcode`\&=\other
-  \catcode`\%=\other
-  \catcode`+=\other % avoid \+ for paranoia even though we've turned it off
-  %
-  % This is to support \ in node names and titles, since the \
-  % characters end up in a \csname.  It's easier than
-  % leaving it active and making its active definition an actual \
-  % character.  What I don't understand is why it works in the *value*
-  % of the xrdef.  Seems like it should be a catcode12 \, and that
-  % should not typeset properly.  But it works, so I'm moving on for
-  % now.  --karl, 15jan04.
-  \catcode`\\=\other
-  %
-  % Make the characters 128-255 be printing characters.
-  {%
-    \count1=128
-    \def\loop{%
-      \catcode\count1=\other
-      \advance\count1 by 1
-      \ifnum \count1<256 \loop \fi
-    }%
-  }%
-  %
-  % @ is our escape character in .aux files, and we need braces.
-  \catcode`\{=1
-  \catcode`\}=2
-  \catcode`\@=0
-}
-
-\def\readdatafile#1{%
-\begingroup
-  \setupdatafile
-  \input\jobname.#1
-\endgroup}
-
-
-\message{insertions,}
-% including footnotes.
-
-\newcount \footnoteno
-
-% The trailing space in the following definition for supereject is
-% vital for proper filling; pages come out unaligned when you do a
-% pagealignmacro call if that space before the closing brace is
-% removed. (Generally, numeric constants should always be followed by a
-% space to prevent strange expansion errors.)
-\def\supereject{\par\penalty -20000\footnoteno =0 }
-
-% @footnotestyle is meaningful for info output only.
-\let\footnotestyle=\comment
-
-{\catcode `\@=11
-%
-% Auto-number footnotes.  Otherwise like plain.
-\gdef\footnote{%
-  \let\indent=\ptexindent
-  \let\noindent=\ptexnoindent
-  \global\advance\footnoteno by \@ne
-  \edef\thisfootno{$^{\the\footnoteno}$}%
-  %
-  % In case the footnote comes at the end of a sentence, preserve the
-  % extra spacing after we do the footnote number.
-  \let\@sf\empty
-  \ifhmode\edef\@sf{\spacefactor\the\spacefactor}\ptexslash\fi
-  %
-  % Remove inadvertent blank space before typesetting the footnote number.
-  \unskip
-  \thisfootno\@sf
-  \dofootnote
-}%
-
-% Don't bother with the trickery in plain.tex to not require the
-% footnote text as a parameter.  Our footnotes don't need to be so general.
-%
-% Oh yes, they do; otherwise, @ifset (and anything else that uses
-% \parseargline) fails inside footnotes because the tokens are fixed when
-% the footnote is read.  --karl, 16nov96.
-%
-\gdef\dofootnote{%
-  \insert\footins\bgroup
-  % We want to typeset this text as a normal paragraph, even if the
-  % footnote reference occurs in (for example) a display environment.
-  % So reset some parameters.
-  \hsize=\pagewidth
-  \interlinepenalty\interfootnotelinepenalty
-  \splittopskip\ht\strutbox % top baseline for broken footnotes
-  \splitmaxdepth\dp\strutbox
-  \floatingpenalty\@MM
-  \leftskip\z@skip
-  \rightskip\z@skip
-  \spaceskip\z@skip
-  \xspaceskip\z@skip
-  \parindent\defaultparindent
-  %
-  \smallfonts \rm
-  %
-  % Because we use hanging indentation in footnotes, a @noindent appears
-  % to exdent this text, so make it be a no-op.  makeinfo does not use
-  % hanging indentation so @noindent can still be needed within footnote
-  % text after an @example or the like (not that this is good style).
-  \let\noindent = \relax
-  %
-  % Hang the footnote text off the number.  Use \everypar in case the
-  % footnote extends for more than one paragraph.
-  \everypar = {\hang}%
-  \textindent{\thisfootno}%
-  %
-  % Don't crash into the line above the footnote text.  Since this
-  % expands into a box, it must come within the paragraph, lest it
-  % provide a place where TeX can split the footnote.
-  \footstrut
-  \futurelet\next\fo@t
-}
-}%end \catcode `\@=11
-
-% In case a @footnote appears in a vbox, save the footnote text and create
-% the real \insert just after the vbox finished.  Otherwise, the insertion
-% would be lost.
-% Similarly, if a @footnote appears inside an alignment, save the footnote
-% text to a box and make the \insert when a row of the table is finished.
-% And the same can be done for other insert classes.  --kasal, 16nov03.
-
-% Replace the \insert primitive by a cheating macro.
-% Deeper inside, just make sure that the saved insertions are not spilled
-% out prematurely.
-%
-\def\startsavinginserts{%
-  \ifx \insert\ptexinsert
-    \let\insert\saveinsert
-  \else
-    \let\checkinserts\relax
-  \fi
-}
-
-% This \insert replacement works for both \insert\footins{foo} and
-% \insert\footins\bgroup foo\egroup, but it doesn't work for \insert27{foo}.
-%
-\def\saveinsert#1{%
-  \edef\next{\noexpand\savetobox \makeSAVEname#1}%
-  \afterassignment\next
-  % swallow the left brace
-  \let\temp =
-}
-\def\makeSAVEname#1{\makecsname{SAVE\expandafter\gobble\string#1}}
-\def\savetobox#1{\global\setbox#1 = \vbox\bgroup \unvbox#1}
-
-\def\checksaveins#1{\ifvoid#1\else \placesaveins#1\fi}
-
-\def\placesaveins#1{%
-  \ptexinsert \csname\expandafter\gobblesave\string#1\endcsname
-    {\box#1}%
-}
-
-% eat @SAVE -- beware, all of them have catcode \other:
-{
-  \def\dospecials{\do S\do A\do V\do E} \uncatcodespecials  %  ;-)
-  \gdef\gobblesave @SAVE{}
-}
-
-% initialization:
-\def\newsaveins #1{%
-  \edef\next{\noexpand\newsaveinsX \makeSAVEname#1}%
-  \next
-}
-\def\newsaveinsX #1{%
-  \csname newbox\endcsname #1%
-  \expandafter\def\expandafter\checkinserts\expandafter{\checkinserts
-    \checksaveins #1}%
-}
-
-% initialize:
-\let\checkinserts\empty
-\newsaveins\footins
-\newsaveins\margin
-
-
-% @image.  We use the macros from epsf.tex to support this.
-% If epsf.tex is not installed and @image is used, we complain.
-%
-% Check for and read epsf.tex up front.  If we read it only at @image
-% time, we might be inside a group, and then its definitions would get
-% undone and the next image would fail.
-\openin 1 = epsf.tex
-\ifeof 1 \else
-  % Do not bother showing banner with epsf.tex v2.7k (available in
-  % doc/epsf.tex and on ctan).
-  \def\epsfannounce{\toks0 = }%
-  \input epsf.tex
-\fi
-\closein 1
-%
-% We will only complain once about lack of epsf.tex.
-\newif\ifwarnednoepsf
-\newhelp\noepsfhelp{epsf.tex must be installed for images to
-  work.  It is also included in the Texinfo distribution, or you can get
-  it from ftp://tug.org/tex/epsf.tex.}
-%
-\def\image#1{%
-  \ifx\epsfbox\undefined
-    \ifwarnednoepsf \else
-      \errhelp = \noepsfhelp
-      \errmessage{epsf.tex not found, images will be ignored}%
-      \global\warnednoepsftrue
-    \fi
-  \else
-    \imagexxx #1,,,,,\finish
-  \fi
-}
-%
-% Arguments to @image:
-% #1 is (mandatory) image filename; we tack on .eps extension.
-% #2 is (optional) width, #3 is (optional) height.
-% #4 is (ignored optional) html alt text.
-% #5 is (ignored optional) extension.
-% #6 is just the usual extra ignored arg for parsing this stuff.
-\newif\ifimagevmode
-\def\imagexxx#1,#2,#3,#4,#5,#6\finish{\begingroup
-  \catcode`\^^M = 5     % in case we're inside an example
-  \normalturnoffactive  % allow _ et al. in names
-  % If the image is by itself, center it.
-  \ifvmode
-    \imagevmodetrue
-    \nobreak\bigskip
-    % Usually we'll have text after the image which will insert
-    % \parskip glue, so insert it here too to equalize the space
-    % above and below.
-    \nobreak\vskip\parskip
-    \nobreak
-    \line\bgroup
-  \fi
-  %
-  % Output the image.
-  \ifpdf
-    \dopdfimage{#1}{#2}{#3}%
-  \else
-    % \epsfbox itself resets \epsf?size at each figure.
-    \setbox0 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #2}\ifdim\wd0 > 0pt \epsfxsize=#2\relax \fi
-    \setbox0 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #3}\ifdim\wd0 > 0pt \epsfysize=#3\relax \fi
-    \epsfbox{#1.eps}%
-  \fi
-  %
-  \ifimagevmode \egroup \bigbreak \fi  % space after the image
-\endgroup}
-
-
-% @float FLOATTYPE,LABEL,LOC ... @end float for displayed figures, tables,
-% etc.  We don't actually implement floating yet, we always include the
-% float "here".  But it seemed the best name for the future.
-%
-\envparseargdef\float{\eatcommaspace\eatcommaspace\dofloat#1, , ,\finish}
-
-% There may be a space before second and/or third parameter; delete it.
-\def\eatcommaspace#1, {#1,}
-
-% #1 is the optional FLOATTYPE, the text label for this float, typically
-% "Figure", "Table", "Example", etc.  Can't contain commas.  If omitted,
-% this float will not be numbered and cannot be referred to.
-%
-% #2 is the optional xref label.  Also must be present for the float to
-% be referable.
-%
-% #3 is the optional positioning argument; for now, it is ignored.  It
-% will somehow specify the positions allowed to float to (here, top, bottom).
-%
-% We keep a separate counter for each FLOATTYPE, which we reset at each
-% chapter-level command.
-\let\resetallfloatnos=\empty
-%
-\def\dofloat#1,#2,#3,#4\finish{%
-  \let\thiscaption=\empty
-  \let\thisshortcaption=\empty
-  %
-  % don't lose footnotes inside @float.
-  %
-  % BEWARE: when the floats start float, we have to issue warning whenever an
-  % insert appears inside a float which could possibly float. --kasal, 26may04
-  %
-  \startsavinginserts
-  %
-  % We can't be used inside a paragraph.
-  \par
-  %
-  \vtop\bgroup
-    \def\floattype{#1}%
-    \def\floatlabel{#2}%
-    \def\floatloc{#3}% we do nothing with this yet.
-    %
-    \ifx\floattype\empty
-      \let\safefloattype=\empty
-    \else
-      {%
-        % the floattype might have accents or other special characters,
-        % but we need to use it in a control sequence name.
-        \indexnofonts
-        \turnoffactive
-        \xdef\safefloattype{\floattype}%
-      }%
-    \fi
-    %
-    % If label is given but no type, we handle that as the empty type.
-    \ifx\floatlabel\empty \else
-      % We want each FLOATTYPE to be numbered separately (Figure 1,
-      % Table 1, Figure 2, ...).  (And if no label, no number.)
-      %
-      \expandafter\getfloatno\csname\safefloattype floatno\endcsname
-      \global\advance\floatno by 1
-      %
-      {%
-        % This magic value for \thissection is output by \setref as the
-        % XREFLABEL-title value.  \xrefX uses it to distinguish float
-        % labels (which have a completely different output format) from
-        % node and anchor labels.  And \xrdef uses it to construct the
-        % lists of floats.
-        %
-        \edef\thissection{\floatmagic=\safefloattype}%
-        \setref{\floatlabel}{Yfloat}%
-      }%
-    \fi
-    %
-    % start with \parskip glue, I guess.
-    \vskip\parskip
-    %
-    % Don't suppress indentation if a float happens to start a section.
-    \restorefirstparagraphindent
-}
-
-% we have these possibilities:
-% @float Foo,lbl & @caption{Cap}: Foo 1.1: Cap
-% @float Foo,lbl & no caption:    Foo 1.1
-% @float Foo & @caption{Cap}:     Foo: Cap
-% @float Foo & no caption:        Foo
-% @float ,lbl & Caption{Cap}:     1.1: Cap
-% @float ,lbl & no caption:       1.1
-% @float & @caption{Cap}:         Cap
-% @float & no caption:
-%
-\def\Efloat{%
-    \let\floatident = \empty
-    %
-    % In all cases, if we have a float type, it comes first.
-    \ifx\floattype\empty \else \def\floatident{\floattype}\fi
-    %
-    % If we have an xref label, the number comes next.
-    \ifx\floatlabel\empty \else
-      \ifx\floattype\empty \else % if also had float type, need tie first.
-        \appendtomacro\floatident{\tie}%
-      \fi
-      % the number.
-      \appendtomacro\floatident{\chaplevelprefix\the\floatno}%
-    \fi
-    %
-    % Start the printed caption with what we've constructed in
-    % \floatident, but keep it separate; we need \floatident again.
-    \let\captionline = \floatident
-    %
-    \ifx\thiscaption\empty \else
-      \ifx\floatident\empty \else
-	\appendtomacro\captionline{: }% had ident, so need a colon between
-      \fi
-      %
-      % caption text.
-      \appendtomacro\captionline{\scanexp\thiscaption}%
-    \fi
-    %
-    % If we have anything to print, print it, with space before.
-    % Eventually this needs to become an \insert.
-    \ifx\captionline\empty \else
-      \vskip.5\parskip
-      \captionline
-      %
-      % Space below caption.
-      \vskip\parskip
-    \fi
-    %
-    % If have an xref label, write the list of floats info.  Do this
-    % after the caption, to avoid chance of it being a breakpoint.
-    \ifx\floatlabel\empty \else
-      % Write the text that goes in the lof to the aux file as
-      % \floatlabel-lof.  Besides \floatident, we include the short
-      % caption if specified, else the full caption if specified, else nothing.
-      {%
-        \atdummies
-        %
-        % since we read the caption text in the macro world, where ^^M
-        % is turned into a normal character, we have to scan it back, so
-        % we don't write the literal three characters "^^M" into the aux file.
-	\scanexp{%
-	  \xdef\noexpand\gtemp{%
-	    \ifx\thisshortcaption\empty
-	      \thiscaption
-	    \else
-	      \thisshortcaption
-	    \fi
-	  }%
-	}%
-        \immediate\write\auxfile{@xrdef{\floatlabel-lof}{\floatident
-	  \ifx\gtemp\empty \else : \gtemp \fi}}%
-      }%
-    \fi
-  \egroup  % end of \vtop
-  %
-  % place the captured inserts
-  %
-  % BEWARE: when the floats start floating, we have to issue warning
-  % whenever an insert appears inside a float which could possibly
-  % float. --kasal, 26may04
-  %
-  \checkinserts
-}
-
-% Append the tokens #2 to the definition of macro #1, not expanding either.
-%
-\def\appendtomacro#1#2{%
-  \expandafter\def\expandafter#1\expandafter{#1#2}%
-}
-
-% @caption, @shortcaption
-%
-\def\caption{\docaption\thiscaption}
-\def\shortcaption{\docaption\thisshortcaption}
-\def\docaption{\checkenv\float \bgroup\scanargctxt\defcaption}
-\def\defcaption#1#2{\egroup \def#1{#2}}
-
-% The parameter is the control sequence identifying the counter we are
-% going to use.  Create it if it doesn't exist and assign it to \floatno.
-\def\getfloatno#1{%
-  \ifx#1\relax
-      % Haven't seen this figure type before.
-      \csname newcount\endcsname #1%
-      %
-      % Remember to reset this floatno at the next chap.
-      \expandafter\gdef\expandafter\resetallfloatnos
-        \expandafter{\resetallfloatnos #1=0 }%
-  \fi
-  \let\floatno#1%
-}
-
-% \setref calls this to get the XREFLABEL-snt value.  We want an @xref
-% to the FLOATLABEL to expand to "Figure 3.1".  We call \setref when we
-% first read the @float command.
-%
-\def\Yfloat{\floattype@tie \chaplevelprefix\the\floatno}%
-
-% Magic string used for the XREFLABEL-title value, so \xrefX can
-% distinguish floats from other xref types.
-\def\floatmagic{!!float!!}
-
-% #1 is the control sequence we are passed; we expand into a conditional
-% which is true if #1 represents a float ref.  That is, the magic
-% \thissection value which we \setref above.
-%
-\def\iffloat#1{\expandafter\doiffloat#1==\finish}
-%
-% #1 is (maybe) the \floatmagic string.  If so, #2 will be the
-% (safe) float type for this float.  We set \iffloattype to #2.
-%
-\def\doiffloat#1=#2=#3\finish{%
-  \def\temp{#1}%
-  \def\iffloattype{#2}%
-  \ifx\temp\floatmagic
-}
-
-% @listoffloats FLOATTYPE - print a list of floats like a table of contents.
-%
-\parseargdef\listoffloats{%
-  \def\floattype{#1}% floattype
-  {%
-    % the floattype might have accents or other special characters,
-    % but we need to use it in a control sequence name.
-    \indexnofonts
-    \turnoffactive
-    \xdef\safefloattype{\floattype}%
-  }%
-  %
-  % \xrdef saves the floats as a \do-list in \floatlistSAFEFLOATTYPE.
-  \expandafter\ifx\csname floatlist\safefloattype\endcsname \relax
-    \ifhavexrefs
-      % if the user said @listoffloats foo but never @float foo.
-      \message{\linenumber No `\safefloattype' floats to list.}%
-    \fi
-  \else
-    \begingroup
-      \leftskip=\tocindent  % indent these entries like a toc
-      \let\do=\listoffloatsdo
-      \csname floatlist\safefloattype\endcsname
-    \endgroup
-  \fi
-}
-
-% This is called on each entry in a list of floats.  We're passed the
-% xref label, in the form LABEL-title, which is how we save it in the
-% aux file.  We strip off the -title and look up \XRLABEL-lof, which
-% has the text we're supposed to typeset here.
-%
-% Figures without xref labels will not be included in the list (since
-% they won't appear in the aux file).
-%
-\def\listoffloatsdo#1{\listoffloatsdoentry#1\finish}
-\def\listoffloatsdoentry#1-title\finish{{%
-  % Can't fully expand XR#1-lof because it can contain anything.  Just
-  % pass the control sequence.  On the other hand, XR#1-pg is just the
-  % page number, and we want to fully expand that so we can get a link
-  % in pdf output.
-  \toksA = \expandafter{\csname XR#1-lof\endcsname}%
-  %
-  % use the same \entry macro we use to generate the TOC and index.
-  \edef\writeentry{\noexpand\entry{\the\toksA}{\csname XR#1-pg\endcsname}}%
-  \writeentry
-}}
-
-
-\message{localization,}
-
-% @documentlanguage is usually given very early, just after
-% @setfilename.  If done too late, it may not override everything
-% properly.  Single argument is the language abbreviation.
-% It would be nice if we could set up a hyphenation file here.
-%
-\parseargdef\documentlanguage{%
-  \tex % read txi-??.tex file in plain TeX.
-    % Read the file if it exists.
-    \openin 1 txi-#1.tex
-    \ifeof 1
-      \errhelp = \nolanghelp
-      \errmessage{Cannot read language file txi-#1.tex}%
-    \else
-      \input txi-#1.tex
-    \fi
-    \closein 1
-  \endgroup
-}
-\newhelp\nolanghelp{The given language definition file cannot be found or
-is empty.  Maybe you need to install it?  In the current directory
-should work if nowhere else does.}
-
-% Set the catcode of characters 128 through 255 to the specified number.
-%
-\def\setnonasciicharscatcode#1{%
-   \count255=128
-   \loop\ifnum\count255<256
-      \global\catcode\count255=#1
-      \advance\count255 by 1
-   \repeat
-}
-
-% @documentencoding sets the definition of non-ASCII characters
-% according to the specified encoding.
-%
-\parseargdef\documentencoding{%
-  % Encoding being declared for the document.
-  \def\declaredencoding{\csname #1.enc\endcsname}%
-  %
-  % Supported encodings: names converted to tokens in order to be able
-  % to compare them with \ifx.
-  \def\ascii{\csname US-ASCII.enc\endcsname}%
-  \def\latnine{\csname ISO-8859-15.enc\endcsname}%
-  \def\latone{\csname ISO-8859-1.enc\endcsname}%
-  \def\lattwo{\csname ISO-8859-2.enc\endcsname}%
-  \def\utfeight{\csname UTF-8.enc\endcsname}%
-  %
-  \ifx \declaredencoding \ascii
-     \asciichardefs
-  %
-  \else \ifx \declaredencoding \lattwo
-     \setnonasciicharscatcode\active
-     \lattwochardefs
-  %
-  \else \ifx \declaredencoding \latone 
-     \setnonasciicharscatcode\active
-     \latonechardefs
-  %
-  \else \ifx \declaredencoding \latnine
-     \setnonasciicharscatcode\active
-     \latninechardefs
-  %
-  \else \ifx \declaredencoding \utfeight
-     \setnonasciicharscatcode\active
-     \utfeightchardefs
-  %
-  \else 
-    \message{Unknown document encoding #1, ignoring.}%
-  %
-  \fi % utfeight
-  \fi % latnine
-  \fi % latone
-  \fi % lattwo
-  \fi % ascii
-}
-
-% A message to be logged when using a character that isn't available
-% the default font encoding (OT1).
-% 
-\def\missingcharmsg#1{\message{Character missing in OT1 encoding: #1.}}
-
-% Take account of \c (plain) vs. \, (Texinfo) difference.
-\def\cedilla#1{\ifx\c\ptexc\c{#1}\else\,{#1}\fi}
-
-% First, make active non-ASCII characters in order for them to be
-% correctly categorized when TeX reads the replacement text of
-% macros containing the character definitions.
-\setnonasciicharscatcode\active
-%
-% Latin1 (ISO-8859-1) character definitions.
-\def\latonechardefs{%
-  \gdef^^a0{~} 
-  \gdef^^a1{\exclamdown}
-  \gdef^^a2{\missingcharmsg{CENT SIGN}} 
-  \gdef^^a3{{\pounds}}
-  \gdef^^a4{\missingcharmsg{CURRENCY SIGN}}
-  \gdef^^a5{\missingcharmsg{YEN SIGN}}
-  \gdef^^a6{\missingcharmsg{BROKEN BAR}} 
-  \gdef^^a7{\S}
-  \gdef^^a8{\"{}} 
-  \gdef^^a9{\copyright} 
-  \gdef^^aa{\ordf}
-  \gdef^^ab{\missingcharmsg{LEFT-POINTING DOUBLE ANGLE QUOTATION MARK}} 
-  \gdef^^ac{$\lnot$}
-  \gdef^^ad{\-} 
-  \gdef^^ae{\registeredsymbol} 
-  \gdef^^af{\={}}
-  %
-  \gdef^^b0{\textdegree}
-  \gdef^^b1{$\pm$}
-  \gdef^^b2{$^2$}
-  \gdef^^b3{$^3$}
-  \gdef^^b4{\'{}}
-  \gdef^^b5{$\mu$}
-  \gdef^^b6{\P}
-  %
-  \gdef^^b7{$^.$}
-  \gdef^^b8{\cedilla\ }
-  \gdef^^b9{$^1$}
-  \gdef^^ba{\ordm}
-  %
-  \gdef^^bb{\missingcharmsg{RIGHT-POINTING DOUBLE ANGLE QUOTATION MARK}}
-  \gdef^^bc{$1\over4$}
-  \gdef^^bd{$1\over2$}
-  \gdef^^be{$3\over4$}
-  \gdef^^bf{\questiondown}
-  %
-  \gdef^^c0{\`A}
-  \gdef^^c1{\'A}
-  \gdef^^c2{\^A}
-  \gdef^^c3{\~A}
-  \gdef^^c4{\"A}
-  \gdef^^c5{\ringaccent A} 
-  \gdef^^c6{\AE}
-  \gdef^^c7{\cedilla C}
-  \gdef^^c8{\`E}
-  \gdef^^c9{\'E}
-  \gdef^^ca{\^E}
-  \gdef^^cb{\"E}
-  \gdef^^cc{\`I}
-  \gdef^^cd{\'I}
-  \gdef^^ce{\^I}
-  \gdef^^cf{\"I}
-  %
-  \gdef^^d0{\missingcharmsg{LATIN CAPITAL LETTER ETH}}
-  \gdef^^d1{\~N}
-  \gdef^^d2{\`O}
-  \gdef^^d3{\'O}
-  \gdef^^d4{\^O}
-  \gdef^^d5{\~O}
-  \gdef^^d6{\"O}
-  \gdef^^d7{$\times$}
-  \gdef^^d8{\O}
-  \gdef^^d9{\`U}
-  \gdef^^da{\'U}
-  \gdef^^db{\^U}
-  \gdef^^dc{\"U}
-  \gdef^^dd{\'Y}
-  \gdef^^de{\missingcharmsg{LATIN CAPITAL LETTER THORN}}
-  \gdef^^df{\ss}
-  %
-  \gdef^^e0{\`a}
-  \gdef^^e1{\'a}
-  \gdef^^e2{\^a}
-  \gdef^^e3{\~a}
-  \gdef^^e4{\"a}
-  \gdef^^e5{\ringaccent a}
-  \gdef^^e6{\ae}
-  \gdef^^e7{\cedilla c}
-  \gdef^^e8{\`e}
-  \gdef^^e9{\'e}
-  \gdef^^ea{\^e}
-  \gdef^^eb{\"e}
-  \gdef^^ec{\`{\dotless i}}
-  \gdef^^ed{\'{\dotless i}}
-  \gdef^^ee{\^{\dotless i}}
-  \gdef^^ef{\"{\dotless i}}
-  %
-  \gdef^^f0{\missingcharmsg{LATIN SMALL LETTER ETH}}
-  \gdef^^f1{\~n}
-  \gdef^^f2{\`o}
-  \gdef^^f3{\'o}
-  \gdef^^f4{\^o}
-  \gdef^^f5{\~o}
-  \gdef^^f6{\"o}
-  \gdef^^f7{$\div$}
-  \gdef^^f8{\o}
-  \gdef^^f9{\`u}
-  \gdef^^fa{\'u}
-  \gdef^^fb{\^u}
-  \gdef^^fc{\"u}
-  \gdef^^fd{\'y}
-  \gdef^^fe{\missingcharmsg{LATIN SMALL LETTER THORN}}
-  \gdef^^ff{\"y}
-}
-
-% Latin9 (ISO-8859-15) encoding character definitions.
-\def\latninechardefs{%
-  % Encoding is almost identical to Latin1.
-  \latonechardefs
-  %
-  \gdef^^a4{\euro}
-  \gdef^^a6{\v S}
-  \gdef^^a8{\v s}
-  \gdef^^b4{\v Z}
-  \gdef^^b8{\v z}
-  \gdef^^bc{\OE}
-  \gdef^^bd{\oe}
-  \gdef^^be{\"Y}
-}
-
-% Latin2 (ISO-8859-2) character definitions.
-\def\lattwochardefs{%
-  \gdef^^a0{~}
-  \gdef^^a1{\missingcharmsg{LATIN CAPITAL LETTER A WITH OGONEK}}
-  \gdef^^a2{\u{}}
-  \gdef^^a3{\L}
-  \gdef^^a4{\missingcharmsg{CURRENCY SIGN}}
-  \gdef^^a5{\v L}
-  \gdef^^a6{\'S}
-  \gdef^^a7{\S}
-  \gdef^^a8{\"{}}
-  \gdef^^a9{\v S}
-  \gdef^^aa{\cedilla S}
-  \gdef^^ab{\v T}
-  \gdef^^ac{\'Z}
-  \gdef^^ad{\-}
-  \gdef^^ae{\v Z}
-  \gdef^^af{\dotaccent Z}
-  %
-  \gdef^^b0{\textdegree}
-  \gdef^^b1{\missingcharmsg{LATIN SMALL LETTER A WITH OGONEK}}
-  \gdef^^b2{\missingcharmsg{OGONEK}}
-  \gdef^^b3{\l}
-  \gdef^^b4{\'{}}
-  \gdef^^b5{\v l}
-  \gdef^^b6{\'s}
-  \gdef^^b7{\v{}}
-  \gdef^^b8{\cedilla\ }
-  \gdef^^b9{\v s}
-  \gdef^^ba{\cedilla s}
-  \gdef^^bb{\v t}
-  \gdef^^bc{\'z}
-  \gdef^^bd{\H{}}
-  \gdef^^be{\v z}
-  \gdef^^bf{\dotaccent z}
-  %
-  \gdef^^c0{\'R}
-  \gdef^^c1{\'A}
-  \gdef^^c2{\^A}
-  \gdef^^c3{\u A}
-  \gdef^^c4{\"A}
-  \gdef^^c5{\'L}
-  \gdef^^c6{\'C}
-  \gdef^^c7{\cedilla C}
-  \gdef^^c8{\v C}
-  \gdef^^c9{\'E}
-  \gdef^^ca{\missingcharmsg{LATIN CAPITAL LETTER E WITH OGONEK}}
-  \gdef^^cb{\"E}
-  \gdef^^cc{\v E}
-  \gdef^^cd{\'I}
-  \gdef^^ce{\^I}
-  \gdef^^cf{\v D}
-  %
-  \gdef^^d0{\missingcharmsg{LATIN CAPITAL LETTER D WITH STROKE}}
-  \gdef^^d1{\'N}
-  \gdef^^d2{\v N}
-  \gdef^^d3{\'O}
-  \gdef^^d4{\^O}
-  \gdef^^d5{\H O}
-  \gdef^^d6{\"O}
-  \gdef^^d7{$\times$}
-  \gdef^^d8{\v R}
-  \gdef^^d9{\ringaccent U} 
-  \gdef^^da{\'U}
-  \gdef^^db{\H U}
-  \gdef^^dc{\"U}
-  \gdef^^dd{\'Y}
-  \gdef^^de{\cedilla T}
-  \gdef^^df{\ss}
-  %
-  \gdef^^e0{\'r}
-  \gdef^^e1{\'a}
-  \gdef^^e2{\^a}
-  \gdef^^e3{\u a}
-  \gdef^^e4{\"a}
-  \gdef^^e5{\'l}
-  \gdef^^e6{\'c}
-  \gdef^^e7{\cedilla c}
-  \gdef^^e8{\v c}
-  \gdef^^e9{\'e}
-  \gdef^^ea{\missingcharmsg{LATIN SMALL LETTER E WITH OGONEK}}
-  \gdef^^eb{\"e}
-  \gdef^^ec{\v e}
-  \gdef^^ed{\'\i}
-  \gdef^^ee{\^\i}
-  \gdef^^ef{\v d}
-  %
-  \gdef^^f0{\missingcharmsg{LATIN SMALL LETTER D WITH STROKE}}
-  \gdef^^f1{\'n}
-  \gdef^^f2{\v n}
-  \gdef^^f3{\'o}
-  \gdef^^f4{\^o}
-  \gdef^^f5{\H o}
-  \gdef^^f6{\"o}
-  \gdef^^f7{$\div$}
-  \gdef^^f8{\v r}
-  \gdef^^f9{\ringaccent u}
-  \gdef^^fa{\'u}
-  \gdef^^fb{\H u}
-  \gdef^^fc{\"u}
-  \gdef^^fd{\'y}
-  \gdef^^fe{\cedilla t}
-  \gdef^^ff{\dotaccent{}}
-}
-
-% UTF-8 character definitions.
-% 
-% This code to support UTF-8 is based on LaTeX's utf8.def, with some
-% changes for Texinfo conventions.  It is included here under the GPL by
-% permission from Frank Mittelbach and the LaTeX team.
-% 
-\newcount\countUTFx
-\newcount\countUTFy
-\newcount\countUTFz
-
-\gdef\UTFviiiTwoOctets#1#2{\expandafter
-   \UTFviiiDefined\csname u8:#1\string #2\endcsname}
-%
-\gdef\UTFviiiThreeOctets#1#2#3{\expandafter
-   \UTFviiiDefined\csname u8:#1\string #2\string #3\endcsname}
-%
-\gdef\UTFviiiFourOctets#1#2#3#4{\expandafter
-   \UTFviiiDefined\csname u8:#1\string #2\string #3\string #4\endcsname}
-
-\gdef\UTFviiiDefined#1{%
-  \ifx #1\relax
-    \message{\linenumber Unicode char \string #1 not defined for Texinfo}%
-  \else
-    \expandafter #1%
-  \fi
-}
-
-\begingroup
-  \catcode`\~13
-  \catcode`\"12
-
-  \def\UTFviiiLoop{%
-    \global\catcode\countUTFx\active
-    \uccode`\~\countUTFx
-    \uppercase\expandafter{\UTFviiiTmp}%
-    \advance\countUTFx by 1
-    \ifnum\countUTFx < \countUTFy
-      \expandafter\UTFviiiLoop
-    \fi}
-
-  \countUTFx = "C2
-  \countUTFy = "E0
-  \def\UTFviiiTmp{%
-    \xdef~{\noexpand\UTFviiiTwoOctets\string~}}
-  \UTFviiiLoop
-
-  \countUTFx = "E0
-  \countUTFy = "F0
-  \def\UTFviiiTmp{%
-    \xdef~{\noexpand\UTFviiiThreeOctets\string~}}
-  \UTFviiiLoop
-
-  \countUTFx = "F0
-  \countUTFy = "F4
-  \def\UTFviiiTmp{%
-    \xdef~{\noexpand\UTFviiiFourOctets\string~}}
-  \UTFviiiLoop
-\endgroup
-
-\begingroup
-  \catcode`\"=12
-  \catcode`\<=12
-  \catcode`\.=12
-  \catcode`\,=12
-  \catcode`\;=12
-  \catcode`\!=12
-  \catcode`\~=13
-
-  \gdef\DeclareUnicodeCharacter#1#2{%
-    \countUTFz = "#1\relax
-    \wlog{\space\space defining Unicode char U+#1 (decimal \the\countUTFz)}%
-    \begingroup
-      \parseXMLCharref
-      \def\UTFviiiTwoOctets##1##2{%
-        \csname u8:##1\string ##2\endcsname}%
-      \def\UTFviiiThreeOctets##1##2##3{%
-        \csname u8:##1\string ##2\string ##3\endcsname}%
-      \def\UTFviiiFourOctets##1##2##3##4{%
-        \csname u8:##1\string ##2\string ##3\string ##4\endcsname}%
-      \expandafter\expandafter\expandafter\expandafter
-       \expandafter\expandafter\expandafter
-       \gdef\UTFviiiTmp{#2}%
-    \endgroup}
-
-  \gdef\parseXMLCharref{%
-    \ifnum\countUTFz < "A0\relax
-      \errhelp = \EMsimple
-      \errmessage{Cannot define Unicode char value < 00A0}%
-    \else\ifnum\countUTFz < "800\relax
-      \parseUTFviiiA,%
-      \parseUTFviiiB C\UTFviiiTwoOctets.,%
-    \else\ifnum\countUTFz < "10000\relax
-      \parseUTFviiiA;%
-      \parseUTFviiiA,%
-      \parseUTFviiiB E\UTFviiiThreeOctets.{,;}%
-    \else
-      \parseUTFviiiA;%
-      \parseUTFviiiA,%
-      \parseUTFviiiA!%
-      \parseUTFviiiB F\UTFviiiFourOctets.{!,;}%
-    \fi\fi\fi
-  }
-
-  \gdef\parseUTFviiiA#1{%
-    \countUTFx = \countUTFz
-    \divide\countUTFz by 64
-    \countUTFy = \countUTFz
-    \multiply\countUTFz by 64
-    \advance\countUTFx by -\countUTFz
-    \advance\countUTFx by 128
-    \uccode `#1\countUTFx
-    \countUTFz = \countUTFy}
-
-  \gdef\parseUTFviiiB#1#2#3#4{%
-    \advance\countUTFz by "#10\relax
-    \uccode `#3\countUTFz
-    \uppercase{\gdef\UTFviiiTmp{#2#3#4}}}
-\endgroup
-
-\def\utfeightchardefs{%
-  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00A0}{\tie}
-  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00A1}{\exclamdown}
-  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00A3}{\pounds}
-  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00A8}{\"{ }}
-  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00A9}{\copyright}
-  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00AA}{\ordf}
-  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00AD}{\-}
-  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00AE}{\registeredsymbol}
-  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00AF}{\={ }}
-
-  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00B0}{\ringaccent{ }}
-  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00B4}{\'{ }}
-  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00B8}{\cedilla{ }}
-  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00BA}{\ordm}
-  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00BF}{\questiondown}
-
-  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00C0}{\`A}
-  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00C1}{\'A}
-  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00C2}{\^A}
-  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00C3}{\~A}
-  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00C4}{\"A}
-  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00C5}{\AA}
-  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00C6}{\AE}
-  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00C7}{\cedilla{C}}
-  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00C8}{\`E}
-  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00C9}{\'E}
-  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00CA}{\^E}
-  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00CB}{\"E}
-  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00CC}{\`I}
-  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00CD}{\'I}
-  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00CE}{\^I}
-  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00CF}{\"I}
-
-  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00D1}{\~N}
-  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00D2}{\`O}
-  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00D3}{\'O}
-  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00D4}{\^O}
-  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00D5}{\~O}
-  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00D6}{\"O}
-  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00D8}{\O}
-  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00D9}{\`U}
-  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00DA}{\'U}
-  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00DB}{\^U}
-  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00DC}{\"U}
-  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00DD}{\'Y}
-  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00DF}{\ss}
-
-  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00E0}{\`a}
-  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00E1}{\'a}
-  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00E2}{\^a}
-  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00E3}{\~a}
-  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00E4}{\"a}
-  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00E5}{\aa}
-  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00E6}{\ae}
-  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00E7}{\cedilla{c}}
-  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00E8}{\`e}
-  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00E9}{\'e}
-  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00EA}{\^e}
-  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00EB}{\"e}
-  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00EC}{\`{\dotless{i}}}
-  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00ED}{\'{\dotless{i}}}
-  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00EE}{\^{\dotless{i}}}
-  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00EF}{\"{\dotless{i}}}
-
-  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00F1}{\~n}
-  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00F2}{\`o}
-  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00F3}{\'o}
-  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00F4}{\^o}
-  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00F5}{\~o}
-  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00F6}{\"o}
-  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00F8}{\o}
-  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00F9}{\`u}
-  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00FA}{\'u}
-  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00FB}{\^u}
-  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00FC}{\"u}
-  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00FD}{\'y}
-  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00FF}{\"y}
-
-  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0100}{\=A}
-  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0101}{\=a}
-  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0102}{\u{A}}
-  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0103}{\u{a}}
-  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0106}{\'C}
-  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0107}{\'c}
-  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0108}{\^C}
-  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0109}{\^c}
-  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{010A}{\dotaccent{C}}
-  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{010B}{\dotaccent{c}}
-  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{010C}{\v{C}}
-  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{010D}{\v{c}}
-  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{010E}{\v{D}}
-
-  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0112}{\=E}
-  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0113}{\=e}
-  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0114}{\u{E}}
-  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0115}{\u{e}}
-  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0116}{\dotaccent{E}}
-  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0117}{\dotaccent{e}}
-  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{011A}{\v{E}}
-  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{011B}{\v{e}}
-  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{011C}{\^G}
-  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{011D}{\^g}
-  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{011E}{\u{G}}
-  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{011F}{\u{g}}
-
-  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0120}{\dotaccent{G}}
-  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0121}{\dotaccent{g}}
-  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0124}{\^H}
-  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0125}{\^h}
-  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0128}{\~I}
-  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0129}{\~{\dotless{i}}}
-  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{012A}{\=I}
-  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{012B}{\={\dotless{i}}}
-  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{012C}{\u{I}}
-  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{012D}{\u{\dotless{i}}}
-
-  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0130}{\dotaccent{I}}
-  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0131}{\dotless{i}}
-  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0132}{IJ}
-  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0133}{ij}
-  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0134}{\^J}
-  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0135}{\^{\dotless{j}}}
-  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0139}{\'L}
-  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{013A}{\'l}
-
-  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0141}{\L}
-  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0142}{\l}
-  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0143}{\'N}
-  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0144}{\'n}
-  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0147}{\v{N}}
-  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0148}{\v{n}}
-  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{014C}{\=O}
-  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{014D}{\=o}
-  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{014E}{\u{O}}
-  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{014F}{\u{o}}
-
-  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0150}{\H{O}}
-  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0151}{\H{o}}
-  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0152}{\OE}
-  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0153}{\oe}
-  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0154}{\'R}
-  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0155}{\'r}
-  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0158}{\v{R}}
-  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0159}{\v{r}}
-  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{015A}{\'S}
-  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{015B}{\'s}
-  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{015C}{\^S}
-  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{015D}{\^s}
-  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{015E}{\cedilla{S}}
-  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{015F}{\cedilla{s}}
-
-  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0160}{\v{S}}
-  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0161}{\v{s}}
-  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0162}{\cedilla{t}}
-  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0163}{\cedilla{T}}
-  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0164}{\v{T}}
-
-  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0168}{\~U}
-  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0169}{\~u}
-  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{016A}{\=U}
-  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{016B}{\=u}
-  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{016C}{\u{U}}
-  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{016D}{\u{u}}
-  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{016E}{\ringaccent{U}}
-  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{016F}{\ringaccent{u}}
-
-  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0170}{\H{U}}
-  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0171}{\H{u}}
-  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0174}{\^W}
-  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0175}{\^w}
-  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0176}{\^Y}
-  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0177}{\^y}
-  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0178}{\"Y}
-  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0179}{\'Z}
-  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{017A}{\'z}
-  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{017B}{\dotaccent{Z}}
-  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{017C}{\dotaccent{z}}
-  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{017D}{\v{Z}}
-  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{017E}{\v{z}}
-
-  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01C4}{D\v{Z}}
-  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01C5}{D\v{z}}
-  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01C6}{d\v{z}}
-  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01C7}{LJ}
-  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01C8}{Lj}
-  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01C9}{lj}
-  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01CA}{NJ}
-  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01CB}{Nj}
-  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01CC}{nj}
-  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01CD}{\v{A}}
-  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01CE}{\v{a}}
-  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01CF}{\v{I}}
-
-  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01D0}{\v{\dotless{i}}}
-  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01D1}{\v{O}}
-  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01D2}{\v{o}}
-  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01D3}{\v{U}}
-  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01D4}{\v{u}}
-
-  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01E2}{\={\AE}}
-  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01E3}{\={\ae}}
-  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01E6}{\v{G}}
-  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01E7}{\v{g}}
-  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01E8}{\v{K}}
-  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01E9}{\v{k}}
-
-  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01F0}{\v{\dotless{j}}}
-  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01F1}{DZ}
-  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01F2}{Dz}
-  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01F3}{dz}
-  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01F4}{\'G}
-  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01F5}{\'g}
-  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01F8}{\`N}
-  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01F9}{\`n}
-  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01FC}{\'{\AE}}
-  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01FD}{\'{\ae}}
-  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01FE}{\'{\O}}
-  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01FF}{\'{\o}}
-
-  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{021E}{\v{H}}
-  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{021F}{\v{h}}
-
-  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0226}{\dotaccent{A}}
-  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0227}{\dotaccent{a}}
-  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0228}{\cedilla{E}}
-  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0229}{\cedilla{e}}
-  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{022E}{\dotaccent{O}}
-  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{022F}{\dotaccent{o}}
-
-  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0232}{\=Y}
-  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0233}{\=y}
-  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0237}{\dotless{j}}
-
-  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E02}{\dotaccent{B}}
-  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E03}{\dotaccent{b}}
-  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E04}{\udotaccent{B}}
-  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E05}{\udotaccent{b}}
-  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E06}{\ubaraccent{B}}
-  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E07}{\ubaraccent{b}}
-  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E0A}{\dotaccent{D}}
-  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E0B}{\dotaccent{d}}
-  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E0C}{\udotaccent{D}}
-  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E0D}{\udotaccent{d}}
-  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E0E}{\ubaraccent{D}}
-  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E0F}{\ubaraccent{d}}
-
-  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E1E}{\dotaccent{F}}
-  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E1F}{\dotaccent{f}}
-
-  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E20}{\=G}
-  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E21}{\=g}
-  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E22}{\dotaccent{H}}
-  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E23}{\dotaccent{h}}
-  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E24}{\udotaccent{H}}
-  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E25}{\udotaccent{h}}
-  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E26}{\"H}
-  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E27}{\"h}
-
-  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E30}{\'K}
-  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E31}{\'k}
-  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E32}{\udotaccent{K}}
-  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E33}{\udotaccent{k}}
-  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E34}{\ubaraccent{K}}
-  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E35}{\ubaraccent{k}}
-  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E36}{\udotaccent{L}}
-  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E37}{\udotaccent{l}}
-  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E3A}{\ubaraccent{L}}
-  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E3B}{\ubaraccent{l}}
-  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E3E}{\'M}
-  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E3F}{\'m}
-
-  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E40}{\dotaccent{M}}
-  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E41}{\dotaccent{m}}
-  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E42}{\udotaccent{M}}
-  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E43}{\udotaccent{m}}
-  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E44}{\dotaccent{N}}
-  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E45}{\dotaccent{n}}
-  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E46}{\udotaccent{N}}
-  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E47}{\udotaccent{n}}
-  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E48}{\ubaraccent{N}}
-  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E49}{\ubaraccent{n}}
-
-  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E54}{\'P}
-  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E55}{\'p}
-  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E56}{\dotaccent{P}}
-  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E57}{\dotaccent{p}}
-  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E58}{\dotaccent{R}}
-  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E59}{\dotaccent{r}}
-  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E5A}{\udotaccent{R}}
-  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E5B}{\udotaccent{r}}
-  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E5E}{\ubaraccent{R}}
-  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E5F}{\ubaraccent{r}}
-
-  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E60}{\dotaccent{S}}
-  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E61}{\dotaccent{s}}
-  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E62}{\udotaccent{S}}
-  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E63}{\udotaccent{s}}
-  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E6A}{\dotaccent{T}}
-  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E6B}{\dotaccent{t}}
-  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E6C}{\udotaccent{T}}
-  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E6D}{\udotaccent{t}}
-  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E6E}{\ubaraccent{T}}
-  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E6F}{\ubaraccent{t}}
-
-  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E7C}{\~V}
-  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E7D}{\~v}
-  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E7E}{\udotaccent{V}}
-  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E7F}{\udotaccent{v}}
-
-  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E80}{\`W}
-  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E81}{\`w}
-  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E82}{\'W}
-  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E83}{\'w}
-  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E84}{\"W}
-  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E85}{\"w}
-  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E86}{\dotaccent{W}}
-  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E87}{\dotaccent{w}}
-  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E88}{\udotaccent{W}}
-  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E89}{\udotaccent{w}}
-  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E8A}{\dotaccent{X}}
-  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E8B}{\dotaccent{x}}
-  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E8C}{\"X}
-  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E8D}{\"x}
-  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E8E}{\dotaccent{Y}}
-  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E8F}{\dotaccent{y}}
-
-  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E90}{\^Z}
-  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E91}{\^z}
-  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E92}{\udotaccent{Z}}
-  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E93}{\udotaccent{z}}
-  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E94}{\ubaraccent{Z}}
-  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E95}{\ubaraccent{z}}
-  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E96}{\ubaraccent{h}}
-  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E97}{\"t}
-  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E98}{\ringaccent{w}}
-  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E99}{\ringaccent{y}}
-
-  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1EA0}{\udotaccent{A}}
-  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1EA1}{\udotaccent{a}}
-
-  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1EB8}{\udotaccent{E}}
-  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1EB9}{\udotaccent{e}}
-  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1EBC}{\~E}
-  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1EBD}{\~e}
-
-  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1ECA}{\udotaccent{I}}
-  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1ECB}{\udotaccent{i}}
-  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1ECC}{\udotaccent{O}}
-  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1ECD}{\udotaccent{o}}
-
-  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1EE4}{\udotaccent{U}}
-  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1EE5}{\udotaccent{u}}
-
-  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1EF2}{\`Y}
-  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1EF3}{\`y}
-  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1EF4}{\udotaccent{Y}}
-
-  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1EF8}{\~Y}
-  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1EF9}{\~y}
-
-  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2013}{--}
-  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2014}{---}
-  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2022}{\bullet}
-  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2026}{\dots}
-  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{20AC}{\euro}
-
-  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2192}{\expansion}
-  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{21D2}{\result}
-
-  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2212}{\minus}
-  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2217}{\point}
-  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2261}{\equiv}
-}% end of \utfeightchardefs
-
-
-% US-ASCII character definitions.
-\def\asciichardefs{% nothing need be done
-   \relax
-}
-
-% Make non-ASCII characters printable again for compatibility with
-% existing Texinfo documents that may use them, even without declaring a
-% document encoding.
-%
-\setnonasciicharscatcode \other
-
-
-\message{formatting,}
-
-\newdimen\defaultparindent \defaultparindent = 15pt
-
-\chapheadingskip = 15pt plus 4pt minus 2pt
-\secheadingskip = 12pt plus 3pt minus 2pt
-\subsecheadingskip = 9pt plus 2pt minus 2pt
-
-% Prevent underfull vbox error messages.
-\vbadness = 10000
-
-% Don't be so finicky about underfull hboxes, either.
-\hbadness = 2000
-
-% Following George Bush, just get rid of widows and orphans.
-\widowpenalty=10000
-\clubpenalty=10000
-
-% Use TeX 3.0's \emergencystretch to help line breaking, but if we're
-% using an old version of TeX, don't do anything.  We want the amount of
-% stretch added to depend on the line length, hence the dependence on
-% \hsize.  We call this whenever the paper size is set.
-%
-\def\setemergencystretch{%
-  \ifx\emergencystretch\thisisundefined
-    % Allow us to assign to \emergencystretch anyway.
-    \def\emergencystretch{\dimen0}%
-  \else
-    \emergencystretch = .15\hsize
-  \fi
-}
-
-% Parameters in order: 1) textheight; 2) textwidth;
-% 3) voffset; 4) hoffset; 5) binding offset; 6) topskip;
-% 7) physical page height; 8) physical page width.
-%
-% We also call \setleading{\textleading}, so the caller should define
-% \textleading.  The caller should also set \parskip.
-%
-\def\internalpagesizes#1#2#3#4#5#6#7#8{%
-  \voffset = #3\relax
-  \topskip = #6\relax
-  \splittopskip = \topskip
-  %
-  \vsize = #1\relax
-  \advance\vsize by \topskip
-  \outervsize = \vsize
-  \advance\outervsize by 2\topandbottommargin
-  \pageheight = \vsize
-  %
-  \hsize = #2\relax
-  \outerhsize = \hsize
-  \advance\outerhsize by 0.5in
-  \pagewidth = \hsize
-  %
-  \normaloffset = #4\relax
-  \bindingoffset = #5\relax
-  %
-  \ifpdf
-    \pdfpageheight #7\relax
-    \pdfpagewidth #8\relax
-  \fi
-  %
-  \setleading{\textleading}
-  %
-  \parindent = \defaultparindent
-  \setemergencystretch
-}
-
-% @letterpaper (the default).
-\def\letterpaper{{\globaldefs = 1
-  \parskip = 3pt plus 2pt minus 1pt
-  \textleading = 13.2pt
-  %
-  % If page is nothing but text, make it come out even.
-  \internalpagesizes{46\baselineskip}{6in}%
-                    {\voffset}{.25in}%
-                    {\bindingoffset}{36pt}%
-                    {11in}{8.5in}%
-}}
-
-% Use @smallbook to reset parameters for 7x9.25 trim size.
-\def\smallbook{{\globaldefs = 1
-  \parskip = 2pt plus 1pt
-  \textleading = 12pt
-  %
-  \internalpagesizes{7.5in}{5in}%
-                    {\voffset}{.25in}%
-                    {\bindingoffset}{16pt}%
-                    {9.25in}{7in}%
-  %
-  \lispnarrowing = 0.3in
-  \tolerance = 700
-  \hfuzz = 1pt
-  \contentsrightmargin = 0pt
-  \defbodyindent = .5cm
-}}
-
-% Use @smallerbook to reset parameters for 6x9 trim size.
-% (Just testing, parameters still in flux.)
-\def\smallerbook{{\globaldefs = 1
-  \parskip = 1.5pt plus 1pt
-  \textleading = 12pt
-  %
-  \internalpagesizes{7.4in}{4.8in}%
-                    {-.2in}{-.4in}%
-                    {0pt}{14pt}%
-                    {9in}{6in}%
-  %
-  \lispnarrowing = 0.25in
-  \tolerance = 700
-  \hfuzz = 1pt
-  \contentsrightmargin = 0pt
-  \defbodyindent = .4cm
-}}
-
-% Use @afourpaper to print on European A4 paper.
-\def\afourpaper{{\globaldefs = 1
-  \parskip = 3pt plus 2pt minus 1pt
-  \textleading = 13.2pt
-  %
-  % Double-side printing via postscript on Laserjet 4050
-  % prints double-sided nicely when \bindingoffset=10mm and \hoffset=-6mm.
-  % To change the settings for a different printer or situation, adjust
-  % \normaloffset until the front-side and back-side texts align.  Then
-  % do the same for \bindingoffset.  You can set these for testing in
-  % your texinfo source file like this:
-  % @tex
-  % \global\normaloffset = -6mm
-  % \global\bindingoffset = 10mm
-  % @end tex
-  \internalpagesizes{51\baselineskip}{160mm}
-                    {\voffset}{\hoffset}%
-                    {\bindingoffset}{44pt}%
-                    {297mm}{210mm}%
-  %
-  \tolerance = 700
-  \hfuzz = 1pt
-  \contentsrightmargin = 0pt
-  \defbodyindent = 5mm
-}}
-
-% Use @afivepaper to print on European A5 paper.
-% From romildo@urano.iceb.ufop.br, 2 July 2000.
-% He also recommends making @example and @lisp be small.
-\def\afivepaper{{\globaldefs = 1
-  \parskip = 2pt plus 1pt minus 0.1pt
-  \textleading = 12.5pt
-  %
-  \internalpagesizes{160mm}{120mm}%
-                    {\voffset}{\hoffset}%
-                    {\bindingoffset}{8pt}%
-                    {210mm}{148mm}%
-  %
-  \lispnarrowing = 0.2in
-  \tolerance = 800
-  \hfuzz = 1.2pt
-  \contentsrightmargin = 0pt
-  \defbodyindent = 2mm
-  \tableindent = 12mm
-}}
-
-% A specific text layout, 24x15cm overall, intended for A4 paper.
-\def\afourlatex{{\globaldefs = 1
-  \afourpaper
-  \internalpagesizes{237mm}{150mm}%
-                    {\voffset}{4.6mm}%
-                    {\bindingoffset}{7mm}%
-                    {297mm}{210mm}%
-  %
-  % Must explicitly reset to 0 because we call \afourpaper.
-  \globaldefs = 0
-}}
-
-% Use @afourwide to print on A4 paper in landscape format.
-\def\afourwide{{\globaldefs = 1
-  \afourpaper
-  \internalpagesizes{241mm}{165mm}%
-                    {\voffset}{-2.95mm}%
-                    {\bindingoffset}{7mm}%
-                    {297mm}{210mm}%
-  \globaldefs = 0
-}}
-
-% @pagesizes TEXTHEIGHT[,TEXTWIDTH]
-% Perhaps we should allow setting the margins, \topskip, \parskip,
-% and/or leading, also. Or perhaps we should compute them somehow.
-%
-\parseargdef\pagesizes{\pagesizesyyy #1,,\finish}
-\def\pagesizesyyy#1,#2,#3\finish{{%
-  \setbox0 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #2}\ifdim\wd0 > 0pt \hsize=#2\relax \fi
-  \globaldefs = 1
-  %
-  \parskip = 3pt plus 2pt minus 1pt
-  \setleading{\textleading}%
-  %
-  \dimen0 = #1
-  \advance\dimen0 by \voffset
-  %
-  \dimen2 = \hsize
-  \advance\dimen2 by \normaloffset
-  %
-  \internalpagesizes{#1}{\hsize}%
-                    {\voffset}{\normaloffset}%
-                    {\bindingoffset}{44pt}%
-                    {\dimen0}{\dimen2}%
-}}
-
-% Set default to letter.
-%
-\letterpaper
-
-
-\message{and turning on texinfo input format.}
-
-% Define macros to output various characters with catcode for normal text.
-\catcode`\"=\other
-\catcode`\~=\other
-\catcode`\^=\other
-\catcode`\_=\other
-\catcode`\|=\other
-\catcode`\<=\other
-\catcode`\>=\other
-\catcode`\+=\other
-\catcode`\$=\other
-\def\normaldoublequote{"}
-\def\normaltilde{~}
-\def\normalcaret{^}
-\def\normalunderscore{_}
-\def\normalverticalbar{|}
-\def\normalless{<}
-\def\normalgreater{>}
-\def\normalplus{+}
-\def\normaldollar{$}%$ font-lock fix
-
-% This macro is used to make a character print one way in \tt
-% (where it can probably be output as-is), and another way in other fonts,
-% where something hairier probably needs to be done.
-%
-% #1 is what to print if we are indeed using \tt; #2 is what to print
-% otherwise.  Since all the Computer Modern typewriter fonts have zero
-% interword stretch (and shrink), and it is reasonable to expect all
-% typewriter fonts to have this, we can check that font parameter.
-%
-\def\ifusingtt#1#2{\ifdim \fontdimen3\font=0pt #1\else #2\fi}
-
-% Same as above, but check for italic font.  Actually this also catches
-% non-italic slanted fonts since it is impossible to distinguish them from
-% italic fonts.  But since this is only used by $ and it uses \sl anyway
-% this is not a problem.
-\def\ifusingit#1#2{\ifdim \fontdimen1\font>0pt #1\else #2\fi}
-
-% Turn off all special characters except @
-% (and those which the user can use as if they were ordinary).
-% Most of these we simply print from the \tt font, but for some, we can
-% use math or other variants that look better in normal text.
-
-\catcode`\"=\active
-\def\activedoublequote{{\tt\char34}}
-\let"=\activedoublequote
-\catcode`\~=\active
-\def~{{\tt\char126}}
-\chardef\hat=`\^
-\catcode`\^=\active
-\def^{{\tt \hat}}
-
-\catcode`\_=\active
-\def_{\ifusingtt\normalunderscore\_}
-\let\realunder=_
-% Subroutine for the previous macro.
-\def\_{\leavevmode \kern.07em \vbox{\hrule width.3em height.1ex}\kern .07em }
-
-\catcode`\|=\active
-\def|{{\tt\char124}}
-\chardef \less=`\<
-\catcode`\<=\active
-\def<{{\tt \less}}
-\chardef \gtr=`\>
-\catcode`\>=\active
-\def>{{\tt \gtr}}
-\catcode`\+=\active
-\def+{{\tt \char 43}}
-\catcode`\$=\active
-\def${\ifusingit{{\sl\$}}\normaldollar}%$ font-lock fix
-
-% If a .fmt file is being used, characters that might appear in a file
-% name cannot be active until we have parsed the command line.
-% So turn them off again, and have \everyjob (or @setfilename) turn them on.
-% \otherifyactive is called near the end of this file.
-\def\otherifyactive{\catcode`+=\other \catcode`\_=\other}
-
-% Used sometimes to turn off (effectively) the active characters even after
-% parsing them.
-\def\turnoffactive{%
-  \normalturnoffactive
-  \otherbackslash
-}
-
-\catcode`\@=0
-
-% \backslashcurfont outputs one backslash character in current font,
-% as in \char`\\.
-\global\chardef\backslashcurfont=`\\
-\global\let\rawbackslashxx=\backslashcurfont  % let existing .??s files work
-
-% \realbackslash is an actual character `\' with catcode other, and
-% \doublebackslash is two of them (for the pdf outlines).
-{\catcode`\\=\other @gdef@realbackslash{\} @gdef@doublebackslash{\\}}
-
-% In texinfo, backslash is an active character; it prints the backslash
-% in fixed width font.
-\catcode`\\=\active
-@def@normalbackslash{{@tt@backslashcurfont}}
-% On startup, @fixbackslash assigns:
-%  @let \ = @normalbackslash
-
-% \rawbackslash defines an active \ to do \backslashcurfont.
-% \otherbackslash defines an active \ to be a literal `\' character with
-% catcode other.
-@gdef@rawbackslash{@let\=@backslashcurfont}
-@gdef@otherbackslash{@let\=@realbackslash}
-
-% Same as @turnoffactive except outputs \ as {\tt\char`\\} instead of
-% the literal character `\'.
-% 
-@def@normalturnoffactive{%
-  @let\=@normalbackslash
-  @let"=@normaldoublequote
-  @let~=@normaltilde
-  @let^=@normalcaret
-  @let_=@normalunderscore
-  @let|=@normalverticalbar
-  @let<=@normalless
-  @let>=@normalgreater
-  @let+=@normalplus
-  @let$=@normaldollar %$ font-lock fix
-  @unsepspaces
-}
-
-% Make _ and + \other characters, temporarily.
-% This is canceled by @fixbackslash.
-@otherifyactive
-
-% If a .fmt file is being used, we don't want the `\input texinfo' to show up.
-% That is what \eatinput is for; after that, the `\' should revert to printing
-% a backslash.
-%
-@gdef@eatinput input texinfo{@fixbackslash}
-@global@let\ = @eatinput
-
-% On the other hand, perhaps the file did not have a `\input texinfo'. Then
-% the first `\' in the file would cause an error. This macro tries to fix
-% that, assuming it is called before the first `\' could plausibly occur.
-% Also turn back on active characters that might appear in the input
-% file name, in case not using a pre-dumped format.
-%
-@gdef@fixbackslash{%
-  @ifx\@eatinput @let\ = @normalbackslash @fi
-  @catcode`+=@active
-  @catcode`@_=@active
-}
-
-% Say @foo, not \foo, in error messages.
-@escapechar = `@@
-
-% These look ok in all fonts, so just make them not special.
-@catcode`@& = @other
-@catcode`@# = @other
-@catcode`@% = @other
-
-
-@c Local variables:
-@c eval: (add-hook 'write-file-hooks 'time-stamp)
-@c page-delimiter: "^\\\\message"
-@c time-stamp-start: "def\\\\texinfoversion{"
-@c time-stamp-format: "%:y-%02m-%02d.%02H"
-@c time-stamp-end: "}"
-@c End:
-
-@c vim:sw=2:
-
-@ignore
-   arch-tag: e1b36e32-c96e-4135-a41a-0b2efa2ea115
-@end ignore
diff --git a/debian/pinentry-tqt/pinentry-tqt-1.1.0/doc/version.texi b/debian/pinentry-tqt/pinentry-tqt-1.1.0/doc/version.texi
deleted file mode 100644
index 8ed26ce8..00000000
--- a/debian/pinentry-tqt/pinentry-tqt-1.1.0/doc/version.texi
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,4 +0,0 @@
-@set UPDATED 3 December 2017
-@set UPDATED-MONTH December 2017
-@set EDITION 1.1.0
-@set VERSION 1.1.0